SMe eee ee

qn CMA ES a late earn

= = a ” roe Pe aie re aa Kans cee res coment ee = = +> a ef aap ae <-
2 Fal i citing SSNS ahewnsbeerercmmr ate tee oad snaiosinaian tant

Seeiase mee

De SRE Dice oats Sees

Fo a ae BEES FRG IY iy BNE
Bie ae t ie pene karmic wate

ae ee Dk Pe a

TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND

oo

& « 2O @er
[ead Oe Er a aa "a

OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(LATE ADELAIDE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY).

BV sO) bess sue egally: dep:

(FOR 1879-80.)

Adelaide :
G. ROBERTSON, 103, KING WILLIAM STREET.
1880.

Aopal Society of South Australia.

2G -ee . — —
Patror :
HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN.

Wice-Patron ;
HIS EXCELLENCY SIR W. F. D. JERVOIS, G.C.M.G., C.B., &c.

Oud ge IPO 1s SS)

[ELECTED OCTOBER 5, 1880.]

President :
HIS HONOR S. J. WAY, CHIEF JUSTICE.

Wice-Presidents :
F. CHAPPLE, Hsa., B.A., B.Sc.
CHARLES TODD, Eso., C.M.G., F.R.A.S., &c.

Hon. Secretary : How. Crevsurer:
WALTER RUTT, Ese., (.E. | THOMAS D. SMEATON, Eso.

a,

aembers of Cowncil :

D. B. ADAMSON, Ese. | THOMAS D. SMEATON, Esa.

F. CHAPPLE, Esq, B.A., B.Sc. | PROF. R. TATE, F.G.S., &.,

S. J. MAGAREY, Esq., M.B. | (Natural Science Director).

WALTER RUTT, Eso., C.E. | J. D. THOMAS, Esoq., M.D.
HIS HONOR S. J. WAY, Eso., C.J.

CHARLES TODD, Esgq., C.M.G., F.R.A.S., &c.
(REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNOR.)

Assistant Seevetarp :
MR. A. MOLINEUX.

CONTENTS.

hii

List of Fellows

Rules and Regulations

Abstract of Proceedings

Annual Report 06 Fob
Donations to the Library

Anniversary Address by Professor Tate ...

Rey. J. E. Tenison Woods, on some Recent and Fossil Australian
Selenariade (plates i., ii.) ... jee

Mr. J. G. Otto Tepper on Red Rust
Mr. C. Todd: Notes on the Comet of February, 1880 (plate iii.)

Mr. J. G. Otto Tepper on the Native Plants of Yorke’s Peningale, and
Remarks on their distribution

Prof. R. Tate: A Census of the Indigenous Flora of extratropical
South Australia ... Ste Be ra a “as

Mr. J.G. Otto Tepper on the Bay of Biscay Soil and its Formation...
Rey. J. E. Tenison Woods on some new Fossil Corals

Prof. R. Tate on some new Species of South Australia Pulmonifera
(plate iv.) ie aS we

Prof. R. Tate on a new Species of Belemnite from Central Australia

Mr. Gavin Scoular on the Greoieey of Munno Para East: Part IT.
(plates v., vi.) es do

Rey. J. Kempe: The Indigenous Plants of the Macdonnell Ranges...
Diagnoses of new Species of South Australian Plants

Prof. R. Tate : on the Tae Palliobranchs of Australia My vii.
to xi.) ..

vil.

Xili.

. XXXIV.
.. XXXVIi.

.. XXXIK.

Miscellaneous Contributions to the Natural a aig of South Australia—

Freshwater Shells from Peake and River Onkaparinga
Plants collected at Fowler’s Bay and at Pedinga ...

List of Plants from Barrow’s and Tennant’s Creeks, Central
Australia

Curative Properties of Metalennd pee
Appendix to List of Plants about Ardrossan

Notes on the Rock Formations and Minerals about peste:

Central Australia
Graphic Granite
Well sections, Hundred of kien
Well section, Whittata, Lake, Torrens

Instructions for Collecting and Preserving
> pom Wry .

LIST OF

FELLOWS, MEMBERS, &c.,

November 2np, 1880.

Those marked (r) were present at the first meeting when the Society was

founded. Those marked (x) are Life Fellows.
asterisk have contributed papers.

HONORARY
Angas, Geo. French, F.L.S.,C.M.Z.S.
G.C.M.G.,

Barkely, Sir
K.C.B.
Hillery, R. L. J., E.R.S.
*(E -) Feignagle, CuG:
*Garran, A., L.L.D.
*Hull, H. M. ee i
Jervois, H.H.SirW.F.D. G. C.M. Gs
C.B. 3 ;

Henry,

Little, E.
Macleay, W., F. LS. 4
Aussell, H. C., B.A., F.R.A.S. ae
Von Mueller, Baron Ferd., K.C.M.G.,
FE.R.S.. &C. te
Warburton, Col. P. Egerton
*Wilson, C. "A.
*Woods, Rey.
F.G.S., &e. .
(cE) Young, J. L. ..

Canham, J. ee
Foelsche, Paul ..
“Hayter, H. H., F.S.S.
Richards, Mrs. A.
*Scoular, Gavin ..
*Tepper, J. G. Otto

*Adamson, D. B.
Addis, W. L.
Angas, J.H. ..
Biggs, Col. J. H.
Brunskill, George, J.P.
*Chalwin, Thomas

Chapple, F., B.A., B.Se. .
Cleland, R., M.D.
*(L) Cooke, E., M.P.
Cox, W. C. afc

Crawford, F. 8..

*Davenport, S.
Davidson, Rev. Professor, University
of Adelaide 46 46
Dobbie, A. W. .. are fe

i iy ae, IHS,

FELLOWS.

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Date of

MEMBERS, Hlection.
Norland-square, London 1879
eis ob 1857
Observatory, Melbourne 1876
Melbourne oe, oo. dfs}
Sydney .. 00 -. 1853
Hobart Town 1855
Government House oo alfsirds)
: 50) lifes)

Sydney .. -. 1878
Observatory, Sydney 1876
Melbourne 1879
Beaumont 1858
Supreme Court 1853:
Sydney 1877
Parkside .. 1853.
Stuart’s Creek 1880
Palmerston 1880)
Government Statist, Melbourne 1878
Fowler’s Bay 1880
Blair, Smithfield 1878
Ardrossan, Yorke’s Peninsula 1878:
Angas-street 1867
Currie-street 3 1879
Collingrove, Angaston 1874
Hdwardstown so | AUIS?
Morgan .. 50 oo Ses)
Currie-street Sins
Prince Alfred College 1876
Parade, Norwood 1879
South-terrace 1876
Buxton-street, North Adelaide 1880
Surveyor- General’s Office 1865
Beaumont ad -. 1856
Jeffcott-street, N. Adelaide .. 1876
Gawler-place 9 .. 1876

Those marked with an

Duffield, W. .

Elder, Sir Thomas ,
“Pletcher, Rey. W. R., M. A.,
Gall, D. 3

Gaze, W. H., M.D. ip
Giles, E. Wie

4(s) Gosse, William, M.D., F.R.C.S.

Gosse, Chas., M.D.

*Hamilton, George, Commissioner of

Police ;
Harrold, Arthur i
Harry, Thos. ..
Hay, Hon. Alexander, M. iu
Hickson, R., M.1.C.E. ..
*Hill, W.
Hopkins, Rey. W. aye
Hull, W. B., C.E.,
Hydraulic Engineer
Hullett, J. W. H.,C.E. ..
“Ingleby, R., Q.C.
Johnson, J. A. ..
pore’ J. F., M.D.

*(p) Kay, R., Secretary South Aus-

tralian Institute
Knevett, S.
*Laughton, E.
*Lloyd, J. S.
*Macgeorge, Jas.

Madley, L. G., ues of f Training

College
Magarey, A. T.
*Magarey, S. J., M.B.
Mayo, G.,M.D...
Mayo, G. G., C.E.
(t) Murray, David
Nesbit, E. P., Jun.
Nesbit, W. P., M.D.
*Ponton, T. G., F.Z.S.
Rees, John, M. D. b
Rees, Rowland, M.P., C. E.
Russell, W. A 3
*Rutt, Walter, C.E.

Assistant

*Schomburgk, R., Doctor Ph., &e.

Director
*Smeaton, T.D..
Smith, R. Barr ..
Smith, William, C.E.
Sparks, H.Y. .. ue
Strother, C. H., C.E. ae
Stuckey, J. J., M.A.

*Tate, Prof. Ralph, F.G.S., Univer-

sity of Adelaide
Telfer, W.
Thomas, J. Davies, M. D.
Thomas,
Healih

Thow, W., Locomotive Engineer i

R. G., Sec. of Board ‘of

Gawler

Grenfell-street
North-terrace, Kent Town
Tynte-street, N. Adelaide
Parade, Norwood
Government Offices
North-terrace
North-terrace

Adelaide Club
Hindley-street —
Exchange. .
Beaumont
Semaphore Ag
Kensington-road ..
Glenelg

Hydraulic Engineer’s Office. .
Port Augusta : ¢
King William-street

Alfred Chambers, Currie- street
South-terrace

College Town
Carrington-street
Currie-street
Lefevre-terrace, N. ‘Adelaide. .
King William-street

Moonta-street
Barton-terrace, N. Adelaide |
North-terrace
Morphett-street
Engineer-in-Chief’s Office
Hutt- street B

King William- street

North Adelaide

Port-road, Hindmarsh
Waymouth-street ..
Commercial-rd., Port Adelaide
Engineer-in- Chief’s Office

Botanic Gardens ..
Bank of South Australia
Torrens Park, Mitcham
Hydraulic Bogie: Office ..
Glenelg :
Engineer-in-Chief’s , Office 3
Victoria Chambers, King Wil-
liam-street

Buxton-street, N. Adelaide ..
Wallaroo Hospital .. :
North-terrace

Unley ..
S.A. Railways

1859
1871
1876
1865
1880
1877
1853
1877

1868
1876
1878
1861
1876
1874
1880

1874
1876
1861
1875
1880

1853
1878
1874
1856
1855

1879
1873
1874
1853
1874
1859
1875
1880
1877
1880
1874
1879
1869

1865
1857
1871
1880
1878
1880
1878
1876
1880
1877

1877
1878

Vi.

Todd, Charles, C.M.G., F.R.A.S.,
M.S.T.E., Postmaster - General,
Observer, and Superintendent of

Telegraphs .. of .. Observatory le
Tomkinson, 8. .. 30 -- Mount Lofty ,
Townsend, W., M.P. do -. King William- atreet
Umbehaun, C. .. ay .. General Post Office

“Verco, Joseph C., M.D. .. .. Wellington-square, N. Adelaide

Vickery, G. 56 50 .. Meadows’.

\Wrni) AWS 155 Go ue .. Victoria Chambers, King Wil-
liam-street <

*Waterhouse, F. G., C.M.Z.S., &c.,

Curator of Museum .. .. 8. A. Institute
Way, His Honor, S. J., C.J. -- North Adelaide
Way, E. W., M.R.C.8. .. .. North-terrace ;

Wragge, C. L., F.R.G.S. .. .. Care of R. Ingleby, King Wil-
liam-street 6
Wyatt, Wm., M.D. A .. Burnside ..
ASSOCIATES.
Holder, Sydney E. 50 .. Parade, Norwood ..
Rogers, R. 8S. .. af .. Bailey’s Coe Hackney ..
*Smeaton, Stirling bie .. Menindie.

1856
1876
1878
1879
1878
1868

1878

1859
1859
1878

1877
1859

1880
1880
1878

ees i) ha ES Sc

Wuereas “The Royal Society of South Australia”’ is incorpo-
rated with the South Australian Institute, under the provisions
of the South Australian Institute Act, 1863, and it is desirable
to consolidate and alter the Rules and Regulations at present
existing, it is therefore agreed that the Society shall be governed
by the following Rules and Regulations, to the ereineiern of all
previous Rules and Regulations:

1. The title of the Society is ‘‘ Tur Royat Socrery or SoutH
AUSTRALIA.”

2. The objects of this Society are the diffusion and advance-
ment of the arts and sciences, by the meeting together of the
members for the reading and discussion of papers connected
with the above subjects, and by other approved means.

3. The Society shall consist ‘of the present members, and of
such persons as shall be hereafter elected members.

4. The members shall be classed as follows :—Fellows,
Honorary Members, Corresponding Members, and Associates,
all of whom shall be elected by ballot.

5. The Sovereign shall be the Patron, and His Excellency
the Governor of South Australia for the time being shall be
requested to be the Vice-Patron of the Society.

FEEs.

6. Fellows shall subscribe £1 1s. per annum, payable in
advance on the 1st day of November to the Honorary Secretary.

7. A Fellow may at any time compound for future annual
contributions, that of the current year exclusive, by the pay-
ment of the sum of £10 10s. ;

8. Fellows elected during the first half of the financial year
shall, within one month after election, pay the full annual sub-
seription of one guinea; but if elected during the second half
of the year, they shall pay the sum of half a guinea only as
subscription for the remainder of the financial year.

9. Any person who has not paid the year’s contribution on or
before the 1st day of January shall be liable to have his name
removed by the Council from the list of members of the Society ;
provided always, that written application for the same shall
first have been made by or on behalf of the Treasurer ; and pro-

Vill.

vided also, that the Council shall have power to restore the
defaulter’s name at his request, and after payment of arrears.

Enecrion or Frtiows.
’ 10. Every election of a Fellow into the Society shall take
place at an ordinary meeting only.

11. Every candidate for admission into the Society must be
recommended by two members. The certificate setting forth
the names, address, and occupation of the candidate, with the
names of his proposer and seconder, shall be sent to the Secre-
tary, and shall be read at a meeting of Council, and also at the
following meeting of the Society, and the ballot shall take place
at the next following ordinary meeting of the Society.

12. The election of Fellows shall be by ballot, one negative
in six excluding ; and no candidate having been excluded shall
be again proposed for admission during the current year.

13. Persons elected shall have immediate notice thereof
transmitted to them by the Secretary, accompanied by a copy
of the Rules.

14. Fellows shall have a right to vote at all meetings and to
propose candidates for admission into the Society and into the
Council of the Society, subject to the Rules touching the election
and constitution of the Society. They shall be eligible to be
members of the Council, shall have access to the Library, and
shall be furnished with a copy of any transactions, proceedings,
or journal which may be published by the Society.

Honorary AND CORRESPONDING MEMBERS.

15. The Honorary Members shall be persons distinguished
for their attainments in science, literature, or art.

16. The Corresponding Members shall be persons residing
beyond ten miles from Adelaide, who, by furnishing papers or
otherwise, may have promoted the objects of the Society.

17. Every person proposed as an Honorary or Corresponding
Member shall be recommended by the Council, and be balloted
for as in the case of Fellows.

18. Honorary and Corresponding Members shall be exempted
from payment of fees ; they may exercise the privileges or per-
form the duties of Fellows, except that they shall not vote or
otherwise interfere in the business of the Society, or hold office
or seat on the Council.

ASSOCIATES.
19. Associates shall consist of young men of not more than
21 years of age, and of ladies.
20. Associates shall subscribe 5s. per annum, payable in ad-
vance on the Ist day of November, to the Honorary Secretary.

1b

21. The election of Associates shall be after the same manner
as in the case of Fellows.

22. Any Associate failing to pay his or her subscription
within one month of notice of election, or who shall be three
months’ in arrear with his or her subscription, shall cease to be
_ an Associate.

23. Associates shall enjoy all the privileges of Fellows except
those of taking part in the management of the affairs of the
Society, of voting, and of introducing visitors.

24. Any Associate shall be entitled to become a Fellow of the
Society at the first ordinary meeting following the receipt of
his application for Fellowship.

Locan CoRRESPONDENTS.

25. Local Correspondents shall be persons willing to co-ope-
rate with the Society in recording Natural Science phenomena
in this province, and shall be appointed by the Council. Such
Correspondents shall not exercise the privileges of members,
but shall be entitled to a copy of all approved communications
from the Local Correspondents, which may be published by the
Society.

MEETINGS.

26. Meetings of the Society shall be convened by circular to
the members resident in the colony. The cireular shall state
the subjects to be brought before the meeting, the names of
the candidates for membership, and any notice of motion.

27. Meetings of the Society to be held on days to be fixed by
the Council ; and as far as practicable one meeting shall be held
in each month. Hach meeting to commence at half-past 7
o'clock p.m.

28. The President, or in his absence one of the Vice-Presi-
dents, shall take the chair ; and in the event of the absence of
all the above, the members present shall elect a Chairman.

29. The business of the Society’s meetings shall be transacted
im the following order, unless it be specially decided other-
wise :—

t. The reading and confirming the minutes of the last
meeting.

tr. The nomination of candidates for membership and the
election of members.

ti. Vacancies among officers, if any, to be filled up.

iv. The transaction of the ordinary business.

v. Motions to be considered, and notices of motion for next
meeting to be read.

vt. The consideration of any special matters which mem-
bers may desire to bring forward subject to the ap-

2.

proval of the chairman obtained before the com-
mencement of the meeting.

vit. At 8 o’clock the paper or subject notified in the cir-
cular shall be read.

30. Any Fellow shall be allowed to introduce two visitors
upon entering their names in the Visitors’ Book. But no
visitor shall speak at a meeting of the Society unless specially
invited to do so by the Chairman.

31. No paper shall be read at any meeting which has not
been previously notified to the Council.

32. Every paper read before the Society shall be the property
thereof, and immediately after it has been read shall be deli-
vered to the Secretary and shall remain in his custody.

33. An annual general meeting of the members duly con-
vened by circular shall be held in the month of October at half-
past 7 o’clock in the evening, on such day as the Council may
appoint. In the event of less than ten Fellows being present,
it shall not be lawful forthe meeting to proceed to business
except for the purpose of adjournment, and the meeting shall
stand adjourned to a day and time then resolved upon.

34, At the adjourned meeting the Fellows then present may
proceed to business although ten Fellows may not be present.

35. The Council shall call a special meeting of the Society on
receiving a requisition in writing, signed by ten Fellows of the
Society, specifying the purpose for which the meeting is re-

uired, or upon a resolution of its own. No other business
shall be entertained at such meeting. Notice of such meeting,
and the purpose for which it is summoned, shall be sent to every
member at least seven days before the meeting. Ten Fellows
to form a quorum.

36. One Fellow, not being a member of the Council, shall be
chosen at the meeting of the Society next before the month of
October in each year as auditor of accounts and balance sheet
of the Society, and shall examine and certify the same prior to
the meeting in October.

THE Counctin.

37. The officers of the Society shall be a President, two
Vice-Presidents, a Treasurer, and a Secretary, who, with four
other members, shall constitute the Council.

38. The Council, on its first meeting, shall appoint one of its
members to represent the Society at the Board of Governors
of the South Australian Institute, and one to act as Director
of the Natural Science Correspondence Department.

39. The Council shall have the management of the affairs of
the Society.

40. The Council shall meet once in every month for the

Xi.

transaction of business at such time and place as may be ap-
pointed. Special meetings of the Council may be convened at
any other time on the authority of the President, or of three
members of the Council. Due notice of all Council meetings
to be sent to each member.

41. No business shall be transacted at any meeting of the
Council unless at least four members of the Council are present ;
in case of equality of votes the Chairman shall have an addi-
tional or casting vote.

42. It shall be the duty of the Council to decide on the papers
to be read at the monthly meetings, whether by members or non-
members ; to determine as to the publication in whole or in
part of any paper so read; to prepare a report of the proceed-
ings of the Society for the preceding year, and a balance sheet
of the Society’s funds, for presentation at the meeting of the
Society held in October; and generally to transact the ordi-
nary affairs of the Society.

43. Any member of Council, personally interested in a
question before the Council, shall withdraw during its considera-
tion.

44, Hyery vacancy in the Council shall be immediately filled
up at the next meeting of the Society by election by ballot.
The member so elected shall occupy the place of the retiring
member.

45. Any member of Council absenting himself from three
consecutive ordinary meetings of the Council without satisfac-
tory explanation shall be considered to have vacated office, and
the election of a member to fill his place shall be proceeded
with in accordance with Rule 44.

ELEection oF Orricers aND Mrempers or Counctt.

46. All officers and members of Council shall retire from
office annnally at the general meeting in October.

47. The officers and members of Council so retiring shall be
eligible for the same or any other office.

48. The President, the two Vice-Presidents, the Treasurer,
and the Secretary shall be separately elected by ballot (should
such be demanded) in the above-named order, and the four
vacancies in the Council shall be filled up together by ballot at
the general meeting in October.

SECRETARY.

49. It shall be the duty of the Honorary Secretary to attend
and take minutes of the proceedings of the Society and Council
respectively ; to make the necessary arrangements for meet-
ings ; to issue the required notices ; to collect the annual sub-
scriptions and to pay them to the Treasurer; to take charge of

xii.

all the property under the control of the Society ; and gene-
rally to transact the ordinary routine business of the Society.

TREASURER.

50. It shall be the duty of the Treasurer to receive all funds
belonging to the Society ; to pay all accounts approved by the
Coune ail ; and to render annually an account of all moneys re-
ceived and expended during his year of office.

Narurat Scrence Drrecror.

51. It shall be the duty of the Director to conduct the eor-
respondence with the Local Correspondents and Natural
Science Referees; to report at the ordinary meetings of the
Society all useful information. therein contained ; and to pre-

pare the same for publication, subject to the approval of the
Council.

ALTERATION OF RULES.

52. The Rules and Regulations of the Society shall not be
altered unless a written notice of motion, signed by not less
than five Fellows, be given at a meeting of the Society ; and
thereupon such motion may be brought forward at the next
meeting.

53. Any resolution passed as above altering or repealing the
Rules and Regulations of the Society shall be in force until
the meeting held in the month of October following ; and, if

not then confirmed, shall thereafter be held void and of no
effect.

mole TOF PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

Aoval Society of South Australia,

For 1879-1880.

—~

Orpinary Merrrinc, Novemser 1, 1879.
Protessor Ranen Tare, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.
The list of donations to the Library was read.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Professor Tare said, in reference to the ‘“ Naturalised
Weeds in South Australia,” by Dr. Schomburek, that he con-
sidered the list to be incomplete, as any aggressive weeds had
been overlooked. Of these he mentioned particularly a species
of Diplotaxis, a Salvia, Chenopodium murale, Trifolium agrarium,
&e. Whilst on the other hand, undue prominence was given
to such species as Bellis perennis, Eschscholtzia californica, &c.,
which in his opinion were no more than garden outcasts, and
their existence to a large extent was dependent on man’s
protective agency. He thought such a work as that issued by
the Doctor could hardly be suce sesstully undertaken by one
person single-handed ; and he trusted that the Society would
facilitate the future efforts of Dr. Schomburegk in that direction
by encouraging observers in all parts of the. colony to furnish
records. With regard to the recorded occurrence of the
indigenous plants of South Australia, he pointed out by

reference to certain widely-dispersed species that the informa-
tion given in the “ Flora Australiensis”” was very incomplete,
and that several species are not mentioned at all. Asan aid
to the study of our native flora, he stated that he had made
much progress towards a complete herbarium for the Univer-
sity, between 800 and 900 species being already mounted and
named. The collection would always be accessible to those
desirous of utilising it.

Professor Tarr stated that he had very recently visited
Ardrossan, and had examined, under the euidance of Mr.

X1v.

Tepper, the fossiliferous rocks referred to by that gentleman
in his paper published in last year’s Transactions. He was
happy to be able to confirm the principal statements made by
Mr. Tepper. He also exhibited some fossils collected by
himself from the Lower Silurian rocks, amongst them being a
well-preserved head of a trilobite, which showed no trace of
eyes.

Teteteesor Tare exhibited specimens of three species of the
pelagic molluse, Janthina, which he had received from King
George’s Sound, through the kindness of Professor Davidson.
The shells were in a fine state of preservation, and had
evidently been taken alive, as the wet sand in which they were
packed had been stained a rich violet hue by the colouring
matter exuded from the animal.

Mr. T. D. Smearon exhibited a number of small black
insects which he had received from Jamestown. He explained
that they were frequently found in cart-ruts. The body of
these insects he had found to be oval, while they were furnished
with antenne. The eye was depressed and compound, and the
body had a springing motion, but nevertheless it was probable
that the animal was not a Podurus, as it had no spring-tail.

The following communication was read:—‘“‘On Red Rust.”
By Mr. J. G. Otto Tepper. (See p. 13.)

Orpinary Merrrinc, DecempeEr 2, 1879.
Professor Ratpu Tare, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.
Dr. W. L. Cleland was elected a Fellow.

The list of donations <o the Library was read.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Professor Tare read portions of a letter from Baron F. von
Mueller in reference to the indigenous plants of South Aus-
tralia, and he advised that the Society do solicit Baron F. von
Mueller to prepare a revised list, giving more detailed infor-
mation, especially in regard to localities, an item in which the
“Flora Australiensis ”’ was deficient.

Mr. Motryevux exhibited specimens of Aphrophora spumaria,
found abundantly on all kinds of plants in his garden at Kent
Town. The perfect insect has pure white chalky-looking
wingcases ; the larve, in its first stage, 1s enveloped in the
characteristic frothy liquid, but afterwards it became covered
with a downy material like that of the “mealy-bug.”

Mr. Tuos. D. Smearvon exhibited a portfolio containing a
large number of plants collected upon the River Darling.

The following communication was read ‘‘On the Medicinal

— a SS SS

xy.

Uses of Wattle Bark (Acacia pycnantha),”’ by Dr. 8S. J.
Magarey :—
[ ABSTRACT. |

The golden or broad-leafed wattle (Acacia pycnantha) is found
in abundance in this colony, especially upon undulating hills,
thriving upon almost any soil, but preferentially on that of a
light sandy nature. It exudes an abundance of gum, and
affords what is now acknowledged to be “far and away the
most valuable tanning barkin the world.” Its higher branches
and twigs yield some of the best bark. The sap is up during
September to December, and hence these are the best months
for collecting the bark, whether for economic or medicinal pur-
poses. Itis acknowledged that the tanning properties improve
if the bark be kept for some little time. The wattle is at its
prime when it is from eight to ten years, and in the hands of
Mr. Bosisto it has yielded as much as 45 per cent. of tan
extractive. Its main use in medicine is as an astringent. It
corrugates the papille of the tongue, and imparts a decidedly
astringent taste, it coagulates albuminous fluids, and causes
contraction of muscular fibre. Its primary effect when applied
to a mucous membrane is to diminish secretion; and there is
no doubt that by diminishing the relaxation of the stomach and
intestines it promotes digestion. It ranks high amongst the
vegetable astringents, and the very finest qualities of Pegu
eatechu hardly exceed that of our wattle. As an astringent it
has been exceedingly serviceable to me in my practice amongst
infants and children. A form of diarrhoea exceedingly common
amongst them, and very fatal, seems to be met more readily
with this remedy than with any with which I am acquainted.
It occurs most frequently during dentition during the summer
months, especially in infants brought up by hand, but also
under the most favourable circumstances as regards diet and
nursing. The stools are exceedingly frequent, watery, usually
green or almost colourless, not always accompanied by pain.
But if unchecked, the child passes from this condition with a
restless fretful disposition ito that known as spurious hydro-
cephalus. I usually order an infusion, or prepare one at the
house, by putting a piece of bark weighing from half a drachm
to one drachm in a breakfast-cup two-thirds full of boiling
water, covering it and letting it stand for an hour or two. I
then direct a teaspoonful to be given every half-hour, or even
oftener. For adults the dose requires to be much larger.
Occasionally I have finely powdered the bark and triturated
with sugar of milk. I think the infusion will at all times give
more satisfaction than the tincture. There is a mistaken
notion that it is unwise to check diarrhoea in infants, but I am
inclined to think that the danger lies in failing to check it,

Xv.

although it is better not to stop it suddenly. The infusion of
Acacia pycnantha does not usually immediately arrest the
diarrhea. Errors in dieting must, of course, be corrected, and
attention to hygienic requirements 1s necessary 27 all cases, or
no remedy will be successful. In the winter-diarrhoea of infants
I have not found the remedy to be so efficacious. It is useful in
other forms of diarrhcea, but I do not think it should be used in
any inflammatory conditions. In dysentery its effect is not so
marked, and though useful, I think we have better remedies.
In sore eyes, catarrhal ophthalmia, it is a favourite remedy in
the country. I have used it with success in such cases. In a
ease of granular lids I think the patient benefited from its
use, although under ordinary treatment his disease had remained
stationary. In true diphtheria it is unreliable; but in those
vases where there is a deposit upon the tonsils, diphtheric in
character, but unaccompanied by the characteristic symptoms
of blood-poisoning, it seems when used as a gargle or as a
elyeerole painted upon the pharynx and tonsils to be very
useful. In sore throat, simple angina, itis valuable. It makes
a fine gargle for relaxed throat, and more especially for that
form of sore throat which is rendered less painful by eating a
meal. I have mixed two drachms of the tincture with an ounce
of glycerine, and have found a useful application for otorrheea
(running at the ears), for chapped lips, and slight fissures of
various kinds. I have used it also in ozena. It is very useful
for sore nipples in nursing mothers. I do not think it is so
useful in this form as the glycerine of tannic acid, but it makes
an excellent substitute for it. In sweating feet, it is a good
plan to steep them occasionally in a strong infusion of the
bark. In typhoid fever it has on one or two occasions seemed
to check what appeared to be an incipient attack. But we
have a much better remedy in baptisin. J used it in one case
of typhoid fever for hemorrhage from the bowels with apparent
success. The remedy ought to be useful in hemoptysis (spit-
ting of blood), hematemesis (vomiting of blood). It deserves
a trial in all discharges from a mucous membrane, as leuco-
trheea, &c., &c. I have been informed that the gum of the
wattle, taken internally, is a useful remedy for piles. It is
used in veterinary practice in the country for wounds and raw
shoulders. I have tried it occasionally, and feel encouraged
by the results. It is more generally of advantage in indolent
ulcers and wounds that want a little gentle bracing-up. It is
a good remedy for eczema where there is much weeping, and is
really admirable for intertrigo (that is, the chafing of the skin
of an infant) that occurs in the folds of the skin and about
the nates. It ought to be useful for the arrest of venous
hemorrhage from the surface, but I have not yet given it a

XVil.

trial. It may be objected that these ailments can be treated
equally well with other astringents. This is not the case in
all the instances referred to. But granting the truth of the
statement, yet it is some advantage “to know that we have at
our doors so excellent a remedy. "Tt has several other advan-
tages besides being so easily obtained, it is not unpleasant to
the palate, and there is seldom any difficulty i in getting children
to take it. The tincture, too, has a beautiful colour, an adyan-
tage not to be despised. It is not poisonous.

Mr. Montyevx said that when he was a boy wattlebark was
often used for opthalmic complaints, and some persons had
been known to drink the tan-water at a tanyard to cure
diarrhoea and dysentery, and it was found of benefit in cases
of sore eyes.

Professor Tarr asked if the natives used infusions of bark,
because if they did the knowledge might be useful. He believed
a doctor in Queensland was directing attention to the subject.
As far as he knew, the natives seemed quite helpless in cases
of illness.

Mr. T. Macarey said white gum was used by the aborigines,
he believed, in certain complaints. He thought a great mistake
was being made in attempting to substitute different trees in
the Park Lands for trees such as the peppermint and white-
gum and wattle that originally flourished there. If the Cor-
poration would take the trouble to plant groves of wattles it
would be found beneficial, as the gum was no doubt wholesome.
Children eat it. Some simple mennenies were very effectual,
and often the primitive remedies used by old women were found
to serve an excellent purpose. Old women were very useful,
provided they were old women of the right sex.

Professor Tavs initiated a discussion on the encouragement
of natural history research in South Australia. He proposed
a scheme for the systematic reception and record of facts
relating to the natural history of the colony, and made sugges-
tions as to the best means of stimulating the practical study of
natural science. He said Mr. Lloyd, in 1866, very earnestly
urged upon the attention of members the two fundamental
objects of the Society, on which he remarked that its founders
were desirous that it should not only afford an agreeable
medium of intercommunication to those whose tastes led them
to the pursuit of similar studies, but that it should also pre-
sent a means of illustrating and recording the many interesting
natural phenomena peculiar to the country, and which it was
feared would be altogether, in a few years, irrevocably lost to
the records of science. Six years later Mr. Smeaton submitted
to the consideration of the Society some practicai suggestions

b

Xviil.

by which it was thought those objects could best be obtained.
No response seemed to have been given to the appeal. Now
that the Society was better circumstanced, it should give effect
. to the abstract resolutions proposed in 1872. The time had
arrived when the Society should make strenuous efforts in the
direction indicated. By its widespread publications it offered
to provincial workers a channel of intercommunication, and
was prepared to adequately illustrate all original papers, when
necessary, by lithographic plates. The healthy vigour of the
Society must be to a large extent sustained by the efforts of
those occupying themselves with the more technical aspects
of science, but such workers needed coadjutors. The Society
should endeavour to add recruits by stimulating a love for
scientific pursuits. He had been brought to think deeply on
the subject from discussions in the daily papers, originating in
some remarks he made at the last meeting of the Society
touching the occurrence of certain introduced plants into the
colony. Regarding that matter, he read a letter from Mr.
E.S. Wigeg to the effect that he had been much amused at the
correspondence in the Register re the Leontodon taraxacum.
He introduced the seed twenty-five years ago, and gave Mr.
Greenham, of Third Creek, some, who raised plants, and from
him it had gone from Payneham to Bridgewater. He had
grown it in his garden at North Adelaide for twenty-five years,
chiefly for his cage-birds, who were very fond of it. He had
been rather amused at Mr. McEwin’s argument that Professor
Tate must have made a mistake, as he ‘“‘ had not seen the plant
in the colony.” The remarks he (Professor Tate) had made
had elicited unrecorded facts from no less than five individual
observers, and proved that no large inquiry lke that of the
distribution of our alien plants could be exhaustively under-
taken by one person acting independently. He proposed that
observers should be encouraged to correspond with the Society ;
facts should be recorded, published, or reserved ; there should
be a Committee of Reference, and a Corresponding Secretary
might be appointed to undertake duties connected with the
reception of facts and specimens. If the scheme worked well
it might be advisable to add to the Council a Director. Cor-
respondents known to have facilities for gathering desiderated
knowledge should have their attention particularly directed to
the points about which more information was desired. For
instance, Professor Owen has, for 35 years, been asking for
information upon certain points in the generative economy of
the Echnida hystrix ; another question was, whether the porcu-
pine ant-eater, inhabiting Kangaroo Island, was that species.
The exhibition of specimens and reading of notes referring
thereto was-one means whereby members might be interested in

X1x,

natural history work. Another stimulant would be excursions
to the most interesting localities for investigating natural
history, say two each year. Prizes for the best collection of
scientific objects or the best paper might be made.

Mr. Smearon said he cordially agreed with the scheme.

Mr. Motinevx said with regard to the porcupine ant-eater
at Kangaroo Island, it was most advisable that the nature and
habits of the animal should be clearly known, and that there
was so little information on the point was due perhaps to the
fact that there were few scientific men on the island. The
animal was so common there that its fat had been used for
slush-lamps.

Mr. Smraton said the information might be obtained from
Mr. Wilson, who was an old resident of the island, and was a
very observant man.

Dr. Gosse suggested that the Secretary might communicate
with Mr. Wilson and get specimens of the ant-eater sent.

Mr. Moutveux expressed himself strongly in favour of the
Society attempting some such scheme as that proposed by
Professor Tate in the cause of science and for the reputation
of the colony. In our woods there were animals and insects
of which it was most important that some knowledge should be
obtained. There used to be a small marsupial on the Adelaide
Plains years ago which had now disappeared, and Mr. Water-
house, to whom he spoke, said he knew nothing of such an
animal, but he (Mr. Molineux) remembered seeing it when he
was a boy.

Tt was resolved that the Council should nominate a Com-
mittee to carry out the suggestions made by the President:

Orpinary Merrrine, Fepruary 3, 1880.

Professor Raten Tare, F.G.S., in the Chair.
Mr. W. Telfer, Wallaroo Hospital, was elected a Fellow.
The list of donations to the Library was read.

The Hon. Secrrerary read a draft of a letter to the Governor
requesting him to forward a petition to Her Majesty the Queen
praying her to become Patron, and to allow the Society to be
known in future as ‘‘The Royal Society of South Australia.”
The letter and petition were unanimously approved. And it
was also resolved to request His Excellency to become Vice-
Patron in case Her Majesty assented to the prayer of the
Society.

EXHIBITS AND NOTES.

The PresipEnt reported that in connection with the proposed

record of Natural History phenomena he had received several

XX.

letters and specimens. For the nature of the exhibits see
Miscellaneous Contributions.

Mr. F. G. Warrruovse exhibited a number of fragments of
skeletons of various extinct marsupial animals, imeluding
Diprotodon australis and Phascolomys gigas, in addition to
several others, which had been presented to the South Austra-
lian Museum by Mr. R. M. Robertson, of Normanville, who
found the first instalment in the bed of the Salt Creek, where
they had been laid bare by the action of afreshet. At the first
opportunity Mr. Waterhouse visited the place, but found the
water too high to enable further search to be carried on ; but
My. Robertson kindly undertook the task of watching for
further opportunities, with the result of raking up several
other pieces, amongst them being several duplicates, proving
that these were the remains not of several species of animals
only, but of more than one of each kind. As Mr. Waterhouse
was in doubt as to the true character of some of the remains,
he forwarded duplicates to Professor Owen, at the British
Museum, stating his opinion as to their nature, and received
the following letter, confirming his ideas and thanking him for
helping the Professor in his researches :—“ British Museum,
September 17, 1879. Dear Mr. Waterhouse—Accept my best
thanks for your letter of June 18, 1879, and continued kind
interest in my quest of the extinct mammals of Australia.
Your case of fossils duly arrived. They included, as you state,
parts of Diprotodon and of a gigantic wombat Phascolomys gigas.
(This is generically distinct from the smaller Phascolomys.)
The great kangaroo is of the interesting genus and species
Procontodon goliah. The more fragmentary specimens I have
not yet satistactorily determined, at least as belonging to any
species not hitherto known. .. . Iam still hoping to get (an
spirits) an impregnated uterus of either platypus or echidna,
but at my age (75) I cannot but feel that the day of work is
drawing to a close—With every good wish, believe me most
truly yours, Ricup. Owry. Mr. F. G. Waterhouse, C.M.ZS.,
Curator Adelaide Museum.”

A brief discussion followed, the general surmise being that
the bones which had been brought to light had not been
deposited in the creek, which was not an old one, but had been
unearthed by the washing away of the substance in which they
lay.

The Hoy. Srcrerary read some notes by Mr. Thomas Bur-
coyne, of Port Augusta, on ‘‘A Marsupial formerly found at
Port Augusta,” but now extinct there. The animal alluded to
he thought was the smallest marsupial in the world. It had
been met with on the eastern coast about Port Augusta 25
years ago, and, according to the accounts of the blacks, were

B63 ti,

very numerous, and were known as kangaroo mice. The largest
specimen did not exceed four or five ounces in weight. The
domestic cat had been introduced at the period he had referred
to, and the little animal had soon disappeared. He had obtained
four or five specimens, but all of them dead; and one live
specimen had died in a week from the time he had obtained it
before he could observe its habits. It was almost a kangaroo
in miniature, with a few differences. It did not move about in
daylight, but was to be seen in the evening or at night, when
it was seen to be a swift animal for its size. He thought,
though it had ceased to exist in his district, it might be found
further inland, and that communication with the officers on the
telegraph line might result in specimens being procured which
he thought would be of value.

Mr. Warprnovse said he knew the animal referred to from
the description. It was not a marsupial, but a rodent ; either
Hapolotus cervinus or Hapolotus Mitchell.

Paper read:—“On a Census of the Indigenous Flowering
Plants of Extratropical South Australia,” by Professor Ralph
Tate (see p. 46).

Orprnary Mertine, Marcu 2, 1880.

Mr. F. Cuapprz, B.A., B.Se., Vice-President, in the Chair.

Messrs. W. C. Cox, H. C. Strother, Dr. J. F. Joyce, and the
Rey. W. Hopkins were elected Fellows.

Mrs. Annie Richards, Fowler’s Bay; Mr. J. Canham, Stuart’s
Creek; and Mr. Paul Foelsche, Port Darwin, were elected
Corresponding Members.

The list of donations to the Library was read.

The CHairMman said that in order to facilitate the operations
of the Society it had been thought advisable to change the
name of the Society by adopting the title of the ‘‘ Royal Society
of South Australia.” The Secretary would lay the whole
matter before them as it stood at present.

The Hon. SecrErary said that he understood that the proper
step to take was to forward a memorial to Her Majesty the
Queen through His Excellency the Governor. It was advisable
that this memorial should be formally adopted by the meeting,
and not simply emanate from the Council, although the
Council might be acting on the wishes of the members of the
Society. He read the memorial which it was proposed to adopt.
The prayer of the memorial was that Her Majesty would
become Patron of the Society under the new title proposed,
and the petition then proceeded to give a brief history of the
formation and progression of the Society.

XX.

Mr. Topp, C.M.G., suggested that it would be advisable first
of all to communicate with the Royal Societies of the neigh-
houring colonies, and to ask to be furnished with a copy of the
inemori ‘ail adopted by them when they took similar steps.

After a short discussion the matter was postponed.

The Hoy. Secretary referred to the fact that forms had
been circulated in various parts of the country, to be filled up
by the recipients, the information which was sought to be
elicited having reference to the sinking of wells and other
borings in the. colony. He had received a reply from Mr. W.
Fowler, of Yaroo, Kulpara, furnishing the required records
concerning three of these wells. Mr. Fowler gave their levels
above the sea. The depths of the wells were 84, 145, and 165
feet respectively. The shafts all penetrated strata of the
same character, and were situated about one mile or one and
half miles from the shores of the Gulf. Brackish water was
struck at about the sea-level in each ease, but the fluid was not
too brackish for stock to use. Mr. Fowler promised to supply
any further information that lay in his power, and to present
the Society with a specimen of some fossils of mangrove roots
found in the sinking of one of the shafts. These fossils were
similar to those found some time ago at Port Wakefield. Mr.
Fowler described the strata of sand penetrated, and expressed
a belief that they rested upon a clay slate.

The following paper was read:—“ Notes on the Comet of
February, 1880. i By Mr. C. Todd, C.M.G. (See p. 19).

An interesting discussion upon what is known of, and what
has been speculated concerning comets, followed. Attention
was particularly drawn by Mr. Ingleby, Q.C., and other
speakers, to the remarkable circumstance that the recent comet
did not actually set below the horizon, but faded into blank-
ness as the night advanced, while its tail was still many
degrees above the horizon, and questions were raised as to
whether the luminosity of comets was self-existent, and
internal, or whether it was merely a received and reflected
light. Professor Tindall’s theory of a body or vapour of great
tenuity, made luminous by. the operations of actinic rays of
light ‘from some light-giving centre, and afterwards being
destroyed by the heat rays, was referred to, but Mr. Todd con-
sidered that this theory did not satisfactorily account for the
curvature of the tail and many other peculiarities observable
in comets. His opinion as to the nature of their nebulous
light was that it consisted partly of internal and partly of
received or absorbed hight. Spectrum analysis proved that the
nucleus of comets possessed self-luminous vapours, but no
experiments with the spectrum had yet been carried out with
the tail of any comet.

XXill.

Mr. Inaurry said the comet did not set, but died away,
which made him hold the opinion that the tail was borrowed
light. He thought that the consideration of the circumstances
of the rapid fading away of the comet might lead to useful
discoveries respecting the constituent elements, &c., of these
celestial phenomena.

In reply to a question, Mr. Topp stated that the various
obstacles in the way of obtaining clear observations of the
recent comet had prevented him from being able to calculate
its distance from the sun, but, speaking roughly, and by no
means committing himself to the statement, he should say the
distance was under fifty millions of miles.

Reference was made to the frequent recent occurrence in our
skies of large and brilliant meteors, and the theory that
showers of meteors usually followed the appearance of a comet
was briefly alluded to. A suggestion was made that in the
statistical and general records now being compiled by the
Society as much information as was possible should be obtained
respecting meteoric appearances, and the Secretary promised to
note the suggestion.

Orpinary Mererirnea, Aprit 6, 1880.

Professor Ranen Tare, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.
Dr. John Rees, Hindmarsh, was elected a Fellow.

Mr. A. W. Dobbie was elected a member of Council in the
room of Mr. R. Hickson, resigned.

The list of donations to the Library was read.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. F. G. Warernotse, C.M.Z.S., on behalf of the South
Australian Institute, exhibited land shells from South Sea
Islands, presented by John Brazier, Exsq., C.M.Z.S., Sydney.
Fossils, minerals, and shells, presented by Mrs. William
Jewell.

Mr. W. Fowter, of Yarroo, Kulpara, forwarded a specimen
of fossil mangrove root, taken from a depth of 78 feet, or
about sea-level, in the District of Kulpara.

Professor Tarr said from what he knew of the country he
could quite believe the plant remains indicated the fact that
the land had been elevated above sea-level at a recent period.

Mr. D. Brown, of Port Adelaide, exhibited some rubbings of
native wooden weapons showing incised ornament, which had
been forwarded to him from the interior. His correspondent
hazarded the opinion that the concentric rings indicated the
practice of sun worship by the people who have carved them.

Professor Tarr exhibited two specimens of similarly orna-

XXIV.

mented wood implements, received from Mr. Canham, of
Stuart's Creek. He rejected the notion that the figures are
symbols, and held the opinion that they were intended for
ornament. The two specimens exhibited showed a symmetry
of pattern of at least three styles, and he said that symmetry
is the first aim of barbarous nations in their attempt at orna-
mentation, whilst symbolic characters are to a very large extent
dissimilar. To further speculate on their meaning, he con-
sidered, must be labour thrown away, and he very much
doubted if they ean be regarded as the production of the un-
tutored aboriginal.

Papers read :-—1. “ Some Remarks on the Late Comet,” by
Professor H. Lamb, M.A.
[ABSTRACT. |

Professor Lame, in continuation of the discussion of the
previous meeting on Mr. Charles Todd’s paper, wished to con-
sider two points only. The first was as to the results of the
spectroscopic examination of comets, which he ventured to say
was rather inadequately stated on the previous occasion,
though that was no fault of Mr.Todd; and the second was as
toa theory of comets propounded by Professor Tait, of Hdin-
burgh. By the printed report of last meeting he saw that it
had been stated that no very definite results had been arrived
at by spectroscopic examination of comets. But since the
instruments had obtained their present perfection no comets of
very great brilliancy had appeared. When the great comet of
1858 was visible these appliances had not reached a state of
perfection. But in 1874-5 had appeared Coggia’s comet, and
Dr. Huggins had examined it spectroscopically. From the coma
he had obtained a spectrum of bright bands. From the nucleus
he also got a gaseous spectrum, and the result of his observa-
tions appeared to suggest that in comets there is some solid
matter, as in the tail, capable of reflecting sunlight, as shown
by a continuous spectrum. The gaseous spectrum showed
indications of heated gas in portions. The spectrum of bright
lines which had been observed was similar to what had been
observed in at least one other comet, and the same which was
obtained from carbon, which was curious. On examining the
spectrum a second time Dr. Huggins found bright lines,
showing a shifting of the body, such as was observed in the
case of the fixed stars. The theory of comets put forward by
Professor Tait, of Edinburgh, was that comets consisted of a
mass of stones, which might vary in size. It was strange that
this was not put forward before by a Scientific Society or
a scientific magazine, where it might have been expected to be
found. It wasin a lecture delivered to working men, and he
had found it in Good Words. His idea was that the comet was

XXKYV.

a swarm of meteors, and that these changed the appearance of

the tail by changing their position towards each other in their
orbit, and that when nearest the sun they would have the
ereatest velocity, and striking: together with greatest force
developed heat. They had in this the materials of both the
continuous spectrum and the gaseous spectrum obtained.
The theory was based on facts, and did not appeal to electricity
to account for what could not be accounted for.

Mr. Cuarrie referred to the lghtness attributable to
comets, and though if they were composed of swarms of stones
that they must have considerable weight. He also asked
whether much of the light was not reflected sunlight.

Professor Lamp believed it was to some extent, but at the
same time it could not be said that it was to any great degree,
and there was a good deal of light which belonged to the
comet itself. There must, therefore, be heat generated by
these individual masses to render them incandescent. The
Professor went on to speak of the late comet as having been
seen at Buenos Ayres going northward, according to a telegram
received at Kiel from Dr. Gould, of the Argentine National —
Observatory, and hoped in conclusion that when next we had a
' brilliant comet our Observatory would not be so badly sup-
plied with instruments, or so inadequately provided with a
staff, numerically considered. South Australia owed a great
deal indirectly to scientific discovery, and while she could not
be expected to keep up an establishment such as there was in
Melbourne, the requisite instruments should be obtained.

2. “On the Native Plants of Yorke’s Peninsula,” collected
by Mr. J. G. Otto Tepper, F.L.S., named and arrangements
revised by Baron F. von Mueller, hon. memb. ; and “ Remarks
on their Distribution,” by Mr. J. G. Otto Tepper, F.LS.,
corresp.memb. (See p. 25.)

Professor Tarn said that it afforded him great pleasure to
bear testimony to the excellence of Mr. Tepper’s paper dealing
with the distribution of the indigenous plants of Yorke’s
Peninsula in relation to the hydrographical and geological con-
ditions. The Rev. J. H. Tenison Woods, in his ‘“ Geological
Observations in South Australia,’ 1862, has pointed out the
general dependency of floral features of certain parts of the
South-East on geology ; but in the present essay we have a first
attempt to connect the distribution of particular plants with
that of certain rock formations. The author recognises the
influence of the rock formation as exerted through its physical
properties—not through its chemical ones. Thus, a plant has
predilection for granite not so much on account of the chemical
constituents, which it may derive from the disintegration of the

XXV1.

rock, but rather from the circumstances of finding there such
combination of physical conditions most favourable for its
growth and propagation. Hence, a species restricted in the
’ Ardrossan area to a granite may exist elsewhere on a rock of a
very different type, provided always it presents the surface
and sub-surface features of the granite. As instances of the
kind he mentioned that Caswarine and Pittosporum phillyraeoides
cling to the quartzite bands in the Hundred of Munno Para,
though they are generally distributed about Ardrossan ;
Nicotiana suaveolens lives on the Silurian limestones only about
Ardrossan; but farther south about Stansbury, it occurs only
on the seaward face of the Miocene cliffs. Local peculiarities
most certainly occur, but they are not of sufficient magnitude
to affect the aspects of the vegetation, which prevail over very
large tracts of land in this country. Though they give rise, in
some substances, to abnormal features ; thus Salsoli Kah, which
in Europe and throughout httoral Temperate Australia lives
only within the influence of the sea, is a characteristic plant in
the arid interior of this continent. Its presence there cannot
be explained on the supposition that it has survived the
geological changes which converted the interior from a sub-
marine area to a continental one. Other plants, such as
Salicornia arbuscula or samphire, are similarly out of place.
The excessive variability of temperature and of the amount of
aqueous precipitation, as rain and dew, must in conjunction
with the hygrometrical properties of the soil determine to
a large extent those lnes of demarcation which separate
extensive tracts of forest land from grass land regions, and
in other cases. In tropical countries this phenomenon is still
more marked, and the line of junction of absorbent and
retentive soils can be traced on the surface by the changes in
the botanical features. Perhaps in no other case is there such
an intimate association between plants and soil, as is shown by
the vegetation flourishing on the fluviatile Tertiaries, which
occur here and there from Cape Jervis Promontory to beyond
Nuriootpa. It did not escape the notice of Mr. Selwyn, who
writes :—“ On crossing the bridge over the Onkaparinga at
Clarendon, and ascending the steep hill on the south bank of
the river, a sudden change takes place in the character of the
country, and the presence of Tertiary rocks is at once indicated
by the deep sandy soil, and thickly covered with epacris,
prickly acacia, dwarf banksia, coarse grass, and other scrubby
vegetation, so characteristic of sandy ‘Tertiary deposits.” The
vevetation is not so much peculiar as it is distinctive as a
whole. Other sandy patches occur which do not present the
same botanical facies, and it must be evident that other circum-
stances determine the assemblage of the plants on these par-

XXVil.

ticular tracts. The gregarious habit of many of our native
plants is a very striking phenomenon, and in some parts of the
interior acquires very considerable magnitude.

Orprnary Mrrrine, May 4, 1880.
Professor Raney Tare, President, in the Chair.
The list of donations to the Library was read.

The Hon. Srcrerary read the petition to Her Majesty the
Queen, praying that she would become patron of the Society,
and that it might be styled “The Royal Society of South
Australia.” He also read the report of the Committee
appointed to draft regulations re organization and direction of
efforts of correspondents in natural history.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Mortyevx produced some specimens of a large moth
(Cossus cinereus), together with the larve, chrysalis, and silk-
lined tunnels, and said it came out at two different periods of
the year. In December one moth came out from the trunk of
_ the tree in an upward direction, and left a large hole, into
which the water found its way, rotting the tree and ultimately
bringing it down. The other moth came from the ground in
the roots in April and May. Coming out of the bole of the
tree, they made no nest or silk, but, issuing from the root, the
moth made a long chamber, of which he showed a sample. The
larve and chrysalis existed in the tube for some considerable
time. He was of opinion that the two must be different kinds
of moths.

The PrestpENt expressed the opinion that the moths were of
two different species, and cited Mr. Tepper.

Mr. Mottnevx said the nest made was of stiff clay. He had
found nests, one with a caterpillar and others with a chrysalis
inside. The chrysalis was often found near the top of the
chamber.

There was a discussion, and Mr. Smeaton said he thought
the moth was the same as that described as the Zeuzera
eucalypte.

Mr. F. G. Warernovse, C.M.Z.S., on behalf of the Governor
of the South Australian Institute, exhibited a number of fossil
bones recently obtained by Mr. R. M. Robertson at Salt Creek,
Yankalilla, comprising portions of skeleton of the Diprotodon
australis, including part of a lower jaw containing two incisors,
portion of lower jaw with three molars, portions of two very
large upper incisors, part of a rib, part of pelvis, two caudal
vertebra, two portions of tibia, two portions of femur. He
also exhibited a specimen of some remarkably rich auriferous

XXV1L1.

quartz from Woodside, taken from workings recently com-
menced there.

Master A. C. Molineux exhibited some freshwater shells;
‘Mr. O. Tepper graphic granite and flowermg branch of
Welaleuca uncinata; Mr. Chandler flowering plants from
Central Australia, and rock specimens and fossils from about
the Peak; and Mrs. Richards flowering plants from the Great
Australian Bight. (For particulars of the above see Miscel-
laneous Contributions. )

The following communication was read :—‘‘ Further Notes
on Australian Salenariad.” By the Rev. J. E. T. Woods, F.L.S.,
Hon. Memb. By consent of the Council this paper is incor-
porated with the author’s first contribution, the publication of
which was postponed last year. (See p. 1.)

Orpinary Merertine, June 1, 1880.
Protessor Rater Tarr, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.
The list of donations to the Library was read.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Professor Tare exhibited a skull of a wombat, obtained at
the Willows during the construction of the deep drainage
works, from the red loamy clays so characteristic of the Adelaide
Plain. Skulls of the recent species of the Murray Plain and
of the Great Australian Bight were shown for comparison, and
though the fossil presents a greater resemblance to the latter,
yet it is markedly distinct. In the absence of other materials
for comparison, Professor Tate would not assign to it a specific
name. In speaking on the subject, he remarked that our
Pubhe Library was very deficient in the literature of Aus-
tralian zoology, and especially of this colony. Professor
Owen's classic work on the Extinct Marsupials of Australia
Was an important desideratum.

Mr. F. G. Warernovuse, C.M.Z.S., showed a number of
saurians, portion of a large collection of reptilia, lately
received by the Governors of the South Australian Institute
from the Paris Museum; also the snout of a large sawfish, the
skin of a remarkably large brown snake, from Hindmarsh
Island, measuring eight feet in length; and some rough Bra-
zilian diamonds.

Professor Tare exhibited specimens of South Australian
granites, showing inclusions. He said those from Port Elliot
and Victor Harbour contain inclusions of a schistose character,
which can only be regarded as fragments of extraneous rocks
which have been caught up by the erupted g granite and enclosed
within its mass. The granite from Palmer and Mannum con-

XX1X.

tains inclusions of a different kind, which seem to be the
result of an abnormal arrangement of the minerals constituting
the granite itself. In respect to the specimen exhibited which
was obtained from the massive granite boss situated on the
east bank of the River Murray, about four miles north from
Mannum, one may observe a dark circular area of three inches
in diameter, which might, on a cursory inspection, be taken for
a section of a more or less globose imbedded fragment of
another rock, so strongly does the dark interior contrast with
the exterior red of the granite. But on closer view the interior
is found to be only much finer in the grain than the enclosing
granite, whilst the darker colour is accounted for by the larger
proportion of black mica. So far as his observatians extend,
granites having inclusions of the first kind are obviously
eruptive, whilst those containing inclusions of the second kind
are metamorphic.

ae following communication was read :—

¥; “On the ‘Bay of Biscay Country,” by Mr. J. G. Otto
Tepper, F.L.S., Corr. Memb. (See p. 91).

A short discussion ensued, and Mr. Smeaton gave an illus-
_ tration of Mr. Tepper’s theory by diagram drawn on the black-

board.

Professor Tare mentioned that the Rev. J. E. T. Woods
formerly held the opinion that the Bay of Biscay country mght
be attributed to gaseous exhalations.

Mr. Scoutar supported that theory.

Mr. Smeaton remarked that at the time Mr. Woods pro-
mulgated the gaseous theory he was only acquainted with the
South-Eastern country, and believed the Bay of Biscay country
only occurred in country subject to inundation. He was not
aware that similar curious formations: were to be seen in the
North.

Mr. Smzarton said he agreed with Mr. Tepper in part of his
theory, but not in respect to his view of the original formation
beimg connected with mud flats.

Orpivnary Meetine, Jury 6, 1880.
Professor Rateu Tare, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.
The list of donations to the Library was read.
NOTES AND EXHIBITS.
Specimens of fresh-water shells from Central Australia, by
Mr. Chandler.
A snake of about nine inches, marked by alternate bands of

orange and black, said to have been taken at Wallaroo, by
Prof. Tate.

XXX.

A considerable number of specimens of exotic snakes, stuffed
and in spirit; also, a sample of rich silver ore; by Mr.
Waterhouse, on behalf of the South Australian Institute.

The following papers were read :—

“On some New Corals from the Australian Tertiaries,” by
the Rev. J. E. Tenison Woods, Hon. Memb. (See page 99).

“On some New Species of South Australian Pulmonifera,”
by Prof. Ralph Tate. (See p. 102.)

“On a New Belemnite from Central Australia,” by Prof. R.
Tate. (See p. 104.)

A Translation of Professor Quatrefage’s ‘‘ Craniologie
des Races Australiennes,” by Professor Tate. The paper in
question dealt with the various opinions on the subject of the
origin of the Australian race, whether or not the black popula-
tion of Australia were indigenous or had in far-back times
found their way over here from other regions. The craniological
characteristics were dealt with, measurements showing the
extraordinary length of the Australian native’s skull being
given. The conclusions arrived at were that there are two
indigenous races in Australia; the one spread all over the
continent, and presenting a marked homogeneity ; the other,
termed the Australoid—now confined to the South-East of
Australia, and represented by few individuals—presents cranio-
logical characters typefied by the fossil Neanderthal skull.

Orpinary Meretine, Aucusr 3, 1880.
Professor Ratpu Tarr, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.
The list of donations to the Library was read.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. F. G. Warernovuss, C.M.G.S., Curator of the Adelaide
Museum, on behalf of the Governors of the South Australian
Institute, exhibited an interesting collection of exotic Batra-
chia, and some specimens of fresh-water tortoises received from
the Paris Museum, also a few fossils from the Murray Cliffs
near Morgan.

Professor Tarr showed a number of mineralogical specimens
sent to him by several correspondents, including a piece of
translucent opal, distinguished by the name of Hyaline, found
by Mr. Scoular in the slates at Munno Para; also some
minerals sent by Mr. Salter, of Blinman, comprising Breun-
nerite, a carbonate of lime and magnesia, found at Nuccaleena ;
a flesh-coloured heavy spar, and a botryoidal form of magnesite,
found at Blinman, and several other minerals sent by other
gentlemen.

Mr. H. Lattorff forwarded particulars as to the strata gone

XXXi.

through in sinking a well on the western side of Lake Torrens,
at a distance of about ten to eleven miles, and at an elevation
of about 800 feet above the sea. The well was sunk to a depth
of 128 feet when the borers came upon the bed rock, consisting
of hard red slate (gneiss form), containing glimmer.

The following paper was read :—‘‘ On the Descriptive and
Economic Geology of Munno Para East,” by Mr. Gavin
Scoular, Corr. Memb. (See p. 106.)

Professor Tare thought Mr. Scoular had proved himself a
very careful geologist. He had reviewed the map, &c., and
could state that Mr. Scoular had assisted greatly in the work
of collecting information upon the geology of South Australia.
The quartzites referred to had attracted his own notice when
he first arrived, and he did not think such a marked feature as
these bands presented on the banks of the Little Para River
could be found elsewhere in South Australia. Mr. H. Strother
had been over that part of the country, and thought it a
remarkable piece of rock scenery—so remarkable that he con-
templated taking a picture of some parts for exhibition at the
Melbourne Exhibition.

Professor Tarr defended his view of the lacustrine origin of
the Upland Miocene, and contended that as the neighbouring
outher at Golden Grove was bounded on the west by higher
land, so the contemporaneous deposits in Munno Para may
have been accumulated in a lake whose western margin was the
northerly continuation of that high land, since removed.

A long desultory conversation ensued, and the members
separated at a rather late hour.

Orpinary Merererinc, SEPTEMBER 21, 1880.

Professor Rateu Tate, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.

Dr. W. Gaze and Mr. W. Smith were elected Fellows.

The list of donations to the Library was read.

Mr. E. P. Nesbit, jun., was appointed Auditor.

A copy of a despatch from the Secretary of State for the
Colonies, notifying that Her Majesty had been pleased to
assent to the prayer of the petition requesting her to become
the patron of the Society, and to allow it to be known as “The
Royal Society of South Australia,’ was forwarded by His
Excellency Sir W. F. D. Jervois, and laid upon the table.

Notice of motion was given as to certain alterations in the
Rules rendered necessary by the change of title and by the
adoption of a scheme for the systematic record of Natural
Science phenomena.

Dr. Wylde sent specimens of a minute moths the smallest

XXX1i.

known to him, which appeared to live on the leaves of Salvia
officinalis.

The following communication was taken as read :—‘‘On the

Tertiary Palliobranchs of Australia,” by Prof. Tate. (See p.
140.)

Mr. Crartes Topp, C.M.G., here took the chair, and Prof.
Tarr gaye a popular lecture “ On Lamp Shells,” in the course
of which he said that the Australian seas have yielded fifteen
species of palhobranchs, some of which extend to New Zealand,
there associated with two restricted species. Our waters have
furnished only four species, and with the exception of Wald-
heimia flavescens are of extreme rarity. They are:—

Waldheimia flavescens, which occurs around the south-east
and south coasts of the continent. He had collected it at the
two extremes of our coast-line.

Terebratulina cancellata has been found in dredgings on two
separate occasions from Backstairs Passage by Mr. Bednall
and Mr.S. Smeaton. Of the few individuals extant in the
cabinets of our local conchologists, one onlyis adult. It is the
largest living species in the genus.

Kraussia Lamarckiana is known as a South Australian shell
from a few detached valves collected on the east shore of St.
Vincent’s Gulf.

Discina tenuis, described by Sowerby, is reported in Reeve’s
“ Monograph of Crania” from China and South Australia. It
is unknown to collectors here.

Annvuat Mrrrine, Ocroper 5, 1880.

Professor Ratpu Tate, F.G.S., President, in the Chair.

The list of donations to the Library was read.

Dr. Nesbit was elected a Fellow.

The Hon. Secretary read the annual report and balance-
sheet (see page xxxiv.), which were ordered to be printed.

Several alterations in the rules rendered necessary by the
Queen’s assent to the assumption by the Society of the title
“ Royal Society of South Australia,” as also by the operations
of the newly- organised division for the direction of efforts for
the record of natural science phenomena, were agreed to after
a short discussion.

Votes of thanks were accorded to the officers for the past
year.
’ The following gentlemen were declared to have been duly
elected as the officers and council for the ensuing year :—
President—His Honor Chief Justice Way; Vice-Presidents—
Messrs. C. Todd, C.M-G., and F. Chapple, B.A., BSc. ;

XXXiil.

Treasurer—Mr. T. D Smeaton; Hon. Secretary—Mr. Walter
Rutt; Councillors—Mr. D. B. Adamson, Dr. Magarey, Prof. R.
Tate, and Dr. J. D. Thomas.

The following papers were taken as read :—“ Indigenous
Plants of the Macdonnell Ranges,” by Rev. J. Kempe; and
“ Diagnoses of New Species of Plants from South Australia,”
described by Baron EF. von Mueller, translated and commu-
nicated by Mr. Stirling Smeaton, B.A.

The Present then read his annual address (see p. xxxix.),
which was ordered to be printed with the Transactions.

XXXIV.

REPORT OF THE COUNCIL

OF THE

Roval Society of South Australia,

For tHe YEAR ENDING SEPTEMBER 30rn, 1880.

The Council have pleasure in reporting that the work of the
Society has been carried on successfully during the past year,
the following papers having been laid before it:—“ Red Rust,”
by J. G. Otto Tepper, F.L.S.; “The Medicinal Uses of Wattle
Bark,” by 8S. J. Magarey, M.B. ; ‘“ The Geographical Distribu-
tion of Plants in South Australia,” by Professor Ralph Tate,
E.G.S., &e. ; ‘The Comet of February, 1880,’ by Charles Todd,
C.M.G., F.R.A.S., &.; “The Characteristics and Distribution
of the Native Plants of Yorke’s Peninsula,” by J. G. Otto
Tepper, F.L.S.; ‘Further Notes upon Australian Selenariade, ”’
by Rev. J. E. T. Woods, F.LS., &e. ; “ Bay of Biscay Country,”
by J. G. Otto Tepper, F.L.S.; ‘Translation of Professor
Quatrefage’s ‘Craniologie des Races Australiennes,’”’ by
Professor Ralph Tate, F.G.S., &c.; “Some Fossil Corals,” by
Rev. J. E. T. Woods, F.L.S., &c.; “A New South Australian
Belemuite,” and “Some New South Australian Snails,” by
Professor. Ralph Tate, F.G.S., &¢.; “The Descriptive and
Economic Geology of the Munno Para Hills,” by Gavin Scoular ;
“4 Monograph of the Tertiary Palliobranchs of Australia,”
by Professor Ralph Tate, F.G.S., &.; ‘Native Plants of the
MacDonnell Ranges,” by Rev. J. Kempe; and ‘“ Diagnoses of
New Species of Plants from South Australia,” by Baron F. von
Mueller, translated by 8S. Smeaton, B.A.

A large number of interesting specimens of natural history
and other objects of interest have been exhibited and discussed
at the Society’s meetings. The Governors of the South Aus-
tralian Institute have laid before the Society from time to time
a selection from the donations to the Museum received by
them, and private gentlemen have. to a greater extent than in
any previous year, contributed in a similar way to the interest
of the Society’s meetings. In order to encourage and to assist
private research, and to place the information thus acquired
permanently upon record, the Society resolved early in the
session to establish local correspondents throughout the pro-
vince, and to obtain the services of competent referees in the
various branches of natural history. This scheme has been
fully matured by the Council, and the assent of the members

XXXV.

will be asked to certain alterations in the rules necessitated by
the former resolutions of the Society upon this subject. The
plan has already produced good results, and it is hoped that
when in full operation it will lead to the accumulation of a
Yarge number of facts which would otherwise have remained
unknown to the scientific world. The Government subsidy,
whieh has been received for the first time this year, will assist
im meeting the increased expenditure incurred by the enlarge-
ment of the sphere of action of the Society, whose usefulness
will only be limited by the numbers of the subscribers to its
funds.

The ‘“ Transactions and Proceedings”’ for 1878-9 were issued
early in the session, and the greater portion of the volume for
the session now closing is already printed. It is satisfactory
to know that the value of the Society’s work is increasingly
appreciated by the learned Societies of other countries, as is
shown by the increase in the number of such Societies which
have responded to our invitation to exchange publications.

In accordance with a resolution of the Society, the Council
has taken the necessary steps to obtain permission to assume
the title of “The Royal Society of South Australia.” Her
Majesty has graciously acceded to our request, and the Society
has thus been placed upon an equal footing with similar
Societies in the other colonies.

While the work of the Society has been steadily developing
the Council regret to report that the number of members has
not increased, being now 102 as against 105 at the last annual
meeting. Thirteen names have been added to the roll in all
classes. One member, Mr. A. Murray, whose connection with
the Society dated from the year 1858, has been removed by
death ; eight have resigned; and seven have been struck off
the roll for non-payment of their subscriptions.

In a comparatively small community, such as that of Ade-
laide, there must of necessity be a very limited number of
individuals sufficiently conversant with any one branch of
science to take an intelligent interest in the details which make
up the bulk of the papers submitted to the Society, and it is
worth while to consider whether it would not be well to supple-
ment the more technical papers with lectures of a more
popular character. Such lectures would not be suitable for
publication in our proceedings, but would greatly increase the
interest taken in our monthly meetings, and might be the
means of assisting many in their pursuit of science.

The balance-sheet shows that the finances of the Society are
in a flourishing position, the balance in hand last year being
£127, and this year about £187; but the cost of printing the
Transactions will absorb a larger sum than before.

“1@INS8ery, “LOpIpry “O88T “19q0400 UNF

‘NOLYENS ‘d SVNOHL ‘LIGSGN SSIUVd “a
‘4001100 punoy pus peqIpHy

T 8 O&8eF T 8 O&8¢F

F

et

MH 6g¢= Gs ish ole = ** pIBAIOF poltIgd ooUBleg
0s L :,” ne a ** goermpung pus sesvysog
O &1@ =i aS Re 3 prsoqdny 03 yosg
6 SIT = ** SUOTdIIOsqnG Surzoo][00 UOIsstUIMIOD
0 GI @r °° cn ** ArwjorIoeg yuuysissy jo Awpeg 0 6 6G ss “* - sjuridey pus suoyovsuviy, Jo oyeg
OL 91 2 °° nt = SuyUN pus SuIst0Apy 9 9T 8IT °° See oe PI8-UI-JUBIL JUOTIUIAAO
6 9188 “* ‘* *%* suoMoRsMBIT, Jo “op ‘Buu O 2 18e Siw ee es -E Serondinosang
00 6 * ie or OFNF4SUT 0F VOMNGIyUOH Ag A EMG, S20 ae Ye PIVAIOJ FYSNoIG oouveg oy,
“Dz BAF: “ap aD aS enc: "ad

‘ALGIOOS TVAOU UHL HLTA LNOOOOV NI UAYNSVANL THLE

XXXVI.

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY
For rue YEAR 1879-80.

TRANSACTIONS, JOURNALS, AND Reports.

Presented by the respective Societies and Governments.

Edinburgh—Proceedings of the Royal Society, 1878-79.
Halle—Kais. Leopold.-Carol. Deutschen Akademie der Natur-
forschen. Part 24, 1878; Part 25, 1879.
Lausanne—Bulletin de la Société Vandoise des Sciences
Naturelles. Vol. XVI., 1880.
London—Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society. Nos.
1 to 4, 1880.
Melbourne—Victorian Year-Book, 1878-9.
——— Patents and Patentees. Vol. X.
————— Statistics of Friendly Societies, 1878-9.
—---——— Snes the Board of Enquiry ve Wattle Bark,
1879.
————— Statistical Register of Victoria. Parts 1, 2, 3, 4,
6, 8, 9, and Index (1878-9).
Report of the Department of Mines, 1877.
———-—— Astronomical Results, Melbourne Observatory,
1871-5.
Transactions and Proceedings of the Royal
Society of Victoria. Vol. XVI., 1880.
—— Quarterly Journal of the Microscopical Society
of Victoria; Nos. 1, 2, and 3.
New South Wales—Proceedings of the Linnean Society.
Vol. V., Part 1.
Journal and Proceedings of the Royal
Society. Vol. XII., 1878.
Queensland—The Westerly Winds of Brisbane. May to
December, 1878. By the Philosophical
Society.
St. Louis—Annual Hepdrt for 1879, and “ Bulletin” of Publie
School Library. No. 4, 1871.
South Australia—Addresses at the laying of the Foundation-
Stone of the South Australian Institute,
1878. By the Board of Governors.
Tasmania—Report of the Salmon Commissioners, 1879.
Catalogue of the Tasmanian Exhibits at the Mel-
bourne Exhibition, 1880.

XXXVill.

Vienna—Denkschriften der K. Akademie der Weissenschaften.
Math. Natur. Classe. Nos. 10 to 19, 1880.
Verhandlungen der K. K. Zoologisch-Botanischen
Gesellschaft. Vol. XXIX., 1879.
—_—— Foieny weRee der K. K. Geologischen Reichsanstadt,
1879.

Miscentnanrous Books anp PAMPHLETS.
(Names of donors in italics.)
Clark, Rey. W. B.—Remarks on the Sedimentary Formations
of New South Wales.
Giles, E—Geographic Travels in Central Australia. Presented
by Baron F. von Mueller.
Haast, Dr. Julius von—Geology of the Provinces of Canter-
bury and Westland, N.Z.
Liversedge, Prof—On the International Congress of Geologists
at Paris, 1878.
Mueller, Baron F. von—Native Plants of Victoria.
—_——_———— Fragmenta Phytographie Australie.
—__———_——— [Introduction to Botanic Teaching at
the Public Schools in Victoria.
Organic Constitution of Plants and
Vegetable Substances and their
Chemical Analysis.
—_—————— Enucalyptographia. Decades 4, 5, and 6.
Russell, H. C—Rain and River Observations in New South
Wales, 1880.
Schomburgk, Dr. R.—Naturalized Weeds in South Australia.
Tapln—Folklore, &e., of the South Australian Aborigines.
Adelaide, 1879. The South Australian Govern-
ment.
Todd, C—Meteorological Observations at the Adelaide Obser-
vatory, 1878.
Rainfall of South Australia.
Wools, Rev. W.—Lectures on the Vegetable Kingdom.
—_—_—__—_——— Plants Indigenous to the Neighbourhood of
Sydney, 1880.

XXXIX.

THE ANNIVERSARY ADDRESS OF THE
PRESIDENT,

Proressor Raten Tare, Assoc. Lin. Soc., F.G.S.

Durinea the past year my leisure has been so severely and
continuously taxed for the service of the Society that it has
been impossible for me to prepare an address upon an appro-
priate subject for an occasion like the present. The theme
which I had selected early in the year on “ The Relationship of
the Recent to the Tertiary Fauna of Australia,” had to be
abandoned, because the collocation of published facts and the
determination of the specific and generic affinities of the fossils
with recent forms of life, which would be the groundwork of
the dissertation, proved to be a task that could not be accom-
plished within the time, except at the sacrifice of the perform-
ance of certain duties in my capacity as President of the
Society and co-Editor of its publications.

In its stead I propose to take a retrospective glance at the
condition of our Society for the past three years, during which
time I have been honoured with the chief direction of its affairs,
and also to furnish a record of the current literature dealing
with the Natural History of Australia, more especially that
relating to this colony.

The application made to the Government last year for
pecuniary assistance has graciously been granted, and with the
additional means at its command the Society is strenuously
endeavouring to attain the main objects which it appears to me
it ought to have in view.

One of its main objects ought ever to be to foster and per-
petuate the taste for natural history throughout the province.
And in this connection the Society, recognising the value and
importance of a corps of volunteers from whose local know-
ledge they may expect to derive benefit, has elaborated a
scheme for encouraging and directing the efforts of amateur
naturalists. The scheme has been published only within the
past month, and already a nucleus of workers has been formed.
It has been highly approved by those to whom it has been sub-
mitted, and the leading specialists among Australian natu-
ralists have freely consented to act as referees in their respec-
tive departments ; their names have purposely been withheld,

“a

because it is desirable that the Society be the channel of inter-
communication, and filter as it were through the available local
talent the possibly new facts from the certainly known. So

‘far the machinery seems to be well devised and adjusted, and
the experiment deserves success.

By this scheme the Society encourages the tyro-naturalists
in their pursuits, an aid which is not afforded at present by the
collection in our provincial Museum. But as soon as the
shall have been well named and made easily accessible they
should supply the professed student of biology with as complete
materials for his researches as can be obtained. In the interest
of the Institute Museum I offer the suggestion to the Board of
Governors that the Trustees of the British Museum should be
reminded not to forget this colony in its distribution of the
duplicate specimens, which under a recent Act of Parliament
they are empowered to part with. South Australia, in common
with the sister colonies, has a claim upon the national Museum,
to what extent it is difficult to determine ; but that it owes to
us some of its knowledge of the natural history of the colonies
is obvious from the number of presentations made to it by
South Australian collectors and correspondents.

Asa further means in the same direction, the entry of all
deserving students into our body has been facilitated. The
pursuit of collecting and studying natural history objects give
to the persons who are inclined to devote their leisure hours to
it a beneficial training for whatever their real calling in life
may be; they acquire a sense of order and method ; they
develop their gift of observation; they are stimulated to
healthy exercise.

The meetings of the Society have been held with regularity,
but in consequence of the great subdivision of science and the
more technical character of the communications they have not
been attended so well as in former years, when it was thought
fashionable to do so. To revive such a former state would
indeed be a retrograde action, as it would impair the efficiency
of the Society. It must, moreover, not be expected that it lies
within the province of the Society directly to impart
elementary knowledge. Our meetings are held for the purpose
of having new facts, or new views of the bearing of admitted
facts, or corrections of important errors, brought before us for
discussion, and not for mere elementary instruction, though
some of us could probably testify as to how much may be
incidentally learned through a constant attendance at the
meetings. A middle course is, however, open by which we may
hope to acquire popularity without in any particular impeding
the attainment of the higher objects of the Society—that is, by
the delivery of popular expositions of recent advances or of

xli.

new discoveries in science at alternate monthly or fortnightly
meetings; these may be arranged so as to be introductory to
technical papers to be submitted ata subsequent meeting. The
meetings of the Society enable those who are interested in the
same pursuit to meet together, and by friendly intercourse
advance the cause of science. Discussion has often evoked
information that has led up to investigations of the highest
value, and should be encouraged, and not rudely suppressed by
a display of cynicism not unfrequently indulged in by those
whose lot it is to regard science more as a professional pursuit
than of the nature of a relaxation for leisure hours.

Much of the surplus funds of the Society has been employed
in publishing the Transactions of the Society, the third volume
of which will be ready for delivery in a few weeks. The
Council has ever been mindful of the necessity of maintaining
a high character for its Transactions, and the reputation which
it bears in the other colonies affords good evidence of its value.
A judicious selection has been made from the papers submitted
to the Society, and the illustrations have been provided with no
niggardly hand. In regard to the former point it will be well
for Fellows and other contributors to bear in mind that purely
speculative questions, however well adapted to raise an inte-
resting discussion, are, like those relating to merely elementary
matters, not within the scope of the Society’s Transactions.

The plan of an early issue of reprints of author’s copies,
which has been successfully carried out during the present year,
has overcome much of the inconvenience attending the tardy
publication of a yearly volume, as it will also enable us to
publish the Transactions with greater dispatch than formerly.
The number of contributors to the pages of our Transactions for
the last three years is 14; eight for 1877-8, eight for 1878-9,
and six for 1879-80. Of these five only are members, three are
corresponding members, one honorary member, and five non-
members. And though the number of workers is on the
decrease, yet the results achieved seem to be of increasing
merit; at any rate, each yearly volume has far outstripped its
predecessor in point of size. The published papers show a wide
range of subjects, but a very large majority is devoted to
Natural History, as is indicated by the followmg summary :—
Medical Statistics, 3; Physics, 2; Astronomy, 1; General
Natural History, 4; Botany, 5; Zoology (recent and fossil),
13; Geology, 7; Mineralogy, 1; and Anthropology, 1.

The labours of the Society for the coming year are likely to
present the same activity and the same wide range of subjects
as ever. We have been made aware of the preparation of a
catalogue of South Australian minerals, of a descriptive
catalogue of our marine shells, a monograph of the Tertiary

xii.

echinodermata of South Australia, of a catalogue of the
polyzoa inhabiting our waters, and of a paper on the geological
structure of the Adelaide mountain chain.

I notice with pleasure that science forms part of the
curriculum for teachers in training, and that encouragement in
the study of botany has been given to pupils ih our State schools.
Cheap and good elementary text-books on botany are procurable,
but before a more general study of our native plants can be
initiated a manual is required somewhat after the model of
Baron F. von Mueller’s “ Native Plants of Victoria.” At
present the only descriptive work is the “ Flora Australiensis,”’
of seven volumes, far too costly to be accessible to the many.
A manual of South Australian botany, if restricted to the
flowering plants and ferns of the settled districts, could be
published at a price to bring it within the reach of all. We
commend the suggestion to the Minister of Education.

Another great advantage our Society affords is the possession
of a library of volumes, acquired by presentation or by means
of exchange of our publications, which are of the greatest value
to the student and are not extant in other libraries in this city.
The number, it is true, is at present small, but the yearly
additions are largely on the increase.

The increase in the number of members during the last
three years has been much in excess of that for any former cor-
responding period, but losses have been disproportionately
great.

Having thus pointed out what we have at our command to
forward the interests of science in this colony, and what is
being done in its behalf, and incidentally indicated some of
the advantages that may be gained by joining our body, I will
now address myself to those who are still doubtful as to the
advantage of doing so.

The sphere of the Society’s usefulness, other things being
the same, is the more extended as its revenue is increased.
Thus we want funds to stimulate and reward those engaged in
investigating the natural history of this colony, and in other
directions not strictly of a commercial character. It is the
duty of all who wish to advance the study of nature to do
what in them lies, and relieve such enthusiastic workers, that
we have reason to know are amongst us, from the pecuniary
burthen which their self-denying labour brings upon them.

The names of some Fellows of learned Societies, and many
of the learned professions, are absent from our list of Fellows ;
why do they not further the progress of research, and make it
possible for the Society to produce such works as would be of
inestimable value, and redound to the credit of the whole com-
munity, whose intellectual status has been pronounced by

xliil.

certain recent visitors, competent to judge, to be of a very low
degree? It is obvious that a combination of members can
produce a greater amount of valuable results than they would
in the aggregate if working independently. And this Society,
in its corporate capacity, performs services which no individual
or individuals unassociated could render. It is a connecting
link between the scientific workers of this and the neighbouring
colonies.

The contention is, that because an individual cannot take an
active part in the Society it is no commendable reason for his
refusal to aid it. There are several gentlemen having natural
history predilections who have and may profit by the results
already achieved by the Society, yet are devoid of a patriotism
for science ; and there are others foremost among us as phy-
sicists, who if they were zealous in the cause of science would
embrace the opportunity afforded by the meetings of the
Society to communicate to an anxious and intelligent section
of the community the results of investigation which they have
been enabled to prosecute at the country’s expense.

In some respects the members of this Society have themselves
_ to blame, and I must acknowledge that I have been at times
much disheartened at the apparent apathy for that which con-
cerns the very existence of ie Society. If the fault has been
mine, then I shall be only too glad, for the Society’s welfare,
that it be proved from this evening forthwith to have been so.

In the President-elect you have a gentleman who brings a
prestige to the Society, and whose well-known earnestness in
the discharge of all public duties is a guarantee that in him
you will have a warm advocate and a zealous partisan. He has
told you that he is not a scientist, but in doing so he gives to
the word a very restricted definition. We have had, perhaps,
too much of what he regards as science—not too much abso-
lutely, but rather too little of what is not natural science—and
we anticipate that under the fostering care of our new Presi-
dent greater attention will be given to those departments of
science which have been neglected by us for some years past.

In adopting the title of Royal Society of South Australia
you have imposed on yourselves greater obligations. And as
the change of title cannot materially affect the constitution of
the Society, it behoves its members to greater exertions to
justify their high pretensions. Let each member strive to
deserve the honour of being its President.

It affords one pleasure to note the increasing activity of the
several scientific bodies throughout the Australian Colonies, as
is partly indicated in the summary of recent progress in
natural history with which I shall conclude this address. New
life has been infused into the almost defunct Microscopical

xliv.

Society of Victoria by the untiring energy of its Secretary,
Mr. Goldstein. It has already issued two quarterly parts of
its Journal of seventy-eight pages and five lithogra hie plates.
One valuable feature of the new Society is the Moline of
practice-meetings once a week. “These have become very
enjoyable, partaking more of the character of Club meetings,
where the members, unfettered by formalities, converse freely
on subjects of interest, and where they may seek and obtain
such help as they require.” The naturalists of Melbourne have
banded together under the title of a Field Naturalists’ Club,
for the purpose of outdoor work, and the meetings have been
well attended. The zeal of its leaders cannot fail to stimulate
an enthusiasm in others, and the Club will doubtlessly prove
an efficient training-school for young naturalists. I have long
since wished to have engrafted on our Society something of the
character of a Field Club, but I have always been dubious as
to whether such a character could be sustained.

Recorp oF Current Lrirerature RELATING TO THE NaTURAL
History oF AUSTRALIA, PARTICULARY OF SouTH AUSTRALIA.

Mr. R. Alston describes the anatomy of the little-known
marsupial, Antechinomys, which, with Phascologale, Antechinus,
and Podabrus, he regards as constituting a sub-family of the
Dasyuriade. (Proce. Zool. Soc., London, June 15, 1880.)

Mr. E. Dobson, in the same issue, describes a new species of
bat from Australia, which, on account of its large size, he calls
Megadorma gigas.

The collections which have been made during the last few
years in the southern part of New Guinea indicate resem-
blances previously unsuspected between the faunas of New
Guinea and Australia. Many genera of mammals which were
thought to be peculiar to the continent have been found on
the great Papuan island. Among the more remarkable may
be cited two species of Echidna (ant-eating porcupines) ; true,
dwarf, and flying Phalangers; Cuscus ; Macropus (kangaroos) ;
Perameles or bandicoots ; and Phascologale. But hitherto the
true Dasyures or native cats had not been known to occur
in New Guinea. This gap has now been filled up by the
discoverd at the Arfak Mountains of a species of Dasyurus.
This new species has been designated by Prof. A. Milne
Edwards (Comptes Rendus, June 28, 1880, p. 1,518) D. fuscus,
because of the very dark brown colour of its fur. It is the
smallest species of the genus, and its size does not exceed that
of a large common rat. It is interesting to note that the Austra-
lan species which it more nearly approaches, D. hallucatus, in

xly.

which the hind feet are also furnished with five toes, is only
met with towards the northern extremity of Australia.

Professor Owen has determined that the ova of Echidna
hystrix, in most PePpeete correspond closely with those of the
Ornithorhynchus. The fission of the germ mass, like that in
the rabbit’s ovum, strengthens the conclusion that the Mono-
tremes are viviparous. The functional quantity of both uteri
in the genus Echidna corresponds with the equal development
of the right with the left female organs, in which it differs
anatomically from the Ornithorhynchus. (Proc. Royal Soc.,
London.)

Mr. W. Macleay’s recent communications “ On the Clupeide
and Mugilide of Australia’ (Pro. Lin. Soc., N.S.W., vol. iv.,
pp. 363-384 and 420 to 427) must further add to his high
reputation as an ichthyologist. Since the death of Count de
Castelnau he stands alone in this department of zoology.

Of the Herring tribe nineteen species, and of the Mullet tribe
fifteen species are enumerated. Here, as in other instances,
the name South Australia rarely appears. The author says—
“The fishes of the west coast are very little known, and many
_ discoveries are likely yet to be made on the northern ; but pro-
bably we may accept the above lists as enumerating with some
correctness the species of the southern and eastern coasts.”

These papers, dealing with two groups affording many edible
fish, are replete with information touching their habits, haunts,
uses, &c. They raise so many questions of an economic
character, that the greatest publicity should be accorded them.
The development of our fisheries is of such importance from a
national point that it should form a subject for the serious
attention of our Government. Mr. Macleay points out the
lines upon which an inquiry should be conducted which would
accumulate the most useful information.

“Les Staphylinides de l’Australie et de la Polynesie.” Par
Albert Fauvel, Geneva, 1877-8, 2 vols., pp. 364.

The author has for many years given great attention to this
family, and has published, in addition to other voluminous
works on entomology, ‘‘ Monographs of the Staphylinide of
Central America, of Chili, Reunion, New Caledonia, N. Africa,
N. America, and New Guinea.”’ With such preparation, this
last production of his pen cannot fail to have that value which
results from the matured study of a particular group of living
beings.

Mr. Masters’ “Catalogue of the described Coleoptera of
Australia’’ (1871-4) enumerates 78 species of Staphylinide,
but M. Fauvel’s census contains the names of 310 as belonging
to this continent and Tasmania.

xlv1.

The Australian region comprehends for him three principal
sub-regions—

1. The Austro-Malaysian, comprising the group of the

Moluceas and that of New: Guinea.

2. The Australian, properly so-called, comprising Australia
and Tasmania.

3. The Polynesian, extending to the east as far as the
Gambier Isles and the Marquesas, to the west to the
Solomon Isles and to the Mariannes, to the exclusion of
the Sandwich Isles. New Zealand should form an inde-
pendent group.

The Polynesian fauna numbers 60 species, and that of Aus-
tralia 310, whilst there are nine species only common to the
two sub-regions.

The number of genera in Australia is 76, of which 10 are
peculiar. The geographical distribution of the species is as
follows :—S.W. Australia, 47; N. Australia, 17; Queensland,
112; S.E. Australia (New South Wales), 82; S. Australia
(Victoria, Tasmania, and 8. Australia), 122. Five species from
Port Augusta are included in 8.W. Australia; and the neces-
sary correction will reduce the number of Western Australian
species to 42, and raise that of Southern Australia to 127.
The number of species determined from South Australian
specimens is 24, belonging to 14 genera. Mr. Tepper, in his
census published by the Society last year, gives 26 species of
5 or 6 genera. :

One of the new genera instituted by M. Fauvel, uniquely
represented by a South Australian species, is named Correa—
a denomination already occupied for a well-established group
of Rutaceous plants, a familiar example of which is Correa
speciosa. As under these circumstances a dual employment of
the cognomen will prove of inconvenience, I have been bold to
suggest that of Fuuvelia for the genus of beetles.

The plan of the work is excellent. Under each natural
group is a synoptical table of the characters of the genera, and
under each genus that of the species. Each genus and species
is fully described ; the diagnoses are in Latin, but the remainder
of the text is in French. The work is not illustrated.

A list of the described Staphylinide of South Australia :—

Oxytelus subeneus, Fauwvel, Port Augusta.
sf semirufus, Pvl., rf
impennis, F'v/., Adelaide.
i sparsus, Fvl., es
Xantholinus chloropterus, Z7., Adelaide, Port Aucusta.
me socius, F’vl., KS

xvii.

Homalota coriaria, Avaatz, Port Augusta.
i sordida, Marsh, Adelaide.

s politula, Fvl., — ‘6
Calodera cribrella, Fv/., & Port Augusta.
australis, Av, ‘“

Phleocharis antipodum, Fvl., “
Trogophloeus simplex, Mots., “
Philonthus sordidus, Grav., cf

ne hepaticus, H7., ye
Re nigritulus, Grav., “
Quedius thoracicus, Fvl., Me

Heterothops luctuosa, Fvi., ee
ou picipennis, Fel., “
Conurus triangulum, Fi.,
Brachida suturalis, A’v/., of
Fauvelia oxytelina, Fv. sp.,
Bolitochara discicollis, F'vl., *
Pederus cruenticollis, Germ.,

“Descriptions of New Species of Phytophagous Coleoptera.”

By Martin Jacoby. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1879, pp. 773 et
seg. Among others, of one species from Tasmania and of two
from Queensland.

Sir John Lubbock describes (in Journ. Linn. Soc., London,
vol. xv., p. 186, 1880) a species of ant having a similar habit
to the honey-ant of Mexico, ‘‘ particular individuals of which
are specially told off to serve as receptacles of food or
animated honey-pots.”” This second species of the kind, to
which the name of Camponotus inflatus 1s given, is reported to
come from Adelaide ; but that is, of course, inaccurate. It is
probably the species which has, however, been received here
from the tropical parts of Central Australia.

“On Seventeen New and Rare Spiders from New Zealand,
with characters of four new genera.” By Rev. O. P. Cambridge.
Proe. Zool. Soe., 1879, pp. 681 et seg. Plates 52 and 53.
Though not any of the species here described are known to
occur in Australia, yet the paper is valuable to us as affording
new particulars touching the systematic position of certain of
our species and of their alliances.

The Australian Crustacea are being dealt with in a most
vigorous manner by Mr. W. A. Haswell, whose previous con-
tributions to Carcinology had indicated the considerable
neglect that this class of animals had suffered at the hands of
naturalists.

The last two numbers of Vol. IV. of the Proc. Lin. Soe.,
N.S. Wales, contain the following papers from his pen:—

xlviii.

“The Australian Amphipoda,” pp. 245-279, 319-349, plates
7-12 and 18-24 (1879).

The number of described species hitherto known was thirteen
only, whilst the above papers contain 75 new species, com-
prising nine new generic forms. The specimens at Mr.
Haswell’s command have all been obtained (with two excep-
tions) from Tasmania and New South Wales, and not one is
common to the two areas. The habitat of a species named
Talitrus sylvaticus is peculiar, being abundant in moist ground
in woods and scrubs of New South Wales, extending inland at
least as far as about 30 miles from the coast. It has never
been observed on the sea shore.

““On some new Amphipods from Australia and Tasmania,”’
loc. cit., Vol. V., pp. 97-105, plates 5-7 (1880). Is a supple-
mental paper describing eleven new species, one of which is the
type of a new genus.

“On the Australian Brachyura Oxyrhyncha”’ (Joe. cit., pp.
431-468, plates 25-27, 1880).

Mr. Haswell’s researches among the Australian spider crabs
have added 37 species to the nineteen previously recorded ;
whilst the genera represented has been increased from thirteen
to 27 (one new). The greater number of the species was
obtained on the eastern coast and in Torres Straits. The new
species, seventeen in number, are described, and most of them
figured. Whilst full references to the species of earlier
authors and authenticated localities are given. South Aus-
tralia is uniquely represented by Micippe parvirostris, originally
described by Miers froma Port Lincoln specimen. And.in this
connection I will quote from the author :—“ So little is known
of the marine zoology of the south of Tasmania and the west
coast of Australia that it is impossible to treat with any degree
of minuteness of the geographical distribution of genera
within the Australian province. Two well-defined faunas are,
however, readily separated and contrasted, viz., the temperate
and the tropical.”

“On Two New Species of Paratymolus (Brachyura) from
Australia’ (Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. v., pp. 302-4).

A revised list of all the Echini known to the Rev. J. E.
Tenison Woods as occurring on the Australian coast will be
found in vol. iv. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., pp. 288-290. This is
an amended list to that given by him in vol. 11. of the Proceed-
ings of the same Society. Two new species collected between
Moreton Bay and Port Jackson are also described and figured.
One, Hemiaster apicatus, is interesting as representing a genus
previously unknown in a recent state in the Australian seas,
and one which is most abundantly represented in cretaceous

5 dh be

strata; a species is fossilised in the Murray Cliffs. The other,
Phyllacanthus parvaspina, suggests a generic relationship with
Cidaris Australie, one of our common Miocene fossils.

“Descriptions of New Species of Axinewa and Pectunculus,”
by G. F. Angas (Proc. Zool. Soc. London, | pl., May, 1879).

Includes A. modesta, from Australia ; A. Nova-Caledoniensis,
from New Caledonia; P. Nova-Guinensis, from New Guinea;
and P. orbicularis, from Bass Straits. The last is identical
with P. flabellatus (Tenison Woods, 1877), and is probably a
small form of P. laticostatus,Q.andG. P. flabellatus is living in
St. Vincent’s Gulf, and is not uncommon in the higher beds of
the Miocene formation in various parts of the colony.

The same author in the vol. for 1880 describes and figures
(pl. xl.) the following new species of Mollusca from South
Australia:—Heliz Bordaensis, from Cape Borda, Kangaroo
Island, which belongs to the same curious group of the section
Rhagada as H. Stlvert, Ang., and H. Kooringensis, Ang., from
the Northern Areas of this colony. Glyphostoma paucimaculata,
Clathurella crastella, Rissoina lyrata, R. elegantula, Amauropsis
globulus, Adeorbis Vincentiana, and Collonia rosco-punctata, from

St. Vincent’s Gulf; communicated to the describer by myself
and Mr. Bednall.

On the same plate are figured for the first time the magnifi-
cent shells Murex Bednalli, Brazier, and Voluta Bednalli,
Brazier, and also Clanuculus bicarinata, collected by Mr.
Bednall at Port Darwin.

“The Cecide of the Challenger Expedition,” by Marquis de
Folin (Proce. Zool. Soc., London, 1879).

Seven species of this family of gasteropods were dredged by
the Challenger off Cape York. They belong to Parastrophia,
lsp.; Watsonia, new genus, 1sp.; and Cecum, 5sp.° With
the exception of C. Chinense, they are new to science.

“Mollusca of the Challenger Expedition,” by the Rev. R.
Boog Watson (Journ. Lin. Soc., London, vol. xiv., pp. 692 e¢
seg., 1879; and vol. xv., pp. 87-126, 1880). The only Australian
species are Gibbula glyptus, nu. sp., taken in 410 fathoms;
Solariella Phillippensis, n.sp., in 38 fms.; S. albugo, n. sp., in
2-10 fms., off Port Jackson; Fossarus cereus, n.sp., in 1,400
fms., Hast of Cape York ; Bittiwm pupiforme, n.sp., Wednesday
tens Cape York; and B. cylindricum, u.sp., 2-10 fms., Port

ackson.

“On the Occurrence of Recent Heteropora.” By A. W.
Waters. Jour. Roy. Microscopical Soc., London, vol. ii, p.
390, pl. xv. 1879.

In this communication the author has described a species of

d

a:

penne from the Semaphore, South Australia, under the

appellation of H. cervicornis, considering it to be identical with
the Plethopora cervicornis, D’ Orbigny, from the cretaceous
rocks of France ; he also mentions a second species from the
seas of Japan. Till the appearance of this interesting com-
munication no recent species belonging to the genus seems to
have been published. A third species has been described by
Mr. Busk (Journ. Linnean Soc., London, vol. xiv., p. 724, 1879 ;
pl. xv.), which he had received from New Zealand. The occur-
rence, therefore, of the above three species belonging to a genus
of which we had previously no species more recent than the
English Crag, and extending back to the Jurassic period, is of
particular interest.

Heteropora cervicornis is associated on our coast with a very
common Cellepora which has a similar mode of growth; so
much that a microscopical investigation is necessary for their
separation. Mr. Waters cannot identify the Cellepora with
any described species, and distinguished it as C. repleta, a figure
of which is given ; but it is the C. tubsgera, Hutton (Proc. Roy.
Soc., Tasmania, p. 24; 1878.)

Rey. T. Hincks’ “ Contributions towards a General History
of the Marine Polyzoa” (Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist.; July,
1880), give figures and diagnoses of seven species of Mem-
branipora from the Australian Sea; five are new to science,
and one—M. delicatula, Busk (Biflustra sp.)—is common to
Australia and Florida, and is fossil in the English Crag. No
localities are given for the Australian species.

“The Journal of the Microscopical Soe. of Victoria,” yol. 1.,
Nos. 1-3 , contains several papers on Polyzoa.

Mr. J. R. Y. Goldstem furnishes diagnoses of two new
species—Serialaria Woodsii and Catenicella ponderosa—obtained
at Portland. The same author’s notes on living polyzoa supply
much new information respecting the polypes of several species.

Mr. Chas. M. Maplestone describes as new Bicellaria
annulata and Catenicella pulchella. The great peculiarity of the
first species is the spindle-shaped structure upon which the
celis grow ; and from the ringed appearance of the individuals
the specific designation is derived. In fact, the author thinks
that a new genus is requisite for its reception.

Mr. J. Brambridge Wilson has instituted the genus Catené-
cellopsis, separated from Catenicella by the mode of branching.
It comprises two species, here described as new under the
names C. pusilla and C. delicatula. The same author announces
the occurrence of fossil Catenicelle in the Miocene Rocks at
Bird Rock, near Geelong. At least twenty distinct species
have already been observed. Their illustration and complete

ibis

description are reserved for a future time, though in the
present issue the differential characters of twelve species are
given, unaccompanied by specific terms.

Rey. J. E. Tenison Woods describes a new genus and species
of Polyzoan, under the name of Tetraplaria australis, obtained
from Miocene strata at Muddy Creek, near Hamilton, Victoria.
Tetraplaria is allied to Gemellaria, but the pairs of cells face
alternate in two ways—that is, the faces are on all four sides
of the cylindrical branches, and they alternate in each of the
opposing cells arising on the side of the centre of its alternate
neighbour. (Proc. Roy. Soc., New South Wales, vol. xii. ;
1879.

Re. J. E. Tenison Woods describes and figures a fossil coral
of great beauty from the Muddy Creek Miocene beds. It
belongs to the genus Montlivaltia, and adds another link to
that chain of facts which gives the Tertiary fauna of Australia
such a Mesozoic aspect. The species is named J. discus. He
also establishes a new genus with the name of Trematotrochus,
and includes under it his Conocyathus fenestratus, from the
Muddy Creek beds, and Trochocyathus heterocostatus from the
Aldinga beds. The typical species of this genus combines some
of the leading characteristics of several sub-families; it has
neither pali nor columella, and the wall is perforated. In
exterior form it is very like Antillia. Proc. Royal Soc., New
South Wales, vol. xii., 1879.

“On the Cyclostomatous Polyzoa of Port Jackson.” By
W. A. Haswell. (Proc. Lin. Soc., N.S.W., vol. iv., p. 350,
1879.)

This is a descriptive catalogue of the species of the sub-
order occurring in and around Port Jackson. The total of
fourteen is made up as follows :—Jdmonea, 3 sp. (one new);
Pustulipora, 3 sp.; Tubulipora, 1 sp. ; Discoporella, 5 sp. (three
new) ; Crisia, 2 new sp.

“On some Polyzoa from the Queensland Coast.” By W. A.
Haswell ; loc. cit., vol. v., p. 33.

This is a list of 59 species obtained by the author at Port
Denison, nearly all of which were obtained with the dredge in
a single spot close to Holborn Island, 20 miles to the north-
east of Port Denison. ‘“ Here the bottom, at a depth of about
20 fathoms, seemed covered with little else than Polyzoa.
These are no doubt in the act of forming by their gradual
erowth and decay more or less extensive deposits analagous to
the Polyzoa beds characteristic of the Tertiary formations of
South Australia and Europe.” The following are described
and figured as new species :—Crisia, 1 sp.; Pustulipora, 1 sp.;
Onchopora, 3 sp.; Scrupocellaria, 2 sp.; Membranipora. 1 sp.;

lii.

Biflustra, 2 sp.; Lepralia, 6 sp.; Cellepora, 2 sp.; HMschara, 2
sp.; Hemeschara, 1 sp.; Vincularia, 1 sp.; Conescharellina, 2
sp.; Selenaria, 1 sp.; Spheropora, 1 sp.; and Myriozéum, 1 sp.
An interesting addition to Australian fossil botany is the
extinct conifer Araucaria Johnstoni, recently made known to
science by the technical description by Baron F. von Mueller,
K.C.M.G., appended to the reports of the Victorian Mining
Surveyors for the quarter ending September 30, 1879. The
species is founded on impressions of branchlets and the summit
-of a fruit cone, which were discovered very recently imbedded
in the yellow Tertiary freshwater limestone near Hobart Town,
Tasmania, by the assiduous and circumspect naturalist Mr. R.
M. Johnston, F.L.8., of Launceston. The locality where this
fossil Araucaria was found is to us of classical interest. It was
visited by Charles Darwin, then naturalist to H.M. ship
Beagle, during the stay of his ship at Hobart Town, and is
alluded to by that illustrious scientist in his “‘ Journal of a
Naturalist,” p.448, and also in his work on volcanic islands.
It was later examined by Count de Strzelecki, and several of
its fossils, leaves, and land shells are figured in that traveller’s
work, “ Physical Description of New South Wales and Van
Diemen’s Land, 1845.” Mr. Johnston considers these organic
relics, notwithstanding the close affinity of some of them to
forms of the present vegetation, as belonging to the Miocene
period, a view also taken by Professor McCoy, and to some
extent supported by the father of Australian geology, the late
Rev. W. B. Clarke. The phytiferous limestones of Hobart
Town are in places covered with a mass of felspathic basalt,
and must therefore be of earlier date than the volcanic effusion
which Professor Ulrich considers as co-eval with that of
Victoria, designated as the older volcanic formation. In various
arts of Victoria this basaltic cover conceals the so-called
older gold drifts, which contain a now extinct sylvan vegetation
made known to us by Baron F. von Mueller’s numerous
“‘ Observations on New Vegetable Fossils of the Auriferous
Drifts.” Mr. Johnston has found in association with the new
conifer congeneric and even conspecific types of plants from
the Victorian gold drifts, thus leaving little room for doubt as
to the contemporaneity of the two widely separated plant-
bearing deposits. One point of interest attached to the
discovery of Araucaria Johnstoni is that of the geological distri-
bution of the genus. The earliest traces of distinctly coniferous
wood known, those from the carboniferous system, belong to
the Araucarian type ; but the actual genus Araucarza does not
go farther back than the Trias. It flourished in Jurassic times
in Europe and India, but is not definitely known at present in
Cretaceous rocks, and it has generally been held that Araucarias

nit.

became extinct north of the equator since the Oolitic age.
In a living state they are confined to extra-tropical and sub-
tropical South America, Australia, New Zealand, and some of
the South Pacific Islands. Of these two familiar forms are
known as the ‘‘ Norfolk Island Pine” and the “ Moreton Bay
Pine.” The Oolite of Europe in the relics of marsupial
animals, in the remains of fish analogous to the Port Jackson
shark (Cestracion), and in the still more remarkable occurrence
of the molluscan genus Zrigonia and of the coniferous
Araucarias still existing in Australia, afford a striking corres-
pondence with the present fauna and flora of this portion of
the globe. From these circumstances it has generally been
held that Australia, in which alone this type of the oolite
zoology and botany has been preserved, was at that epoch
connected with India and Europe by dry land.

The researches of Mr. J. Starkie Gardiner amongst the
plant-bearing strata of Bournemouth, England, have, however,
established the fact that a species of Araucaria, indistinguish-
able by any discoverable character from A. Cuminghami, which
forms vast forests on the shores of Moreton Bay, flourished
abundantly in England during the Middle Eocene Period.
Here its associates were, amongst others, Dammara, Eucalyptus,
and many Proteacez, which are strictly forms of the southern
hemisphere. The presence during the Eocene Period in what
is now cold temperature Europe of a flora now distinctive of
the warm temperate and sub-tropical regions of the southern
hemisphere, proves that some of the at present purely
Australian genera neither originated nor became differentiated
in Australia, and whose very specific differentiation was
accomplished in part before the Miocenes began. The discovery
of Araucarias in a fossilised state in England and Tasmania,
and belonging to an early period of their Tertiary age, is one
of great interest, as establishing an important link in the
series of changes which separate Oolitic times from the recent
epoch.

“Fragmenta Phytographie,’’ vol. xi. By Baron F.von Mueller.

Fasiculus xci., Feb., 1880, contains diagnoses of the com-
posites Leptorrhynchus elongatus, De Candolle, and L. medius,
A. Cunningham. The latter is reduced to the rank of a variety
of the former by Bentham in the Flora Australiensis. The
leading differential characters are for :— .

LZ. elongatus, corolla white or ochreous-white ; achenes elon-
gated, glandular-scabrous, attenuated towards the apex.

L. medius, corolla yellow, achenes short turgid, nearly
smooth, with a much elongated slender beak.

eé

liv.

Fasiculus xcii., August, 1880, contains descriptions of the
following new species discovered in South Australia:—

An Acanthaceous plant, Justicia Kempeana, p. 101, from near
MacDonnell Ranges. (Rev. H. Kempe).

A eyperid, Schanus Teppert, p. 106, near Ardrossan. (O.
Tepper).

A fungus, Battavia Muelleri, Kalehr. JL8., p. 106, near
Ardrossan. (O. Tepper).

ON SOME RECENT AND FOSSIL SPECIES
OF

AUSTRALIAN SELENARIADZ (POLYZOA).

By the Rev. J. E. Tentson Woops, F.G.S., F.LS.,

President of the Linnean Soc. of N.S.W., Hon. Member of the
Adelaide Phil. Soc., &e., &e.

(Read September 2, 1879.)

[Plates I—ITI.]

The Selenariad is a family of Polyzoa, proposed by Mr. G.
Busk in 1853 in the British Museum Catalogue of that class
(part 2, p. 97). Itis comprised in the order Gymnolemata,
suborder Cheilostomata, section Inarticulate, sub-section
Rigide, group Libere, or with the zoarium unattached, usually
discoid, conical, or irregular. The family includes orbicular,
or irregular conical or depressed zoaria, which are convex on
the upper side, and plane or concave on the other. They are
composed of a single layer of cells, usually of two kinds, which
open on the convex surface only. They were included among
Foraminifera by Lamarck and Lamouroux; but the latter
classed them amongst his Milleporide, and suggested the
subgenera Cupularia and Lunulites (Exposit. Method., p. 44),
which Busk subsequently adopted as genera. The true nature
of the organisms was perceived first by De Blainville, who
placed them at the head of his family Cellariza, and close to
Flustra. We characterises his genus Lunulites as consisting of
cellules, with a superior opening disposed in concentric circles
and radiating lines, so as to form a calcareous polypidom,
somewhat regular orbicular, convex above, concave below, and
marked with furrows radiating from the centre to the circum- .
ference. He cites as species Z. radiata, Lamarck (Anim. s.
vert., vol. 2, p. 191), copied into the Encyclop. Meth., pl. 479,
fig. 6 a. b. (Atlas, pl. 75, fig. 5a.b.), Z. urceolata, Lam., 1. c
and Lamouroux (Gen. Polyp., pl. 73, fig. 9 to12). He then
adds that this genus has been established by Lamarck for the
above two small fossils, only differing from true Flustras in
being free and having a determinate circumscribed form. He
remarks, further, that the second species had appeared in

A

2

Lamouroux’s esti mation to possess features entitling it to
generic distinction, for which he proposed the name of Cupu-
. aria; and he says that in effect the disposition of the cells is
somewhat different, and the polypidom is not radiate.

Lunulites are described by Munster (Goldfuss, Petrefae,
Germ., 1826, vol. i., p. 105; plate 37, fic. 7, L. rhomboidalis),
by Michelin (Iconograp. Zool., 1841, p. 279, plate 63, fig. 12,
LL. Vaudenbeckic), and by A. E. Reuss (Naturwissen schaftliche,
Abhandlungen, Vienna, vol. ii., p. 58, plate 7, fig. 26 and 27).
The genus is also mentioned by Hagenow (Bryoz., Maestr.
Kreid., plate 12, fig. 15 and 16), D’Archiac (Mem. Soe., Geol.
de France, vol. ii., p. 196, plate 5, and vol. iii., p.412), Leymerie
(op. cit., vol. i, p. 358, plate 13), P. H. Nyst (Deserip. des
Coquilles et Polypiers Fossiles de Belgique, p. 624, plate 48,
fig. 6-8), Defrance (Diction. des Sciences Naturelles, vol. 27, p.
360, Atlas plate 50, fig. 5), Deslongchamps (Encyel. Zooph., p.
501), Morven (Decrip. Coral Foss. in Belg. report, 1828, p.
44), Lea (Contrib. to Geol., plate 6, fiz. 202), Galeotti (1837,
Mem. Geog. du Brabant, p. 163), Scacchi (1834, Notizie
inta alle Couch ed a Zoofite Foss., p. 16, plate 2, fig. 7, 8),
Lonsdale (Jour. Geol. Soe., vol.i., p. 503), 8S. Wood (Ann. Nat.
Hist., vol. xiti., p. 18), Conrad (Silliman’s Jour., Oct., 1841,
vol. xli.), Gray (Spicilegium Zool., part 1, plate 8, b. 3, fig. 15),
Busk (Quart. Jour. Micros. Soce., vol. vii., p. 6);* also British
Museum Catalogue of Polyzoa; Paleontographical Soc., 1857,
Foss. Polyz. of the Crag, p. 78.

It is in the latter publication that Mr. Busk gives a
lengthened notice of the whole family of Selenariade, and
reviews the relations of the existing species to those known as
fossil. He figures and describes two species of Cupularia, which
are found as fossils in the Crag (Pliocene) of Suffolk, England ;
but one only found alive at Madiera,y the Canary Isles, and
the coast of Africa. Also, two species of Lunulites which have
no living representatives.

In spite of the divisions proposed by Mr. Busk, which are
clear and convenient if not quite natural, there is some con-
fusion still as to the limits of the family and the names of some
of the genera. Cupularia is used by D’Orbigny as a genus of
the family of FrusrrrnorpEna, tribe FLustTrELEARIA, which
includes Escuartpm, which are eutirely without pores,
avicularian or vibracular pores, I suppose. This tribe includes
Trochopora, Discoflustrellaria, Cupularia, and Lateroflustrellaria,
all of which have the zoowcia growing on a convex discoidal
free zoarium. In Trochopora there are radiating lines like cost

* T have not included Cuvier, Brongniart, or Brown, as;their species are
doubtful.
+ See Jour. Micros. Soe., Oct., 1878.

3

on the under surface corresponding with the lines of cells.
These lines are porous. In Discoflustrellaria there are ng
pores. In Oupularia there are neither pores nor lines. They are
secondary fossils described by D’Orbigny in his Paleontologie
Francaise, vol. 5, p. 506, 513, pl. G01 and 722; Defrance, Dict.
Sciences Nat.; Michelin, Icon. Zooph., pl. 77, figs. 9 and 10.
It is necessary to bear these distinctions in mind, as it will be
seen they apply to some of our Australian fossil species. It
seems that while Busk has employed the genus of Lamouroux in
one way, D’Orbigny has done so in another, the latter having
priority.

There is also some difference of definition for the genus
LIunulites, for while Busk states that it is never attached at
any stage of its growth the Lwnwlites of D’Orbigny, D’Archiac,
Leymerie, and Michelin are attached during their young stage ;
and Hagenow (Die Bryoz., d. Maestricht. Kreidebild., p. 100,
pl. 12, fig. 15, 16) states that he has seen Zunwlites semilunaris
and L. Goldfussi attached by the entire surface upon Belemnites.
Busk thinks the attachment must have been accidental, but my
own opinion is that too much importance is given to the
character, as free polyzoa are sometimes found encrusting
corals, &e. -

Mr. Busk points out that in all the members of this family
there are, in addition to the ordinary cells, others which differ
in size, and whose office was variously interpreted until the dis-
covery by Mr. McGillivray of living examples enabled Busk to
determine that they were vibracular cells. The purpose
served by the vibraculum is not well understood. The organ
consists of a cup containing a muscular apparatus, and of a
moveable seta articulated to the cup. The seta is in most cases
simple and fine-pointed; but in some of the Selenariadz it is
bifid or trifid at the extremity. In Selenaria maculata it is
spirally contorted and minutely annulated, so very closely as
to resemble the proboscis of a butterfly. It may serve the pur-
poses of defence and even locomotion, but observations on the
subject are needed.

Whatever purpose they may serve, they have been made in
the hands of the naturalist useful organs for classification, as
will appear from the following division proposed by Mr. Busk
in the British Museum Catalogue :—

FAMILY SELENARTAD E*

Zoarium free orbicular or irregular conical or depressed,
convex above flat or concave below, upper surface only celluli-
ferous. Zooccia of two kinds disposed in series or quincun-

cially.

*The orthography in the Crag Polyzoa is Selenariide.

4

The genera of the family are five in number, which are thus
distinguished

Curunaria, Lamouroux.—Each cell with a vibracular chamber
at its apex or distal extremity.

Lunuurres.—The cells and vibracular chambers disposed in
separate, usually alternate, rows radiating from the centre.

SeLeNarrA, Busk—Some of the cells only of a different form
from the rest and furnished with a vibraculum.

Srrcuopora, Hagenow.—No apparent vibracular cells.

ConEscHARELLINA, D’Orbigny—No vibracula ; mouth of
cell circular. Avicularia present.

Hitherto only from Australia species have been deseribed—
one Cupularia and three Lunulites. The latter, according to
Busk, are representatives of fossils found in the Cretaceous
period—another interesting link between Australia and Meso-
zoic forms. ‘There are five species recorded from the Pliocene
formation, eight from the Miocene, seven from the Eocene, and
eighteen from the Cretaceous. Of the latter species only one
is a Cupularia and two Stichopora, and the rest, fifteen in num-
ber, are Lunulites.

Cupularia is now our largest genus, but the existing species
of Lunulites are very much larger in size than the fossil forms,
if we except the giant species, L. magna.

I have now to introduce to science twelve new species and a
variety in this interesting and very beautiful family of
organisms, namely, two species of Cupularia, five of Lunulites
and five of Selenaria. Of these four are living and eight fossil.
The recent forms are all from the east coast of Australia. The
fossils are chiefly from the Muddy Creek Miocene beds of
Western Victoria, but the following South Australian localities
have contributed to the ist:—Mount Gambier, polyzoal lime-
stone; Upper Murravian beds at Morgan, and the inferior
beds at Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay. Australia has been
already celebrated for being the only surviving home of the
almost extinct genus of Lunulites; and it is interesting to
observe that there is a new living form of that peculiar solid
type, which has been figured and described by Busk. Our four
fossil forms are different from those already known.

Both the living and extinct Cupularias are new forms of
much interest, but the relations of the fossil species are remote
to any living or extinct form.

There has hitherto been only one known species of Selenaria,
occurring on the south coast of Australia. To this I am
enabled to add two others, very distinct from their congener,
and three fossil forms, all of extreme interest and beauty, and
of a distinct type. One of them has a peculiarity in common
with one of the new living species here described, that is in

5

the margined ribs of the under surface, but in all other respects
they differ completely. As far as we e know, none of the fossil
species have living representatives, but comparatively so little
is known of the “living polyzoal fauna of our coasts that it
would be quite premature to assert that any of them are extinct.
It is, however, a remarkable fact that so far as we know there
are very few living representatives of the rich polyzoal fauna
of our tertiary beds. But I think it may sately be affirmed
that any one seeing the present collection of fossil Selenariade
would not hesitate to pronounce them Australian in character,
and we may therefore asswme that in Miocene times the polyzoa
had already acquired an Australian facies. I have observed
elsewhere that we could never expect to find in a fossil state such
genera as Catenicella, Menipea, &c., as their horny joints could
not resist decay, or would not fossilise. If, therefore, the
Australian Miocene fauna was more like the present, much of
the evidence of this must necessarily have perished.*

Inasmuch as there can be no definite line drawn between
Lunulites and Cupularia, and because the latter generic name
has been already employed in another way by D’Orbigny, I
think it better to suppress the genus of Cupularia of Busk and
regard them all as Lwnulites. I do not think Cupularia can be
maintained even as a sub-genus, because—as will appear when
I come to deal with the genus Zanulites of Busk—the same
individual may sometimes have the features of Cupularia in
one part and those of Lunulites in another. In order, however,
to correlate this part of my work with the labours of Busk 1
will keep the species separate according as they present the
Cupularian or Lunulitic type.

Genus Lunvunires, Lamx. (Cupularia of Busk.)

Avicularia accompanying every cell, but not disposed in
lines.

Recent Species.
Lunviires (CupuLariaA) crassa, Spec. nov.
Pl. I., fig la—tle.

Zoarium rather large orbicular, somewhat depressed,
roundly conical, solid, * thick, dull yellow, margins thick
elevated. Zoocecia py viform rounded, but very little elevated.
Mouth pyriform with a raised margin, outside which there are
irregular pores. Vibracular pore round, conspicuous, above
narrow end of mouth. Under surface of zoarium, with an
oblique margin of cells, the rest of the concave "surface a

*Since the above was written a most interesting discovery of fossil species of
Catenicella has been made in the Geelong Miocene beds.

6

spongy texture of large rounded granules, with pores (one or
two) between them. Diameter, about 10 millimetres; height,
about 4.

Dredged in April, 1857, by W. S. Macleay, at 70 to 80
fathoms, off Cape Three Points, and Port Stephens, N.S.W.
About a dozen specimens are in the Macleayan Museum.

The size, thickness, and the peculiar spongy surface of this
form would distinguish it without a knowledge of the cells,
which are also different from any of the species described.

Fossil Species.
Lunvires (Curvbaria) RurELLA, Spec. nov.
Pl. L., fig. 2a—2d.

Zoarium irregularly orbicular, thin, much depressed. Zoocecia
squamosely radiating, oval, somewhat depressed above, but
elongating below into a projecting overlapping somewhat
narrow rounded edge. Lamina immersed with two large
pyriform pores at each side below, and two or three small
rounded ones above. Margins thickened and raised. Avicular
pores numerous, much smaller than the cells, elongately
triangular, rounded at the apex, and a distinct raised margin.
The whole surface finely granular and shining. Under surface
with broad very irregular undulating uneven radiating some-
times bifurcating faintly granular ribs.

Locality and Horizon—Muddy Creek Miocene beds, near
Hamilton. Upper Murravian beds; and lower Aldinga marls
(Prof. Tate).

This is one of the most elegant of our fossil species. The
Openings are so large and defined that without the assistance
of a lens they can be discovered. The avicular pores are some-
times in a line for a series of three or four, but they are
always interrupted and never in a regular line lke Lunulites.
The cells are not quineuncially arranged, so that the generic
position of this species would be very doubtful. The under
surface is similar to Lwnulites aperta, and quite different from
the usual kind of ornament at this part of the zoarium among
Selenariade.

Genus Lunuires, Lamouroux.

Cells arranged in more or less regular series radiating from
the centre. Vibracula in linear series, alternating more or
less regularly with those of the cells.

This definition, which is that of Busk, shows how very
difficult it would be to draw a line between Lunulites and
Cupularia. It seems to me that if the cells are quincuncially
arranged the vibracular pores will not be in a line; but if not

7

quineuncially arranged the pores must be in a linear series,
Such a distinction is very arbitrary, and may vary in the same
species, or even in the same individual. I do not think the
genus Cupularia can be maintained.

Recent Species.
LuUNULITES ANGULOPORA, Spec. nov.

Plate L., fig. 3a—3ce.

Zoarium small conical white, rather smooth. Zooccia very
minute, irregular, with an oblique mouth divided into two
portions; one half triangular, constricted in the middle; the
other semicircular—both with a raised margin, as well as the
vibracular pores, which are long and narrow, and in a depressed
area. The cells are obliquely placed; sometimes in contrary
directions alternately. Base flat, with a margin of cell, and a
centre of irregular porous or spongy structure ; but the pores
well defined, occasionally with a calcareous plate perforated
with a ring of five or six pores, and a larger central one.
Diameter and altitude about equal, from three to six milli-
metres.

Port Stephens, New South Wales.

Both the specimens in the Macleay Museum are worn, and
the details of the structure of cells very difficult to make out.
Tt is remotely like Busk’s L. Philippinensis, but that seems to
have been described and drawn from a much worn specimen.

Fossil Species.
LUNULITES aAPERTA, Spec. nov.

Plate I., fig. 4a—4e.

Zoarium large, orbicular (?), cup-shaped (?), depressed, thin.
Zoocwcia quadrangular, rather narrower below, perfectly open.
Lamina, if any, worn away. Walls rather thick, regular,
raised equally thick all round, with a cellular structure.
Avicular pores oval, constricted in the middle, infundibuliform,
margin pyriform. Under surface with broad flat irregular
undulating coste.

The cells, pores, and under surface of this fossil are quite
distinct from the living and fossil forms already known. The
specimen is very much worn, and is the only one seen by me.

Locality and Horizon—Muddy Creek Miocene beds near
Hamilton,

LUNULITES MAGNA, Spec. nov.
Pl. I, fig. 6a—6d.

Zoarium large conical thin, quite hollow beneath or en-
erusting ; in the younger specimens (which are ten millimetres

8

high and broad), irregularly pentagonal ; in older specimens
(twice the above dimensions) irregularly lobed or sinuated.
Zooccia small round projecting and irregularly pitted, or
porous. Mouth circular with a raised margin. Vibracular
pore oblique, pyriform with a raised margin, and a conspicuous
bar across the centre. Under surface finely radiately ridged,
with a long narrow slit-like pore at the margin.

Locality and Horizon —Glauconitic limestone, Aldinga (Prof.
Tate). Ihave also found the same species in the lower lime-
stone beds at Mount Gambier. It is decidedly the largest
species known, and is easily distinguished by its peculiar vibra-
cular orifice.

LUNULITES ExtGuA, Spec. nov.
Pl. IL., fig. 7a—7e.

Zoarium very small, thin scale-like, slightly convex, but
depressed. Zooccia minute in regular radiating, sometimes
biturcating, raised rounded lines. Mouth circular, large.
Avicular cells in grooves between the lines of cells, lanceolate.
Base quite concave, with lines of projections exactly corres-
ponding with the zooccia and avicular cells.

This species somewhat resembles the following Z. cupola in
the disposal of its cells and the avicularia, but it has a concave
base, and the shape of both zoarium and zooecia are different.

Locality and Horizon.—W hite polyzoal limestones at Mount
Gambier (Prof. Tate).

LUNULITES cuPoLA, Spec. nov.
Pl. I., fig. 5a—5e.

Zoarium small, nearly circular, roundly conical. Zoocecia
oval, flat round the margin, and regularly convex in the centre.
Mouth in the lower part neatly defined, horseshoe shaped, with
two small shifting oval protuberances on each side; whole sur-
face finely granular, edges overlapping the avicular grooves.
Avicular pores parallel with the base of the cells, smaller
than the apertures, elongately oval with a basal groove and
two small processes projecting from the sides, so as to con-
strict the centre of the orifice, Base of zoarium quite flat,
granular irregularly marked with grooves, which bifurcate at
the edges, on which there are conical shaped hollows corres-
ponding to half a cell area.

Locality and Horizon—Muddy Creek Miocene beds, near
Hamilton, Victoria.

Genus Srnenarta, Bush.

Only a certain number of cells, dispersed throughout the
polyzoary, furnished with vibracula. The front of each cell

9

so furnished covered by a cribriform calcareous expansion,
others arched above, contracted below. Under surface of
zoarium marked with grooves.

This definition applies almost exclusively to the only species
known to Mr. Busk. The cribriform calcareous expansion is
not present in the species described here, and the generic
character is confined to the fewness and irregularity of the
pores.

Recent Species.

SELENARIA PUNCTATA, Spee. nov.
Pl. I1., fig. 8a—8e.

Zoarium small orbicular or conical or roundly convex, some-
what thick, margins rounded thick, and almost flat, with open
cells in worn specimens, of a dull greyish colour. Upper
surface rough and spongy in appearance. Zoocecia ovate,
angular at the sides, arched above, flat or curved below; but
the form varies. Surface flat, with a raised margin ; mouth
rather large at base of cell, flat above, curved below, with two,
rarely three, round pores above. Oocecium rather larger than
cells, ovate, rounded, adnate, punctured, opening above the
mouth of underlying cell. Vibracular areas rather larger than
mouth of cells, somewhat angular, with a raised margin. Under
surface of zoarium forming rounded, raised cost, with linear
grooves between, with a single or double row of punctures.
Some of these cost continuous to the concave summit; others
intercalated between, which terminate at various lengths in
fme or obtuse points. These coste do not bifurcate, though
they have the appearance of doing so.

Diameter of zoarium from six to seven millimetres; altitude,
three to four.

Dredged off Cape Three Points at 71 fathoms.

The small cells and the double pores above the mouth are
sufficiently distinctive of the species, which is somewhat like
the fossil 8. parvicella.

SELENARIA MARGINATA, Spec. nov.

Pl. I1., fig. 9a—9d.

Zoarium small, “meaellanlhy orbicular, depressed, rather thin,
margins flattened for a long way, only concave near the
centre e; colour white, shining, upper surface rough and pitted.
Zooccia hexagonal or sometimes rounded below, “often appear-
ing as seen from above as if they overlapped like rounded
scales. Depressed concave, with distinct, raised margins,
covered with fine wart-like ‘projections. Mouth large, quad-
rangular, with the angles rounded sometimes above and some-

10

times below; with elevated granular margins, and a large
conspicuous pore in the centre. Vibracular cells few, irregular,
sometimes with an avicular opening beneath, with well-defined
raised margin. Under surface of zoarium with undulating,
broad, flat, punctate coste, bifurcating, with short blunt ribs
intercalated, and all circumscribed by a distinct narrow raised
margin. These costz seem to correspond with the width of the
cells, and on the edge they often correspond with the limits
of a marginal cell.

Diameter, three and a half to six millimetres ; altitude, one
to two.

Dredged at 71 fathoms off Cape Three Points.

This species is distinct from 8. punctata in many respects,
but particularly in the one pore at the mouth of the deep cell,
and in the margins round the flattened ribs at the side.

Fossil Species.
SELENARIA PARVICELLA, Spec. nov.
Pl. II., fig. 10a—10e.

Zoarium large, irregularly orbicular (?), very thin, depressed.
Zoocecia small, horseshoe shaped, the round end below; walls
thick, margins raised, lamina not visible. Avicular cells
elongately pyriform; the apex above, narrow, immersed, with
broad inner margin, very long, nearly equalling two cells.
Under surface with numerous radiating depressed ribs, not
bifurcating, but with undulating margins ; and in the centre a
single row of large pores, irregular j in shape, size, and distance
from one another.

The cells in this species vary Se in size, and the peculiar
vibracular cells are different in size and shape from any other
species.

Locality and Horizon—Muddy Creek Miocene beds, near
Hamilton.

SELENARIA CONCINNA, Spec. nov.

Pl. IL, fig. 1la—t1le.

Zoarium small, thin, orbicular, very slightly convex, some-
times almost flat. Zoocecia quite concave. semicircular, the
upper angles often circumscribed by the neighbouring cells.
Surface finely eranular, waxy, shining. Aperture elongately
semicircular, the rounded basal edge encroaching on the low
margin of the cell. Avicular cells about the size of the aper-
ture, very narrow, oblong, or triangular, with the base
above, the edges studded with very fine “teeth. Under surface
with radiating, flat, granular ribs, Binds beset with irregular

Vi

pores; between these ribs there are always fine raised lines,
which branch two or three times towards the margin.

Diameter, four millimetres; altitude, one millimetre.

A peculiar and very neat form, very granular, and the
granules projecting on the edges of the zoarium, like
asperities. The avicular cells are edged with fine, sharp,
spiny-like teeth, which almost close the aperture of the cells.
This structure is quite unique in the genus. The zoowcia are
all depressed, and do not project in any way, or overlap one
another ; but the surface is pitted, and appears without a lens
somewhat like the top of a thimble.

Locality and Horizon—Muddy Creek Miocene beds, near
Hamilton.

SELENARIA ALATA, Spec. nov.
Pl. IL., fig. 12a—12e.

Zoarium rather large, orbicular, moderately convex, solid;
edges thick, spongy. Zoocecia elongately semicircular, over-
lapping squamosely ; margins distinct, raised; area depressed ;
aperture large, narrowed above by triangular ale at each side.
Avicular areas larger than zoocecia, very few in number, with a
large ear-shaped pore in the midst of the area. Under surface
very finely punctuate, witha few radiating fine grooves, forking
two or three times towards margin, between which there are
many large pores in a double or single line of. irregular sizes
and intervals.

Diameter, rather more than 64 millimetres; altitude, ex-
ceeding 23.

The cells are a little more constricted than they are repre-
sented in the drawing, and this I believe to be the distinction
between this species and var. a, which I distinguish as var.
lata.

SELENARIA ALATA, var. LATA, 700.

Zoarium small, orbicular, solid, moderately conical, the
younger specimens most so, base flat. Zooccia rhomboidal ;
margins raised; centre depressed with a very large oblong
Square opening with the angles rounded; the summit curved
and the sides slightly constricted by the projection of the
margin. Far back in the opening there is a large semicircular
pore. The whole surface granular. Avicular pores very few
in number, something like the cells in shape but smaller.
Under surface with deep irregular grooves and pores of large
sizes forming a pattern very like rustic work in architecture.

Diameter of zoarium, about four millimetres.

The shape of the aperture in this variety is very like S. aleta

12

but more open. The flatness and peculiar ornamentation of the
base distinguish it.

Locality and Horizon of the species and variety—Muddy
Creek Miocene beds, near Hamilton, Victoria.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Prate I.
g.1. Lunulites (Cupularia) crassa: a, zoowcia, magnified ; 6,
portion of base, magnified: c, zoarium, natural size,
2. Lunulites (Cupullaria) rutella: letters as above.
. 3. Lunulites angulopora: letters as above.
. 4, Lunulites aperta: letters as above.
. 5. Lunulites cupola: letters as above.

. 6. Lunulites magna: a, b, zoarium, natural size ; ¢, zoocecia,
highly magnified ; d, outline of base, natural size.

Prare If.

Fig. 7. Lunulites exigua: a, zoarium, much magnified; 6,
zoocecia, highly magnified ; ce, part of base, magnified.

Fig. 8. Selenaria punctata: a, zoocecia, and 6, portion of under
surface, much magnified ; c, sections of two zoaria, natural
sIZes.

Fig. 9. Selenaria marginata: a, zooccia, and 6, portion of

under surface much magnified ; ¢ and d, section and out-
line of zoarium, natural sizes.

Fig. 10. Selenaria parvicella: a, zoowcia, and 6, portion of
base, magnified ; c, zoarium, natural size.

Fig. 11. Selenaria concinna : a, z00ccia, and 6, portion of under
surface, both magnified ; c, a vibracular cell showing the
peculiar teeth-like projections, much magnified; d and e,
outline and sections of zoarium, natural sizes.

Fig. 12. Selenaria alata: a, zoocecia, highly magnified ; 6, part
of base, magnified ; c, zoarium, natural size.

ee

peo MePieee| yee
de oq GQ 02 ge

ele

eee

13

RED RUST:

ITS NATURE, APPROXIMATE CAUSES, ayn PROBABLE
CURE.

By Orro Teprer, F.L.S., London; Corresponding Member.
(Abridged.)
(Read November 1, 1879.]

The subject under consideration divides itself naturally into
various questions, viz. :—

What is Red Red Rust, and how is it produced ?

What laws govern its development, and the growth of its
fostering plant ?

What will check the one and promote the other ?

That Red Rust, or mildew, is a fungus, alike with mould,
smut, brand, &c., has been proved and known long ago. The
reddish dust, which furnishes the name, is the accumulation of
the spores or seed germs of the fungus, and its appearance
denotes the last stage of its development and the completion
thereof. The first plants upon which it appears (as frequently
observed by me) are self-sown plants of black oats, barley, and
wheat, in the order they are named, the first two being seldom
and the latter not necessarily injured by it; one reason being
that this, the first stage (for according to Mr. C. Cooke there
are three or four) only attacks the older leaves in quite an
inconspicuous manner, the few spots being overlooked and
assigned to different causes by the practical farmer. Should
the sown crop be attacked, the indications will appear in the
same order —first by faint minute streaks upon the leaves and their
sheaths, then on the portion of the stalk covered by the latter.
These gradually augment, at the same time raising the cuticle
or outer skin into minute longitudinal ridges and protuber-
ances plainly discernible to the touch. These increase and
finally burst almost spontaneously over vast areas, or only in
limited localities, according to local climatal circumstances.
Then only, when the fact thus forces itself upon the ordinary
observer, is it noticed ; but at this stage the mischief is done,
and nothing can stay the consequent destruction of the crop.

Whence did it come? How did the destroyer get into the
plant? ‘To answer these questions, we must shortly consider
the growth of fungi and their propagation.

14

All proceed from extremely minute bodies, termed spores,
so small that thousands have to be placed in line to attain
- the extent of an inch, and are, therefore, singly quite
invisible to the naked eye. Again, they are produced in such
inconceivably large numbers that millions are said to be
evolved from a single plant. Some float in the air constantly,
and at all heights, assisting—Prof. Huxley suggests—in causing
the blueness of the sky. Thus they are spread over the world,
only awaiting a favourable opportunity to alight on a suitable
host, where they germinate, grow, and give birth to millions
more. Ordinary terrestrial heat little affects these spores, but
myriads perish by moisture and warmth, causing germination
when not near or upon a congenial plant; or the temperature
may be below the limit proper to their development; or the
cuticle of the plant may be too hard or too tough to be penetrated,
for fungoids of this class only develop within the tissues of
their hosts. Before describing the manner of the germination
of spores, which differs widely from that of seeds proper, it
must be remarked that many fungoids, as well as numerous
animal parasites of low organization, undergo a two-fold
development known as ‘‘alternation of generation,” or
““metagenesis,”” to which our Red Rust very probably is also
subject. In this the rule that “like produces like” does not
hold good, the spores of a fungus of definite forms infecting
one plant not propagating upon the same, but upon a totally
different one, and developing into a growth more or less dit-
ferent from its progenitor. The spores of this last, however,
return to the former host and produce the original fungus in an
analogous matter to “measles” in pork, entering the human
frame and developing into the tapeworm, while the eggs of the
latter swallowed by pigs infect them with measles. The best
known instance of this, according to some authors, is that of
the “fetid smut”—Tilletia caries (Uredo fotida)—which is
said in its second form to propagate upon Berberis vulgaris, L.,
the eradication of this shrub in the vicinity of cornfields being
followed by almost total disappearance of the said smut. The
Red Rust appearing to belong to this class of fungoids, its
second host is seemingly the so-called “barley grass,” an intro-
duced plant—(other grasses, several acacias, especially a species
with greyish-green velvetty leaves growing near Callington,
Truro, &c., are likewise strongly suspected)—which of late
years has largely supplanted the native grasses, and upon
which the rust appears before any other plant in the form of
numerous brownish spots upon the leaves. This generally takes
place in July, August, or September, sometimes earlier, some-
times later, according to the general temperature of the season.
Should the ground be very moist, the weather at the time be

15

warm and genial—(a few frosty nights have little influence on
the wheat, and none upon the fungus),—and gentle warm
breezes prevail, the wheat plant grows rapidly and becomes
very rank and succulent. The spores of the fungus escaping
from the grass rise and are wafted upon the crop, adhering to
the surface of the plant, which is then generally found to be
slightly moist near the ground, and enter at once unseen and
unsuspected upon their silent course of destruction As long
as only the leaves of the plant (7.e., wheat and other grasses)
are attacked the effect upon the seeding process is compara-
tively insignificant ; it only becomes serious when the stalk
becomes affected to any considerable extent. We have, there-
fore, to consider the structure of this part of the wheat plant
for a moment at this stage of our inquiry.

A very thin and smooth skin forms the outermost layer,
immediately below which follows a layer of minute micro-
scopical plates formed of pure silica (the same substance that
forms quartz, flint, &c.), acting like a coat of mail in protecting
the underlying delicate fibres, canals, and cells (containing
the life-substance or protoplasm of the plant) while engaged
in their office of nourishing and building up the body thereof.
The edges of these stony plates are toothed and notched, and
fit, in a normal state of health, closely into each other, thus
giving strength to the stalk without rigidity, only leaving open
exceedingly small apertures called stomata, pores or breathing
holes, but much too small to allow any spores to enter. But if
the plant be surcharged with sap, through super-abundant
moisture in the ground, this, in combination with increased
temperature, will result in swelling out the cellular tissues
unduly, separating the edges of the armour plates and
enlarging the various openings or pores. The spores of a
fungus alighting upon the exterior of such a plant when
moistened, at once begin to germinate. Their lower surface
extends, tube-like, and pushes a fine point into the next pore
or even pierces the softened cuticle, thus penetrating the inter-
cellular spaces between the abnormally separated silicious
plates. Through this delicate tube the contents of the spore
follow, and the new life begins by the formation of a network
of delicate fibres, called the myceliwm, upon which in due time
Sporangia or sporebearers are formed. Analagous to many
animal parasites, the fungoids do not kill or’ even seriously
imcommode their host for some time, the vital action of the
more important organs being left almost undisturbed. But, as
soon as the preliminaries for their own propagation are com-
pleted, all regard for their host ceases and operations are
carried on at an accelerated rate.

The roots, &e., of the wheat plant have at this stage collected

16

and are still augmenting the peculiar ingredients for the
formation of the seed. The plant is blooming, or near doing
so; the ears, husk, and skin of the grains are formed, waiting
to be fertilised and filled, when the fungus steps in and impedes
or intercepts the process.

Its agents, the mycelium threads, are widely dispersed
through the whole plant; they appropriate from the sap the
ingredients suitable for themselves, swell greatly, and with the
multitude of sporangia forming, choke the channels of the sap,
preventing its ascent to the head, where it is required, and
finally bursting the skin, the plant is prematurely killed, while
the fungus, shedding myriads of spores, has completed its own
cycle.

Should cold, calm, rainy weather prevail at the time the
spores are shed from the intermediate plant (or, on the other
hand, those of the first stage on the wheat or other plant), the
chances are that the greater number of the spores will be
washed down into the soil and perish for want of proper
nourishment, few only reaching their destination to do any
perceptible harm, although the wheat might be in a fitting
condition to receive them. Again, should dry weather prevail,
with only sufficient moisture in the ground to keep the wheat
in a healthy state, the stalks, &c., would be healthy and able
to prevent the entrance of the fungi. Yet, a few always escape
destruction, or find a suitable host, and a single spore produces
a progeny in one season to infect, under favourable circum-
stances, a whole field in the next.

The reason why barley, oats, and some other grasses are not
affected at all, or only to a shght degree as far as their seeding
is concerned, is to be sought for in the fact that their grains
are nearly perfected before the fungus interferes by choking
the sap-canals, the latter thus only appropriating their surplus
of sap, while in the case of the wheat the fungus comes first.
Another cause may be that neither barley nor oats have been so
highly refined through artificial selection as wheat, and thus
remain hardier.

The first time the writer observed Red Rust was in 1854-5,
near Lyndoch, extending over irregular patches of ground of
considerable extent. Where observed it developed most in
soils rich in humus and clay, least on stiff loamy soils; again
more so on land ploughed shallow than on deeply-ploughed
ground ; but this, most likely, depends upon the subsoil, which,
at the spot referred to, was beyond the reach of the plough,
and consisted of stiff yellow clay. Since then it has been
noticed nearly every year to a greater or less extent, the
writer having lived constantly among farmers and farms.

In 1862 rust was observed in the neighbourhood of Mount

ily

Gambier, chiefly on rich, loose, black soil with much lime,

limestone forming the subsoil, but very little could be noticed

on sand. What is most notable is that a variety of wheat,

called “creeping wheat,” distinguished by very stiff, glassy,

upright stalks, appeared to be much less affected, if at all, than

any other kind. It alyo was the latest in ripening. These facts
robably point an important moral.

In 1871-2 rust prevailed much in Monarto, chiefly on the
best loamy or clayey soils with limestone or clay subsoil, while
splendid grain was obtained on patches of very sandy soil,
ploughed and sown hurriedly for want of time.

At New Mecklenburg wheat was found as rusty as elsewhere
near a salt creek, the soil being surcharged with saline ingre-
dients. At Ardrossan, Yorke’s Peninsula, all the crops were
much affected with rust in the past season, and no difference
was observable between those bordering the seashore and those
some miles inland. The soil is abundantly supplied with salt
and lime.

The above observations are intended to show that rust occurs
equally on all soils, and under very varied circumstances
respecting locality and situation. They seem to prove that the
occurrence of the fungus does not depend either on the soil or
local circumstances, but more likely upon—(a) Particular
atmospheric conditions. (6) The structure of the wheat-plant.
(c) The constitution of the soil (that is the soluble salts it
contains) ; and suggest the direction in which the remedies he.

In respect of the first the power of man is inefficient to do
much, except in so far as by planting forest trees extensively
(say a strip around each field) he can, to a considerable extent,
regulate the moisture in the soil, as they promote the infiltra-
tion and retention of the rainwater, and protect the land from
injurious winds.

The structure of the plant and the constitution of the soil
are much more in the power of man. What promises by far
the best results is the production of a wheat plant combining
a hard smooth stalk and a full fine grain. This will
depend on the ingredients of the soil, the constitution of
which is inevitably changed for the worse by cropping year
after year, without returning to the soil in a suitable form the
ingredients removed by the crops. To determine these is the
province of the agricultural chemist. Wheat and all other
grain crops require a great number of substances for the pro-
duction of seeds; the absence or insufficiency of any one of
them will cause weakness and sickening of the plant, expose it
to the invidious attacks of its enemies, and ultimate decay and
death. For the building up of the stalks, leaves, and husks
soluble silicates besides the carbon (derived chiefly from the

B

18

atmosphere) are required. Their presence depends largely on
decaying vegetable matter in the soil. Sulphates and phosphates
of potash, soda, and lime, &¢., are wanted for the formation of
seeds.

Seeking for a remedy in another direction, there may be
discovered a substance which, when applied to the soil, or
the seeds, and imbibed by the plants, will act adversely
to the growth of fungoids, in the same way as bluestone (sul-
phate of copper) checks the ‘‘ Dust Brand” (Ustilago segetum).
Thus in “ Rust, Smut, Mildew, and Mould,’ Mr. C. Cooke
says, at page 81, “the spores of many species of fungi will not
germinate after saturation with certain chemical “solutions.
One of the most successful remedies, and easy of application, is
a strong solution of Glauber’s salts, ‘in which the seed corn is
to be washed, and afterwards, while still moist, dusted over
with quicklime. The rationale of this process consists in the
setting free a caustic soda by the sulphuric acid of the Glau-
ber’s salt combining with the lime, and converting it into sul-
phate of lime. The caustic soda is fatal to the cermination of
the spore of ‘ bunt,’ and probably also of smut and rust.”

19

NOTES ON THE COMET OF FEBRUARY,
1880.

By C. Topp, C.M.G., F.R.A.S., Vice-President.
(Read March 2, 1880.)

[ Plate ITT. |

You will no doubt expect to receive from me some account
of the fine comet which during the first half of last month
formed so conspicuous an object in our evening sky. I regret
that I have not very much to tell you about it, and I fear I
cannot tell you much more than you already know; but it is
only proper that what little I have to say should appear on the
records of this Society. Owing to the extreme faintness of
the nucleus, and its low altitude at first, very few measure-
ments could be taken, and these extend over so short an interval
as to afford no data for determining even approximately its
orbit. My friend Mr. Ellery succeeded in getting measures on.
February 9, 10, 14, 15, 16, and 17, and glimpsed it on the 6th
and 13th. I obtained measures on the 12th, 18th, 16th, and
17th, and I just glimpsed it on the 18th; but thin clouds and
bright moonlight prevented any observations of its position
being taken. This, I believe, was the last occasion on which it
was seen in Australia, the increasing moonlight on the next
evening completely blotting out so faint an object, although I
made a long and keen search for it with the telescope directed
over the spot in the sky in which I knew the nucleus to be
situated. Mr. Russell, the ‘Government Astronomer in
Sydney, who possesses a splendid equatorial, with an object
glass of over eleven inches aperture, by Schroeder, only saw
the nucleus twice for short intervals between clouds on the
13th and 14th; and Mr. Tebbutt, of Windsor, N.S.W., whom
you all know as an ardent and experienced observer, writes me
to say that owing to clouds he has been unable to see the
nucleus at all. I mention these circumstances partly because
you will no doubt have seen remarks complaining of the little
iformation I gave the public respecting the comet, and re-
proaching me for not sooner detecting the nucleus. I think
what I have told you will suffice to show that the nucleus was
not avery easy thing to see, especially when it was low down
in the mists of the horizon, and the atmosphere on the horizon

20

was very thick and unfavourable for the week or ten days
after the tail was first seen. It happened, too, unfortunately
that I was all alone; the Assistant Astronomer, Mr. Ringwood,

being absent in ‘ibaswneaaney and only returned on the morning
of the 16th. On the five evenings on which I saw the nucleus
it was too faint to bear any illumination of the field, and in
taking the measurements | had to bring it to the edge of the
comb of a bifilar micrometer, using a very low power; the
observing-room was also kept dark.

In the accompanying map (plate III.) I have laid down
approximately the path of the comet between the 2nd and 17th
of February, and the position of the tail amongst the stars.
The first thing that will strike you on looking at this diagram
will be the rapid extension of the tail, which, within a few
evenings from its first appearance, lengthened out from an
altitude of about 15 deg. or 20 deg., up to within a short dis-
tance of the zenith. The rapid manner, too, in which it finally
faded away, leaving the small faint nebulous nucleus with
scarcely a trace of a “tail after the 14th, was very remarkable.

On the 16th and 17th I could see no tail through the equa-
torial, the nucleus being reduced to a mere hazy speck. The
length and brightness of the tail led me to expect a bright and
large nucleus ; “put on the 6th, when it was first caught sioht of
by ‘Mr. Eller y, it was so faint as to leave some doubts as to its
identity. Mr. Ellery, in his telegram to me, says:—“ Faint
nebulous point, perhaps nucleus, observed last ‘night (the 6th)
R.A. 22° 48', dec. 32° 36’.”

The tail I considered was brightest on the evening of the
2nd, when I first saw it. It then appeared as a narrow auroral-
like streak of light, extending from the mists on the horizon,
perhaps a little N. of S.W., up to and passing nearly through
Delta 1 and Delta 2, and Beta Gruis, the upper extremity, from
about Delta Gruis, curving sharply to the south. On the fol-
lowing ELIS the 3rd, clouds hung about the 8.W., obscuring
the view ; but as they cleared off, the tail was well seen. It
was somewhat broader than on the 2nd, and perhaps a little
brighter than the Nubecula Minor, but not 80 bright as the
larger Magellan cloud. Roughly speaking, the tail had shifted |
about 3° to the north, the stars Theta and Jota Gruis lying
on the northern edges of the tail, which in its curvature was
nearly concentric, w Si a line passing through Delta 1, Delta 2,
Beta, and Epsilon Gruis, extending, as far as my eye could trace.
it, to an altitude of about 27°. A low bank of éloud cut off the
view of the lower portion or head of the comet, which was pro- |
bably not far from Beta Pisces Australis, at the time hid by |
cloud. I see I made a note that the tail was brighter than on
the 2nd, but this I think was due to its greater altitude, its

21

greater breadth, and pextaps also to contrast with the dark
clouds. I saw it on the 2nd, first in strong twilight, and for
some time took it to be an auroral streak, till its fixity and
freedom from pulsation indicated its true character. I may
here say that the comet appears to have been seen by several
persons on Sunday evening, the 1st, and by Mr. Blessing, of
Seppeltsfield, on Saturday, ‘the 31st of Januar y-

On the 4th I saw the tail as early as 8 o'clock, and later,
when the twilight had died out, it was very bright. I could trace
it down to Beta Pisces Australis, which star was near the ex-
tremity, on the northern edge ; but I thought wholly immersed
in the tail.* In this position Beta Pisces Australis was probably
mistaken by many persons for the nucleus, of which, however,
I could see no trace. The tail could be followed nearly up to
and pointed directly towards Hta Pheenicis, or to an altitude of
35°. Better eyes could probably trace it further. Theta
Pheenicis was within, but nearly on the northern verge,
and the tail was broadest and brightest a little below that star
—about 13° wide, gradually tapering towards each extremity.
The tail was about as bright, or a little brighter, than the
smaller Magellan cloud, which in structure it much resembled,
and could be seen much better with the naked eye than through
a telescope.

On February 5 the tail was not so bright; first seen about
8.10; later it reached up to Zeta Pheenicis, say 40° or beyond,
passing through Hpsilon Pheenicis, the head being to the south
of Fomalhaut. It was only slightly curved to the south, the
upper end straightening as the tail swings over to the north.

Feb. 6. Fainter and less curved. Now extends to Chi
Eridani, perhaps further. Air thick on horizon.

Mr. Mann, telegraphing from Mount Gambier, thus de-
Scribes its appearance this evening :—

“Feb. 6, midnight. Beautiful clear night. I went to the
tep of the mount near the lakes to observe the comet. It has
no nucleus, but tail fades away at some distance above the
horizon (i.e., cannot be traced down to horizon). At 10h. 30m.
tail scarcely visible, and gradually faded away; position, S.W.
by 8S. When at its brightest about 9 o’clock it extended over
about one-fifth of the sky. At no time was the tail well

* Dr. Bone, of Castlemaine, in Victoria, claims to have seen the nucleus
with a field-glass on the 4th, and gives its position R.A. 22h. 49m. 5s.,
dec. 53° 35’. This would bring it close to Gamma and Delta Pisces Australis
(R.A. 22h, 45m. 38s., and 22h. 49m. 5s.,and dec. respectively 33° 11’ and 33°
303’). The position given by Mr. Ellery on the 4th was R.A. 22h. 48m., dec.
32° 36’. Dr. Bone’s position is either wrong, or he must have mistaken
some star for the nucleus, and if so it was probably either Gamma or Delia
Pisces Australis,

22

defined, but appeared more like nebule or a bright auroral
streak.”

The comet was seen this evening (6th) at the telegraph
station on the River Katherine, in the Northern Territory, by
Mr. Murray; also at Pine Creek, and by Mr. Little at Port
Darwin. I telegraphed its position to Singapore, but it was
not, I think, seen there.

On Feb. 7 the tail was much fainter and reduced to a thin
nebulous streak, extending from a little above Fomalhaut up
to Kappa Hridani, passing through Alpha Pheenicis.

Feb. 8. Comet fainter, and now has a slight curvature north-
wards. Can be traced from a little north of Fomalhaut, past
and north of Alpha Pheenicis, and Gamma Phoenicis being on
the northern edge, up to and ‘pointing a little north of Kappa
Eridani. I lost it a little beyond that star, but Mr. Cooke
could trace it up nearly to the zenith.

Feb. 9. Looked carefully for nucleus, but could not see it.
A bank of stratus below Fomalhaut on S.W. horizon, and
atmosphere thick. The tail now passesa little north of s and e
Pheenicis, a little south of Delta and Epsilon Hridani, above
which I lost it, but my young assistant, Mr. Cooke, who has very
sharp eyes, said he could trace it nearly up to the four stars,
Alpha, Epsilon, Beta, and Gamma Columbe (a short distance
west of the zenith), towards which it points.

No special notes were made on the 10th and 11th, except
that the tail was rapidly getting fainter.

On the 12th I succeeded in detecting the nucleus, and got
some differential measurements in R.A. and Dec., comparing
it with a star of 5} magnitude, No. 103 in the British Associa-
tion’s Catalogue (29 in the Melbourne Catalogue), and a small
star of the 10th or 10-11th magnitude, being one of four small
stars forming a pretty trapezium in Sculptor, which were in the
same field as the nucleus, and to the south of the comet. The
nucleus was a faint nebulosity. I could see no central condensa-
tion, and could only just trace the tail in the field of the equatorial
finder, although it could be seen with the eye as a faint streak
of light in the sky. At 10h. 1m. the comet followed B.A.C.
103 ; 2m. 22s. and 14m. further south in declination. Its ap-
proximate position, therefore, was R.A. Oh. 24m. 18s. ; Dec. 33°
55’ south.

On the 13th I again got some good measurements, using a star
of the 8th magnitude, which I have not found in any catalogue,
and whose place, therefore, will have to be obtained with a
transit circle on the meridian.

The comet at 9h. 27m. followed the star 2m. 24s., and was
10’ to the south in declination.

23

A good series of measures was obtained by me again on the
evenings of the 16th and 17th.

On the former evening it was compared with B.A.C. 489,
from which its approximate position was found to be

R.A., 1h. 29m. 26s. :
Dee., 31° 21' south ; ab 10h. Im.

On that evening I thought J could occasionally see a slight
stellar condensation, but this was not confirmed on the follow-
ing evening, when its appearance in the 8-inch equatorial was
that of a faint nebulous telescopic comet, without any defined
nucleus. As I have before said, it would bear no illumination
of the field, and the measures were taken at the comb of the
micrometer. The tail could at times be just traced in the field
as a slight elongation of the nebula. The reference star used
on the 17th was Lacaille No. 522. It cannot be found in any
other or modern catalogue, and its position, therefore, requires
verification. The approximate place of the comet deduced
from fourteen measures in R.A, and ten in declination was—
R.A., Lh. 41m. 16s.; Dec., 30° 18’ at 10h. 5m.

I have been unable to identify the comet with any previous
one. No orbit has been calculated, and in fact the few obser-
vations we have obtained are insufficient to give more than a
very rough approximation to its path. Whether, therefore, it
is a new friend or a regular denizen of our system I cannot
say.

With comets, as you are aware, the space through which we
can follow them is often too limited to enable us to deduce an
elliptical orbit. A parabola, and in some instances an hyper-
bola, will satisfy all the observations, and in that case no
period of revolution can be obtained; in other words, we
cannot say whether the comet will soon return to us, or
whether it will go on to other systems far away in the infinite
space by which we are surrounded. We are, however, helped
by knowing the velocity of its motion. For instance, it has
been shown that if a comet at a distance from the sun of about
92,000,000 travelled at a rate of 26 miles a second, it would
describe a parabola; and, therefore, unless arrested in its
course by the action of one or more of the larger planets, it
would never return.

Many comets to which a parabolic orbit has been assigned
no doubt move in very elongated ellipses, and will and do
return to us after long intervals.

Now, the position of a comet’s orbit in space is fixed :—

1. By the inclination of the orbit to the ecliptic.

2. The points of intersection with that plane—7.e., the
longitude of its ascending and descending nodes.

3. The longitude of perihelion.

24

4. The distance of the comet from the sun when in
perihelion.
To which may be added as a further means of identification,
whether the direction of its motion is direct or retrograde.

In catalogues of comets these elements are given, and when
any new comet comes into view, and the elements of its orbit
are determined from the observations made, we ca: compare
these elements with those of older comets, and thus ascertain
whether it has ever been seen before.

Bright comets have been regarded by the ancients with awe
and dread, and thus influenced they have fortunately left us
pretty reliable records of their apparitions, and from these
Mr. Hind was able to trace successive appearances of Halley’s
comet—which we last saw in 1835 and ’86—as far back as 11
B.c., and in 4.D. 65 it hung as an avenging sword over Jeru-
salem, then besieged by Titus.

In like manner the splendid comet of 1680 was identified,
with some degree of probability, with the comets of 531 and
1106, and the year of Cesar’s death.

With regard to the comet of this year I find that the longi-
tude of its ascending node is about 123°, and the inclination
to the ecliptic about 38°. It probably passed its perihelion
at the end of January. Its motion is direct.

Mr. Jones, of Gawler, says he first saw what he believes to
be the same comet some weeks earlier. It was then—(1 use
his own words as published in the papers)—mistaken for a
nebulous star about 8° east of the Nubecula Minor, and
that three days later the same object was 2° to the east-
ward, had become brighter, and had assumed an oval configura-
tion. I fail to identify this object with our recent visitor,
and must express my regret that Mr. Jones did not announce
his discovery of a new comet at the time. I shall be glad now
to receive particulars of his observations. Mr. Jones further
appears to think that the comet of 1880 and Faye’s comet are
one and the same. Now, I was fortunate enough to observe
Faye’s comet in 1850 and 1851 at Cambridge. We were the
first to re-discover it on November 28, 1850, and followed it up
till the month of March following. It was excessively faint,
even through the twelve-inch Northumberland telescope, and
was, I think, seen at only two other observatories—Cambridge,
in America (where they got two observations), and at Berlin.
It bears no resemblance to the late comet, and has a different
orbit. It reaches its perihelion in November this year.

5

ON THE CHARACTERISTICS AND DISTRIBUTION
OF THE

NATIVE AND NATURALISED PLANTS
ABOUT ARDROSSAN,

YORKE’S PENINSULA.

By Orro Tepper, F.L.S., Corr. Member.
(Read April 6, 1880.]

[Plate IV.]

At the desire of the eminent botanist, Baron F. von Mueller,
K.C.M.G., M. & Ph. D., F.R.S., Melbourne, I commenced in
the second half of last year to utilise some of my leisure by
collecting the plants of the neighbourhood of Ardrossan, with
the view thereby to elucidate the floral aspect of the Peninsula,
as a narrowly circumscribed and almost isolated area. Being
limited in time and means of locomotion, the area examined is
necessarily small, mainly comprised within a radius of three or
four miles. A few excursions have been made to Yorke Valley
(two miles E. of Maitland) near the middle of the Peninsula,
and one to Kilkerran and the West Coast, in which I was
ereatly assisted by Mr. Wundersitz, to whose kindness my best
thanks are due. Another excursion was made to Muloowurtie
and Pine Point, but rather too late in the season. A few
plants were obtained from Kalkabury, 14 miles N.W. from
here.

The dried specimens were forwarded to Baron F. v. Mueller,
who most obligingly named them, and afterwards revised their
arrangement. Considering the labour this entails, and the
increased scientific value it gives to the work, great thanks are
due to the honorary member.

The accompanying “List of Plants”? represents the results
of the undertaking ; but the whole of the Acotyledones are
omitted on account of incompleteness, with the exceptions of
the Filices and Musci (four species), which I believe are all
that occur in the area examined.

To the names of the plants are attached certain letters
mdicating the geological formations to which they most pre-

26

vailingly fare peculiar, and the meaning of which is explained
in the table showing their numerical relation. The term
“coast” includes the sea-beach as well as the adjoining plain.
The soil of the latter consists everywhere of an arenaceous,
somewhat saline clay, derived partly from tertiary and partly
from primary, or even plutonic rocks, and covers (in variable
dimensions) loose, globular limestone concretions. Some plants,
characteristic of certain formations, mark this conspicuously ;
for example, the native tobacco, Nicotiana suaveolens, Lehmann,
which flourishes on soil derived from primary rocks in the
North, oceurs here among the sandstones and marbles of the
hills near Ardrossan, but accompanies the debris along the
gullies to within a few yards of the sea shore. This seems the
case also with other formations, which largely explains the
sometimes strange intermixture of plants. But it appears to
me that plants prefer certain rocks less for their chemical than
for their physical properties; thus plants affecting tertiary
soils, such as Calycothrix tetragona seem to cling as well to the
newer, loose aggregated limestones as to the silicious grits,
while the dense travertines are associated mostly with the same
plants that grow beside primary conglomerates, schists and
granite. Ot these I mention Myoporwm viscosum and Dodoneu
viscosum. By the term “ general” (G.) those plants are denoted
which flourish indiscriminately on all formations, provided the
conditions of the surface soil be favourable to vegetable
growth. Examples in point are our two principal mallees,
Eucalyptus oleosa and E. gracilis, which cover the greatest area
of the Peninsula. Others are most grasses, several Goodenias,
Dampiera rosmarinifolia, Bursaria spinosa, Wahlenbergia
gracilis, and almost all introduced weeds.

A few words about the lateral arrangement of the geological
features may not prove superfluous in rendering the following
remarks more lucid. The appended diagramatic section (Plate
IV.) illustrates roughly the configuration of the Peninsula
from Ardrossan westward to Point Pearce Peninsula. The
distance from sea to sea is about 26 miles, and the greatest
eleyation is attained by the double ridge at Maitland, between
which is Yorke Valley. The heights in the sketch, which are
much exaggerated, are about 300 feet in elevation, those at
Maitland probably above, and those at Ardrossan below the
average. The chief geological features are indicated in the
sketch. The width of the Ardrossan coast-plain is about a
mile; that of Kilkerran two or three miles. The tertiaries
form narrow bands on the east coast, not exceeding a few
hundred yards in width, near the summit of the hills and fol-
lowing their conyolutions. Those on the west coast are only
inferred from the vegetation, &c., and form a belt some two or

27

three miles across. The soil covering the several formations
is everywhere a more or less sandy clay, rarely replaced by
pure sand, with this difference in the substratum, that the
loose limestone concretions on the newer are replaced by a
solid travertine on the older formations, the respective rocks
only protruding at rare and wide intervals, just about sufficient
to surmise the real nature thereof. It will be noticed by the
diagram that the primaries occupy by far the largest area.
They consist chiefly of granite, gneiss, quartzites, sandstones,
and conglomerates from the Ardrossan to the first medial
ridge. This fact partly accounts for the monotony and poverty
of the vegetation, especially if it be remembered that the
physical properties of the limestones favor a rapid percolation
of the rainwater, thus producing a scarcity or rather absence
of surface moisture. At Yorke Valley and west of Maitland
a more tenacious and retentive clay prevails (probably derived
from decaying slates), and consequently vegetation is much
more luxuriant.

A few words on the temperature and other meteorological
relations may not be amiss. As to the first, the observations
scarcely extend beyond the neighbourhood of Ardrossan, and
appears to be similar as at Port Adelaide and the Semaphore.
In winter it is mild, frost is scarcely known, and the ther-
mometer is seldom less than 55° F. in the daytime. In summer
it has been observed as high as 116° in the shade (19/1/80),
but the nights are always cool. The annual rainfall is about
equal to the average of the province; rain falls frequently,
but generally light, and of short duration. The winds seem
more regular than on the main land. During the warmer
season the cool south-east is the most prevailing; it is ever
accompanied by dry and fair weather. In winter and early
spring the south-west bears sway, generally dry; it sometimes
brings heavy showers, and is always cold and bracing. The
north-west winds are not very frequent, even in summer, when
they are as hot as elsewhere; but in their train ever comes a
speedy change and often rain; in fact, they are the true rain
winds, as far as steadiness and continuity goes. The rarest
winds are those from the east, very cold and cutting, and when
accompanied with rain Australians do feel it cold. The changes
in the weather, in the whole, appear to occur very regularly
in the following sequence :—S.E., cool, fair, dry; E., cold and
dry, sometimes drifting rain; N.E. and N., hot, sultry, dry,
cumulus clouds gathering, either followed by steady rain, the
wind gradually shifting through W. to 8.W., with the rain
breaking up into showers, frequently very heavy ; or the wind
suddenly shifting to the S.W., driving clouds of dust before it,
and cooling the air within an hour or less from 116° down to

28

70° or less, in which case no rain follows except some light
local thundershowers.

Whirlwinds are very rare about Ardrossan (this place is
about 45 miles north-east of Port Adelaide).

During the prevalence of north-east and north-west winds
the shores of the mainland can be plainly discerned, sometimes
in curiously distorted outlines (25th August, 1879), and then
the Port Adelaide Light is seen distinctly at night, which
is not the case hen the south-east, south, and south-west
winds blow. The distance between the shores of St. Vincent's
Gulf at Ardrossan varies from 20 to 35miles.

The total number of species contained in the lst amounts to
363, exclusive of eight remarkable and well-defined varieties,
comprised in 206 genera and 67 orders. Most of them have
been gathered ar ound the port of Ardrossan. Of those
obtained elsewhere, the name of the locality has been appended
to the name; thus 30 are recorded as peculiar to Yorke Valley
and the adjoining hills to the east ; twelve from Kilkerran ;
nine from Muloowurtie; and twelve from Maitland Road, by
which is meant the low tract of ground between the Ardrossan
and Yorke Valley ridge of hills.

The following table indicates the geological distribution of
plants, according to the present state of inquiry :-—

| |
Formation. Abbreviat. | Dicotyled, | Monocotyl. Acotyled.|| Total.
Coast and Coastplain . C. | 74 L4g | Gas 89
Coastplain & Tertiaries) C. and T. | 27 12 0 39
Tertiaries .. . .| Ty, | 21 4 0 25
Tertiaries & Primaries| T. and P. || 32 3 fe @ 35
Primaries Ie | 81 Ti il 93
Common to all, general G. i 70 19 2 91
Wincertarne sie sen | — I 1 i 0 2
| Total foe ool ee can | sO onan aane4 4 371
|| inel. 8 var. |

It will be seen that the coastlands furnish the greatest
number of species, viz., 208, or about 61 per cent.; the
tertiaries the smallest, with 184, and the primaries with 204,
seeming somewhat richer. But the aspect changes, when we
consider the respective areas occupied. Then we see at a
glance that for any given equal extent the tertiaries present
the greatest variety, especially if we consider the eastern coast-
plain as belonging to the tertiaries wader the influence of the

29

sea air (for which there are good reasons). Under this view
the scantiness and monotony of the primary regions will fully
reveal itself, as many of their peculiar forms of vegetation are
very local, and frequently of solitary occurrence.

The aspect of the plant world of Yorke’s Peninsula in the
whole much resembles that of portions of the Murray Scrub
between Callington and Swanport, and bears a decided desert
character between Ardrossan, Yorke Valley, and Kalkabury,
and again some portions of Kilkerran, brought about by the
total absence of natural springs and flowing water, and the
permeability of the soil. The coast-plain “and other open
patches are thickly studded with large tufts of grass-like
Cyperacee and Xerotidee. The most common is Cladium
lanigerum, with cylindrical, needle-like, pungent leaves, asso-
diated with four species of Xerotes and one of Lepidosper mu
(undetermined), the latter distinguished from the preceding by
its flat, leaf-like flower-stalk. The most common of the
Aerotids is X. effusa. All these are almost useless as food for
domestic animals, and lend to the landscape a weird, forbid-
ding aspect. Among their tufts other grasses find a precarious.
domicile, of which Stipa scabra, 8. crinita, Danthonia pemcillata,
Poa caespitosa, and Agropyrwn scabrum are the most conspi-
cuous, together with the introduced Festuca bromoides, Koeleria
phleoides, and Hordewn imurinum. <Authistiria ciliata, the
‘kangaroo grass,’ 1s in the whole very scarce. Whereyer a
fire sweeps away the scrub, Stipa semibarbata and NS. aristiglumis
appear in profusion, often growing a stalk three to five feet
high, producing a singular effect at certain seasons by then
large waving seed- _plumes. During the season of spring these
orasslands are enlivened by the thousands of yellow and white
flowers of many Composites, Goodenovier, and Orchids, the
blue of Wahlenbergia gracilis, the blue or pink of Dampiera
rosmarinifolia, and many others; few only, among which is:
Stackhousia linarifolia, being at all remarkable for any pleasant
scent. Of shrubs, dotting “the open country near Ardrossan,
&e., the most remarkable are the low, dense Styphelia patula,
with dark green, glabrous, myrtle-like leaves and red edible:
berries ; iieiren rugosa and the unavoidable Bursaria spinosa,
with its large white clusters of snow-white flowers, but very
spiny branches.

Grevillea Huegeli and a variety of sere riggenk Brownii, both
with fine red flowers, occasionally find their way from es hills:
to the plain, increasing the variety agreeably in company with
the much smaller Pimeleas, dressed in a profusion of white or
yellow. farger shrubs are Acacia Osswaldi, with rigid dense
foliage, semi- arborescent, and Gevera par viflora, many ‘stemmed,
with dense light green foliage, steeped from September to:

30

November in a cloud of delicate white bloom. Melaleuca
acuminata and MM. ericifolia form occasionally dense thickets,
but the latter only in company of mallee wherever it approaches
the shore. This is the largest of its kind here, mostly forming
arborescent shrubs, eminently social, and covering considerable
tracts almost exclusively, but also growing into trees some ten
or fifteen feet high. It likewise flourishes on the Muloowurtie
Hills (Ardrossan marble). Upon it Loranthus Melaleuce is
found parasitically ; at the last mentioned locality profusely ;
near Ardrossan seldom. On dry watercourses the graceful
Eremophila longifolia is sometimes met with. It is a tree about
ten or twelve feet high, with pendent branches and large
yellowish red flowers in great number; also groups of Seaevola
spinescens and Lycium australe occur; the former often infested
with hairy galls, looking lke tufts of white wool. The mallee-
serub—here principally ‘formed of only two species, Hucalyptus
oleosa and #. gracilis; while another, 2. wncinata, is more
local—covers the greater part of the interior, sometimes ex-
tending to the very edge of the shore cliffs, either for some
distance or only lining the banks of watercourses. In its
company is then found the fine ornamental shrub, Alyxia
buxifolia, with dark green glabrous leaves (whitish yellow when
young), white spiral flowers, and bright red berries. The latter
are very attractive for the eye, but obnoxious to the taste. This
shrub sometimes forms close thickets, even on the incline of
the shore. The native peach, Santalum acuminatum, and the
popularly termed “ poison tree,” P2ttosporum phillyreoides, are
plentiful. The profuse red or orange coloured berries of the
latter are bitter, but not poisonous; thus the popular name is
a misnomer.

A remarkable plant is Zvocarpus aphylla, which seems to repre-
sent savage obduracy as a shrub, with inextricably intertwined
stems and branches, no leaves, thickly-set thousands of minute
flowerets, and abominably bitter red berries ; and as a stunted
tree, appears to picture, with its pendent, stiff, dead-looking
branches, the hopeless despair of one lost in these dreary
thickets. At the foot and along the face of the cliffs, where-
ever offering a hold, Atriplex cinereus, Nitraria Schoberi, and
Tetragonia implexicome, with other salsolaceous plants, Myo-
porum insulare and Aster axillaris flourish. The last is a tall
shrub and forms large thickets, with Bursaria spinosa in sandy
beaches, beyond thereach of high water, occasionally interspersed
with Casuarina quadrivalvis, and (but rarely) Frenela verrucosa,
which latter prefers higher sandy or rocky soil generally.
Wherever the scanty surface-waters of the land find exit at
the foot of the cliffs under the sea sand, Scirpus nodosus indi-
cates its existence, while the drier dunes are fixed by the rami-

31

fying stems and roots of Spinifex hirsutus and Distichlis
maritima.

Receding from the shore and ascending the hills the aspect
of the plant world gradually changes. One of the most lovely
of shrubs is Boronia clavellifolia, with its hundreds of bright
pink flowers—blooming for many weeks ; it would grace any
garden. Other plants deserving the attention of horticul-
turists are Halgania lavandulacea (yellow), Eriosteman lepidotus
(blue), Westringia rigida (white), Prostanthera coccinea (varying
from light yellow through grass green into dark bluish green),
Baeckia crassifolia (white), Cheiranthera linearis (beautifully
blue with yellow stamens, about one inch, and easily cultivated),
Lasiopetalum discolor (pink), Callistemon coccineus (growing in
and around claypans, and requiring stiff clay with fragments
of granite, the flower cluster 1s two to three inches long, and of
bright crimson), Aster pannosus, and others too numerous to
mention here. As climbers may be recommended the silvery
Billardiera cymosa, var. sericophora, with profuse rather large
whitish flowers, the almost leafless Comesperma volubile, with
large clusters of sky-blue or purple flowers, and the chaste
Clematis microphylla, the latter very easy to grow.

Everywhere the tops of the mallees are interwoven with a
plant with cord-like stems and branches, very minute leaves,
small white flowers and greenish globular berries, rendering
some parts almost impenetrable. This is Cassytha melantha.
Another smaller species, C. pubescens, also epiphytal like the
preceding, with truncated elliptical berries, prefers smaller
shrubs. A third species,C. glabella, with a stem hardly thicker
than a thread,, but yet several feet long, infests species of
Cladiwm and Xerotes preferentially, but fastens on almost any-
thing in its way. It is chiefly found on the coast-plain and
other open tracts.

Some plants appear characteristic of certain formations.
Thus Hibbertia stricta, Pomaderris obcordata, Lasiopetalum
discolor, and the lowly Melaleuca parviflora appear confined to
the tertiaries; the delicate Calycothrixv tetragona flourishes
most profusely where these join the primary sandstones and
conglomerates, while the latter are signalised by Dodonea
hecandra, a small, dense, light green shrub. Dodonea viscosa
has been almost invariably observed in connection with
quartzites elsewhere; here this arborescent shrub (the
“ Native Hop”) remains true to this character, but also locally
appears on the very silicious Turritella Grits (tertiary) in a
dwarf form, with broader leaves than usual. Melaleuca
wncinata was ever noticed upon granite hills in the Murray
Serub at Monarto. Its appearance here induced me to infer
the existence of granite long before it was actually observed.

32

It also flourishes on adjacent gneiss, but wherever seen it
seems to indicate the said rock in close proximity. The
settlers call it “ broom,” and we use it for covering sheds, &c.
Exocarpus spartea, among others, is also found in the primary
regions chiefly.

There are some plants very remarkable for their variability.
Foremost among them is Hutaxia empetrifolia. The typical
form is a low shrub, with very small pointed leaves. not very
closely set, the branchlets almost at right angles; its yellow
flowers have numerous dark streaks. The w hole shrub seldom
exceeds twelve inches in height; the stem is rarely thicker
than a goosequill, and is found on all formations. ‘Near the
Parara Mine, on ferruginous micaceous schist, it appears in a
totally different form, entirely prostrate, and closely pressed
to the ground. The longer, narrower leaves are densely
crowded ‘along the numerous short branchlets, the flowers much
more numerous and larger, and the whole plant presenting
quite a different aspect. “Along the Maitland road, on granitic
or quartzitic soil, it assumes a much larger form, attaining
from two to three feet in height. The ‘branchlets are not
numerous, very supple and thin; the leaves soft, and about a
quarter to half an inch long ; the flowers of a pale yellow. It
frequently grows side by ‘ide with the first mentioned form,
thereby forcibly exhibiting the great contrast between them.
To this large form the name Sclerothamnus diffusus had been
given, but ie has been reduced to the rank of a variety, on
account, as Baron F. v. Mueller says, of numerous insensible
eradations from one into the other having been discovered at
different localities. Wahlenbergia gracilis, the “ native blue-
bell,”’ varies in size from two inches high and a minute floweret
(var. guadrifida) to fifteen or sixteen “inches in height, and a
usually blue flower of more than an inch in diameter. A large
white flowering variety occurs here. Besides the difference in
the flower, the form of the leaves also varies greatly.

Vittadinia australis, common everywhere on open ground,
presents at least four well-marked varieties in flower and leaf.
The leaves of the typical Billardiera cymosa are smooth and
dark green, whereas those of the variety sericophora are densely
covered with white hairs on both sides.

Of other notable forms either in flowers or leaf, the most
conspicuous are Comesperma volubilis, Prostanthera coccimea, and
Eremophila Brownti. Of variable Orchids may be mentioned
Caladenia pulcherrima, of which C. Paterson, R. Br., is one
variety, but three others s occur, different in colour and form.
Caladenia deformis varies in colour from blue to pink.

Only one new species has as yet been discovered by me, viz.,
a small Orchid, in respect of which Baron F. v. Mueller, has,

39

done me the honour of naming it Prasophyllum Tepperi. Its
stalk is thin, straight, leafless ; the flowers not numerous, very
small; the tubers large, globular. It grows under clumps of
mallee, and appears common to the tertiary and primary clays.
It is rare, and blooms in April.

Plagianthus Berthe has hitherto only been found between
King George’s Sound and the Australian Bight, and there it is
rare, as Baron fF. vy. Mueller informed me. It occurs about
four miles west of Ardrossan on the south side of the Maitland
road for a distance of about two miles pretty plentifully, in
company of Mriostemon lepidotus and Halgania lavandulacea.
Helipterum heteranthum had algo hitherto been known from
W. Australia only ; it isa small plant and of rare occurrence.
Thysanotus exasperatus and Pterostylis barbata were only known
from one spot each in South Australia, the former from the
Flinders Range, the latter from near Mount Lofty; both
grow here in the scrub, near Yorke Valley, but scantily.
Swainsona laxa, R. Br., on the contrary, is an example of a
plant hitherto not known to occur so far westward. It is a
pretty plant, and has only been seen in the limestone gorge
formed by Rogue’s Gully in the Muloowurtie hills. Other
plants, the localities of which are mentioned as new by Baron
F. v. Mueller, are Dodonea hexandra, Melaleuca acuminata,
Goodenia albiflora, at Kalkabury; Aubiscus Wraye, at
Kilkerran ; Daviesia genistifolia, low ground on the Maitland
road ; Hydrocotyle capillaris, Didiscus eyanopetalus, Minuria
suedifolia (the last three small herbs), and Poa lepida, a small
but pretty grass and rather rare. Templetonia sulcata is,
besides, remarkable for its leafless, flattened, brittle, light
green branches. It occurs only on rich clay soil.

Of naturalised weeds 33 are enumerated as observed and
collected. Some of them are happily of rare occurrence as
yet; for example, Xanthiwm spinosum, the Bathurst burr, and
the common Scotch thistle, Onopordon Acanthiwm. Others form
good food for cattle, as Medicago denticulata (wild clover), and
Polygonum aviculare. In respect of afew I feel inclined to
consider them rather as cosmopolitan vagrants than as intro-
duced forms, having known them 30 years ago as plentiful as
now among the true native flora. That they have become more
conspicuous I think is greatly owing to the suppression of many
native forms through the browsing of cattle, the hardier plants
taking the place of the more delicate. The following are
adverted to, viz., Sonchus oleraceus, S. asper, Hypochoeris glabra,
and Geranium cicutarium among herbs; and Festuca bromoides,
the silver grass, among Graminee. Orobanche cernua I have
only met once, growing by the side of the road, Kilkerran, on
decaying vegetable debris and sandy soil. It is a small plant

C

34:

with pretty large blue flowers, and in its habitus resembles
some liliaceous herbs.

Jn conclusion it must be stated that the geological distribu-
tion of the plants has been described as hitherto observed.
Future observations may disclose reasons to alter the arrange-
ment in some instances. In this case and after accumulation
of further material, I shall feel happy in laying the results
before the Society.

NATIVE AND NATURALISED PLANTS,
ARDROSSAN, YORKE’S PENINSULA.

Collected by Orro Trprer, F.L.S., Corr. Member. Named
and arrangement revised by Baron F. von MvxEtier,
K.C.M.G., F.R.S., &c., Hon. Member.

[Read April 6, 1880.]

I—NATIVE PLANTS.
DICOTYLEDONS.
RANUNCULACED.
Clematis microphylla, De Candolle. G.
Ranuneulus parviflorus, Lene. P.
DILLENTIACES.
Hibbertia stricta, R. Brown. T.
PAPAVERACES.
Papaver aculeatum, Thunberg. Maitland road. P.
CRUCIFER.
Alvssum linifolium, Stephen. Coast.
Erysimum brevipes, #. JZ. Coast.
lasiocarpum, # IL G.
Stenopetalum lineare, #. Brown. Coast.
spherocarpum, #. JW. Coast.
‘Capsella elliptica, Meyer. Coast.
pilosula, #. If. Coast.
Lepidium monoplocoides, #. JZ. G.

PrrrosPORE®.

Pittosporum phillyreoides, De Candolle. G.
Bursaria spinosa, Cavanilles. G.

35

Billardiera cymosa, #1. P. Y. Valley scrub and Mait. rd.
var. sericophora, @ I. Coast. TT.
Cheiranthera linearis, 4. Cunningham. T.
DRosERACE®.
Drosera glanduligera, Lehmann. TT.
Menziesii, R. Brown. Coast and T. |
Whittakeri, Planchon. Kalkabury. P.

POLYGALED.
Comesperma volubile, Zabilladiere. G.
FRANKENTACE®.
Frankenia levis, Linné. Swamps. C.
PHYTOLACCER.
Didymotheea thesioides, J. Hooker. Kilkerran. T
CARYOPHYLL®.
Saponaria tubulosa, # JZ. Coast plain.
Sagina apetala, Arduino. P.
Spergularia rubra, Persoon. Coast, plain.
var. marginata. Kilkerran, west coast.
PORTULACED.

Claytonia calyptrata, # 1. G.
corrigiolacea, #. JZ. Coast.

FICOIDES. «
Mesembrianthemum equilaterale, Haworth. T. and P.

australe, Solander. G.
Tetragonia implexicoma, J. Hooker. Coast.

SALSOLACED.
Rhagodia Billardieri, R. Brown. Coast and T.
nutans, &. Brown. G.
spinescens, &. Brown.
var. deltophylla.
parabolica, R. Brown.
Chenopodium nitrariaceum, #. JZ. Coast.
microphyllum, TE Neg
carinatum, R. Brown. Swamp, Mangrove Point.
Atriplex paludosum, &. Brown. Swamp, Mangrove Point.
cinereum, Poiret. Coast.
prostratum, R. Brown. Ardrossan. Coast.
Enchylena tomentosa, R. Brown. Coast.
Kocehia villosa, Lindley y. Coast.
Salsola Kali, Linné.
oppositifolia, F. M. Swamp, Mangrove Point.
brevifolia, R. Brown. Coast.

36

Chenolea diasantha, # AZ. Coast.
enchylenoides, F. JL Coast.
Salicornia australis, Forster. Kilkerran, West Coast.
arbuscula, 2. Brown. Kilkerran, West Coast.
AMARANTACE®.
Ptilotus spathulatus, Potret. Open ground, G.

POLYGONACE.

Rumex Brownii, Campdera. Open ground, G.
Muchlenbeckia adpressa, Meissner. P.

3

MALvace.
Lavatera plebeia, Sims. Coast and T.
Plagianthus Berthe, # JZ Maitland road, P.
spicatus, Bentham. Muloowurtie, P., burnt soil.
Sida corrugata, Lindley. P.
Hibiscus Wraye, Lindley. Kalkerran, P.

STERCULIACE.®.
Lasiopcetalum discolor, Hooker. T.
Behru, # AZ. T. and P.
Baueri, Steetz. P.

Linea.
Linum marginale, A. Cunningham. G.

ZY GOPHYLLE®.
Nitraria Schoberi, Linné. Coast.
Zygophyllum fruticulosum, De Candolle. Coast.
Billardier1, De Candolle. Parara Mine, P.
ammophilum, / JZ. Coast.
elaucescens, # Af. Muloowurtie and Ardros. C.
erenatum, #. JZ. Coast and T.

GERANTIACE.®.
Geranium disseetum, Linne. G.
Hrodium cygnorum, Wees. G.
Pelargonium australe, Willdenow. G.
var. erodioides, Hooker. G,
Oxalis corniculata, Linné. G.

RUTacem.”
Boronia clavellifolia, “ Jf G.
Eriostemon lepidotus, Sprengel. Maitland road, P.
var. sediflora. *
capitatus, #. J. Maitland road.
Correa speciosa, Aton. G.
Geijera parviflora, Lindley. Coast.

airy

SAPINDACE Z.
Dodonea viscosa, Linné. T. and P.
bursarifolia, Behr and Mueller. T and P.
Baueri, Hndlicher. P.
hexandra, F. WM. T.
boroniefolia, G. Don. Yorke Valley, P.
humilis, Hndlicher. Maitland road, P
stenozyga, # 1. Parara Mine, P.
Heterodendron olewfolium, Desfont. Ardrossan, coast.

STACKHOUSIE.
Stackhousia linarifoha, Cunningham. Coast and T.

UrricEe.
Parietaria debilis, Forster. Coast and T.

EUPHORBIACEX
Euphorbia Drummondi, Boissier. Open low ground, G.
Poranthera microphylla, Bronguiart. Burnt ground, G.
Beyeria opaca, #. MZ. Coast and T.
Adriana quadripartita, Gawdichaud. Yorke Valley, P.

RHAMNACE.

Pomaderris obeordata, Fenz/. T.
racemosa, Hooker. G.
Spyridium leucophractum, FM. TY. and P.
eriocephalum, Fenzl. T. and P.
Cryptandra amara, Smith. T.
tomentosa, Lindley. TY.

LEGUMINOS®.
Daviesia genistifolia, 4. Cunn. Maitland rd., lowest ground, P.
Pultenea tenuifolia, R. Brown. Yorke Valley, P.
Kutaxia empetrifolia, Schlechtendal. G.
var. diffusa. Yorke Valley, P.
Templetonia suleata, Bentham. Maitland road, P.
Swainsona phacoides, Bentham. Coast.
laxa, R. Brown. Rogue’s Gully, Muloowurtie, P.
Glycine clandestina, Wendland. G.
Kennedya prostrata, R. Brown. Coast and T.
var. albiflora. Maitland, P.
monophylla, Ventenat. T. and P.
Lotus australis, Seringe. Coast.
var., Behriana. P hills.
Indigofera australis, Willd. Rogue’s Gully, Muloowurtie, P.
Cassia eremophila, A. Cunningham. T. and P.
heteroloba, Lindley. T.

38

Acacia spmescens, Bentham. T. and P.
hakeoides, Cunningham. Ardrossan. C. and T.
rigens, A. Cunningham. Maitland-road, P.
sclerophy lla, Lindley. G.

Osswaldi, FM. Coast.
notabilis, # 4. Yorke Valley, P.
salicina, Lindley. G.
longifoha, Haas T. and P.
r. Sophoree, 2. Brown.
Peachebottra: Bentham. Ardrossan, P.
microcarpa, & MZ. Yorke Vallev, swamp.
RosacE x.
Acena ovina, 4. Cunningham. Coast.
CRASSULACE.
Tillea macrantha, J. Hooker. Open ground, G.

purpurascens, J. Hooker. Open ground, G.
verticillaris, De Candolle. Kalkabury, P.

HALORAGER.
Haloragis tetragyna, R. Brown. Yorke Valley, P.
ceratophylla, Hndlicher. Maitland road, P.
LAURINES.
Cassytha melantha, R. Brown. G.

pubescens, #. Brown. G.
glabella, R. Brown. G.
MYRrrace.
Calycothrix tetragona, Labillardiere. TT.
Beckia crassifolia, Lindley. T. and P.
Callistemon coccineus, # J. Yorke Valley, P.
Melaleuca acuminata, #. J. G.
parviflora, Lendley. T.
uncinata, R. Brown. P.
ericifolia, Smith. Coast.
var. pustulata, J. Hooker.
Eucalyptus gracilis, # J. G.
uncinata, Turezaninow. P.
oleosa, Ff. MW. G.
odorata, Behr. P.
incrassata, Labill. Yorke Valley, clay-pans-
UMBELLIFERS.
Hydrocotyle callicarpa, Bunge. P., sandy ridge.
capillaris, F. JZ. Tee ahders ey
Didiscus eriocarpus, # JZ. P., . ef
cyanopetalus, F MW. P. «~

75

39

Apium prostratum, Labillardiere. Coast.
Daueus brachiatus, Sieber. G.

THYMELEX.
Pimelea glauca, R. Brown. G.
serpyllifolia, R. Brown. Coast and T.
eurviflora, R. Brown. Coast and T.
var. micrantha. T. and P.
phylicoides, Meissner. G.
octophylla, R. Brown. Kalkabury, P.

PROTEACED.
Grevillea ilicifolia, R. Brown. T. and P.
Huegelii, Aetssner. Coast and T.
Hakea rugosa, R. Brown. Coast and T.
flexulisec 7. iP.

LoRANTHACER.
Loranthus melaleuce, Lehm. On Melaleuca ericifolia. G.
linophyllus, Fenzl. Muloowurtie, P.
exocarpi, Behr. Yorke Valley, P.
SANTALACES.
Santalum acuminatum, De Candolle. G.
persicarium, # MM. TT. and P.
Choretrum glomeratum. #. Brown. Yorke Valley, P.
chrysanthum, # Jf. Yorke Valley, P.
Exocarpus cupressiformis, Labil/. Yorke Valley, P.
spartea, #. Brown. T. and P.
aphylla, R. Brown. G. Coast mainly and P.
RUBIACER®.
Opercularia varia, J. Hooker. G.
Asperula oligantha, # J. G.
Galium Gaudichaudi, De Candolle. G.
australe. De Cand. Muloowurtie, coast.

CoMPOSIT &.
Aster pannosus, #. 1. T. and P.
ramulosus, Labillardiere. T.
lepidophyllus, Persoon. G.
microphyllus, Ladil/. Yorke Valley.
Muelleri, Sonder. Coast and T.
teretifolius, Sonder.
pieridifolius, F. JZ. T. and P.
axillaris, # AZ. Coast
exul, Lindley. P., on burnt ground.
Hueselia, # 1 Tl and P-
elutescens, F. UW. 1.

40

Aster decurrens, De Candolle. Muloowurtie, coast, T.
subspicatus, # I. Yorke Valley, P.
Vittadinia australis, 4. Richard (four varieties). G.
Minuria leptophylla, De Oandolle. G.
Cunninghami, Bentham. Coast.
suedifolia, #. WZ. Kilkerran, sea-beach.
Calotis hispidula, # JL. Coast.
lappulacea, Bentham. Coast.
Lagenophora Billardieri, Cassini. P.
var. Huegeli.
Brachycome pachyptera, Turcz. Coast.
cilaris, Lessing. Coast, T.
eollina, Bentham. T. and P.
tenella, Turczaninow. Coast.
Elachanthus pusillus, # J/. Coast.
Myriocephalus rhizocephalus, Bentham. Kalkabury.
Calocephalus citreus, Lessing. Coast.
Brownu, #. WZ. Kilkerran, western coast.
Angianthus strictus, Bentham. 'T. and P.
tomentosus, Wendland. Coast.
lsoetopsis graminifolia, Turcz. Coast.
Gnephosis skirrophora, Bentham. Burnt ground, G.
Gnaphalodes uliginosum, 4. Gray. G.
Craspedia Richea, Cassini. Coast and T.
Cassinia levis, R. Brown. T. and P.
arcuata, R. Brown. Ardrossan, T. and C.
aculeata, R. Brown. Muloowurtie, coast.
Humea cassiniacea, F. JZ. Maitland road, P.
Toxanthus perpusillus, Turcz. G.
Rutidosis Pumilo, Bentham. Coast.
Millotia tenuifolia, Cassint. G.
Athrixia tenella, Bentham. Coast.
Podotheea angustifolia, Cassini. Coast and roadsides, G.
Podolepis acuminata, R. Brown. Coast and T.
canescens, A. Cumningham. T. and P.
rugata, Labillardiere. P.
Lessoni, Bentham. Coast.
Leptorrhynchus pulchellus, # JZ. G. open ground.
squamatus, Lessing. Coast and T.
medius, Cunningham. P.
elongatus, De Candolle. T. and P.
Waitzia, Sonder. P.
Helichrysum Baxteri, 4. Cunningham. P.
lucidum, Haeckel. Maitland road. P.
leucopsidium, De Candolle. G.
retusum, #7. WM. T. and P.
apiculatum, De Candolle. G.

41

Helichrysum semipapposum, De Candolle. G.
Helipterum floribundum, De Candolle. P.
var. Stuartiana, Sonder and Mueller.
hyalsopermum, #. JZ. Coast.
corymbiflorum, Schlechtendal. T. and P.
pygmeum, #. Jf. Coast.
exiguum, #. AZ. Coast.
dimorpholepis, Bentham. T. and P. (hills.)
heteranthum, Twrez. Coast.
Gnaphalium Japonicum, Thumberg. G. on open ground.
indutum, Hooker. G. on open ground.
Stuartiana Muelleri, Sonder. P. burnt ground.
Erechthites quadridentata, De Candolle. G.
hispidula, De Candolle. Yorke Valley, swamp.
pieridioides, Zurez. Coast and T.
Senecio lautus, Forster. Coast.
brachyglossus, fF. WZ. G.
Cunninghami, De Cand. Coast.
Cymbonotus Lawsonianus, Gaudichaud. Coast and P. (G.)
Microseris Forsteri, J. Hooker. Coast.

SPTYLIDIE®.
Leeuwenheekia dubia, Souder. Coast.

GOODENOVIE®.

Velleia paradoxa, R. Brown. G. open ground.
Goodenia ovata, Smith. T. and P.

geniculata, #. Brown. G.

albiflora, Schlechtendal, Kalkabury. P.

eycloptera, R. Brown. Coast.

pinnatifida, Schlechtendal. Coast and P.
Sczvola spinescens, 2. Brown. G.

crassifolia, Zabill. Kilkerran and Muloowurtie, coast.

Dampiera rosmarinifolia, Schlechtendal. G.

CAMPANULACE®.
Wahlenbergia gracilis, 4. De Candolle. G.
var. quadrifida. Maitland road, P.
Lobelia microsperma, F. 1. Ardrossan, G.
EPACRIDE®.
Styphelia ovalifolia, R. Brown. T.
cordifolia, F MW. P.

humifusa, Labillardiere. YT. and P.
patula, R. Brown. Coast and T.

PRIMULACES.
Samolus repens, Persoon. Salt Marsh, Mangrove Point.

42

APOCYNE®.
Alyxia buxifolia, R. Brown. Coast.
LOGANIACE®.
Logania ovata, R. Brown. P.
linifolia, Schlechtendal. P.
GENTIANED.
Sebea ovata, R. Brown. Coast.
Hrythrea australis, R. Brown. G.
PLANTAGINE®.
Plantago varia, R. Brown. G.

BoraGInE.™.
Halgania lavandulacea, Endlicher. Maitland road, P.
cyanea, Lindley. Yorke Valley, P.
Myosotis australis, R. Brown. Yorke Valley, T. and P.
Cynoglossum suaveolens, #. Brown. Yorke Valley, T. and P.
Eritrichium australasicum, 4. De Candolle. Coast.
Echinospermum concayum, #. JZ. Coast.

CoNVOLVULACE®.
Convulvulus erubescens, Sims. Coast and T.
Wilsonia rotundifolia, Hooker. Yorke Valley, swamp.

SOLANACE.
Lycium australe, # MZ. Coast.
Solanum simile, & JZ. T. and P.
fasciculatum, #. WZ. T. and coast; burnt ground
Nicotiana suaveolens, Lehmann. Coast and P. (G.)

SCROPHULARINE.

Veronica calycina, Rk. Brown. Yorke Valley, P.
Kuphrasia Brown, # J. P.

Myoporin®.
Myoporum parvifolium, &. Brown. Coast.
deserti, A. Cunningham. Maitland road, P.
viscosum, Rk. Brown P.
insulare, R. Brown. Coast,
platycarpum, &. Brown. P.
Eremophila longifoha, # JZ. Coast.
Brownii, #. JZ. Coast and T.
re var. tomentosa. Kalkabury, P.
Behriana, F. J.

VERBENACED.
Avicennia officinalis, Zinné. Swamp, Mangrove Point.

45

LABiIat”.
Mentha saturejoides, R. Brown. Yorke Valley, T. and P-
Prostanthera coccinea, F. WM. T. and P.
Westringia rigida, R. Brown. G.
Teucrium sessiliflorum, Bentham. Coast and T.
racemosum, &. Brown. P.

CASUARINED.

Casuarina distyla, Ventenat. P.
quadrivalvis, Labillard. Coast and P. (G.)

ConIFER®.
Frenela verrucosa, JZtirbel. T. and P.

MONOCOTYLEDONS.

HYDROCHARIDER.
Halophila ovalis, Gaudichaud. C. submarine.
ORCHIDE®.
Thelymitra longifolia, Forster. G.
antennifera, J. Hooker. P.
Diuris palustris, Lindley. Coast and T.
pedunculata, &. Brown. Coast and T.
Prasophyllum patens, R. Brown. G.
Tepperi, # JL. (spec. nov.). T. and P.
Microtis porrifoha, &. Brown. Coast and T.
Pterostylis reflexa, R. Brown. T.
barbata, Lindley. Yorke Valley, P.
mutica, &. Brown. T.
longifolia, R. Brown. Coast and T.
ruta, R. Brown. ,
var. Mitchell, Lindley. G., open g.
Eriochilus autumnalis, R. Brown.
Cyrtostylis reniformis, R. Brown. Yorke Valley, P.
Caladenia Patersoni, R. Brown. G., open ground.
latifolia, R. Brown. Yorke Valley, P.
deformis, R. Brown. Coast and T.
Glossodia major, R. Brown. P.
AMARYLLIDE®.
Hypoxis glabella, R. Brown. G. open ground.
Calostemma purpureum, R. Brown.
LInIAcEz.

Thysanotus Patersoni, R. Brown Coast and T.
exasperatus, #. WZ. Yorke Valley, P.
Arthropodium minus, Rk. Brown. G.
strictum, RP. Brown. Coast.

A

Bulbine bulbosa, Haworth. Coast and T.
semibarbata, Haworth. Yorke Valley, P.

Wurmbsea diotia, F WZ. G.

Burchardia umbellata, R. Brown.

Dianella revoluta, R. Brown. G.

XEROTIDED.
Xerotes glauca, R. Brown. G.
leucocephala, R. Brown. Tiddy Widdy, coast.
effusa, Lindley. Coast and T.
dura, F. MW. Coast.

JUNCACEE
Juneus pallidus, #. Rrown. Yorke Valley.
bufonius, Zinné. Yorke Valley.

NAJADED.
Triglochin centrocarpa, Hooker. Coast.
Cymodocea antarctica, Hndlicher. C. submarine.
Zostera nana, Mertens. C. submarine.
Posidona australis, J. Hooker. C. submarine

CYPERACE.
Scirpus cartilagineus, Sprengel. G., prefers burnt ground.
nodosus, Rottboell. Sand dunes, coast.
Cladium lanigerum, &. Brown. G.
deustum, Rk. Brown. Coast, Muloowurtie, and P.
Lepidosperma gladiatum, Labillardiere. Kailkerran, coast
Chorisandra enodis, Nees. Yorke Valley, swamp.

GRAMINER.
Spinifex hirsutus, Labillardiere. Coast, sandy beach.
Anthisteria ciliata, Linné. T. and P.
Aristida Behriana, # MW. Yorke Vailey. ;
Stipa semibarbata, #&. Brown. T. and P., burnt ground.
elegantissima, Labillardiere. Coast and T.
scabra, Lindley. G.
erinita, Gaudichaud. G.
aristiglumis, A. J. Coast and T.
Dichelachne erinita, J. Hooker. T. ,
Agrostis Solandri, F. J. G.
Danthonia penicillata, # IZ. G.
Poa cespitosa, Forster. G.
lepida, F. WZ. Coast.
Festuca irritans, #. I. (Porcupine grass). Kailkerran, T.
Agropyrum scabrum, Beawvois. :
Distichlis maritima, Rafinesque. Coast, beach.
Bromus arenarius, Labillardiere. G.

45

Neurachne alopecuroides, #. Brown. T. and P.
Amphipogon strictus, R. Brown. Coast and 1’.
Lepturus incurvatus, Zrinius. G.

ACOTYLEDONS.
FInIces.
Ophioglossum v ulgatum, Zinné. Coast.

Cheilanthes ‘vennna fenleey Sie tze AG
Grammitis rutifolia, R. Brown. P.

IJ—NATURALISED PLANTS.
Capsella bursa-pastoris, Moench. Crucifere
Lepidium ruderale, Linne. os
Senebiera didyma, Persoon. <
Silene gallica, Linné. Caryophyllee.
Cerastium vulgatum, Linné. “
Stellaria media, V7llars.
Polygonum aviculare, Linné. Polygonacee.
Malva rotundifolia, Linné. Malvacee.
Erodium cicutarium, L’ Heretier. Geraniaece.
Medicago denticulata, Leguminose.
Melilotus parviflora, Des. i
Urtica urens, Z. Urtices.
Cucumis myriocarpa, Naudin. Cucurbitacee
Erigeron linifolius, Willdenow. Composite.
Anthemis Cotula, Linné. es

cs

Gnaphalium luteo-album, Zinneé. <4
Hypocheris glabra, Linne.
Picris Rieraciaides)| Linné. ‘

Sonchus oleraceus, Linné.
var, asper, Linne.

Centaurea melitensis, Z. cc
Silybum Marianum, Gaertner.
Xanthium spinosum, L. ie

Cryptostemma calandulaceum, R. Brown. Composite.
Anagallis arvensis, var. cerula, £. Primulacee.
Plantago coronopus, L. Plantaginer.

Lithospermum aryense, Z. Boraginece.

Solanum nigrum, Z. Solanacecz.

Orobanche cernua, Loeffling. Orobanchacese
Chenopodium murale, ZL. Salsolacee.

Poa annua, Z. Graminecz.
rigida, L. v
Mestuca bromoides, L : i

Keeleria phleoides, Persoon,
Hordeum murinum, ZL. ef

A CENSUS OF THE

INDIGENOUS FLOWERING PLANTS AND
FERNS

OF EXTRA-TROPICAL SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By Proressor Rate Tart, Assoc. Lin. Soc., F.G.8., &e.,
President.

|Read February 3, 1880.]

Introductory and Explanatory Remarks—I\n 1875 there
appeared Dr. Schomburgk’s “ Flora of South Australia,” in
which is included a catalogue of the flowering plants and
ferns of South Australia, mostly compiled from the “ Flora
Australiensis,’ vols. 1 to 6. Since then vol. 7 of that
work has been published, and numerous additions to the
flora of this province have been made by Messrs. Giles,
Tietkins, Young, Tepper, Kempe, Mrs. Richards, and others.
These accessions, as well as the necessary corrections to
Dr. Schomburgk’s list, render a revised census much to be
desired. Despite the imperfections of my list, yet I believe
it will be exceedingly useful as furnishing a good basis
for further additions. Jt is one to be improved upon, and
some years hence, when the inland vegetation will have become
exhaustively known and the geographical range of the larger
number of our indigenous plants better defined, a new edition
will be required.

The present census is compiled from the ‘‘ Flora Austra-
hensis”’ by Mr. Bentham, and from the “ Fragmenta Phyto-
eraphie” and other works, by Baron F. von Mueller, and from
manuscript notes kindly communicated by the latter gentleman.
It contains the names of all indigenous flowering plants and
ferns and their immediate allies authentically known to occur
in the extra-tropical part of this colony. The undoubted
alien species are omitted, and may at some future time form a
supplementary list to be published under the auspices of this
Society.

The list has been revised by Baron F. von Mueller, and the
ordinal arrangement and nomenclature are for the most part
in accord with that gentleman’s matured researches. As the
sequence of the orders is materially different from that followed

47

inthe “ Flora Australiensis,’’ I have affixed to each ordinal name
the number of the volume of that work dealing with that,
particular order of plants. And following the name of the
species is a reference to the page of the “ Flora Australiensis ”
on which its diagnosis will be found. The references to species
not contained in the “Flora Australiensis” are to Baron
Mueller’s “ Fragmenta Phytographie,” thus :—Menkea sphero-
carpa, E.M.; Frag. VIII., 228, is described on page 223 of
volume VIII. of that work, the authority for the name being
Ferdinand Mueller.

To give some idea of the distribution of the constituents of
the flora of extra-tropical South Australia, that part of the
province is divided into the following regions and districts :—

Recion C, ok tHe Crntrran AvUsTRALIAN ReE@ron, which
embraces the country north of a line from the Head of the
Great Australian Bight following eastward the line referred
to in the 11th Schedule of Crown Lands Act of 1877, extending
southward so as to include Lake Gilles, and sweeping round
the east side of Lake Torrens, thence to the west side of Lake
Frome, and southward to the latitude of Menindie (about 32
degrees).

This region probably admits of division into (a) Desert and (4)
Central Australian ; the latter division embracing the elevated
country of the Musgrave, MacDonnell’s and other ranges,
which extend in a general east and west direction in the north-
west central parts of the colony. Constituting a part of the
same region, by its geological and botanical features, is the
narrow strip of hill country traversed by the transcontinental
telegraph line between the head of Lake Torrens and the
Tropic of Capricorn.

By such division the desert region embraces the vast Tertiary
plains and deserts; whilst the Central Australian region is
comprised of more elevated land of Paleozoic age.

Though the Central Australian subregion verges on the
tropics, yet its flora is of the Desert type, somewhat modified
by the presence of a few families and genera which herein
reach their southern limits.

Region C is characterised by the large proportion of
Cruciters, Zygophyllee, Malvacez, Sterculiaceze, Euphorbiacee,
Amarantacese, Chenopodiacee, Portulacee, Ficoidex, Gooden-
oviex, Solanacee, Verbenacee, Myoporinee, and Grasses. The
only representatives in South Australia proper of Capparids,
Hlatinez, Cycads, and Palms are here met with. The following
important orders, so characteristic of Region 8, or the South
Australian region, are either absent or poorly represented :—
Pittosporee, Droseracez, Caryophyllacee, Rhamnacee, Epac-
ridex, Orchidacee, Liliacex, and Juncacee.

48

Reaton M, or tee Murray Deserr.—This region is the
southerly extension of the eastern section of the Central
Australian Region. It may be defined as the whole of the
country (exclusive of Region E) to the east of the Adelaide
chain, and its N.E. extension towards the Barrier Ranges. Its
physical features are very pronounced, for whilst the region to
the west is occupied by elevated ground of Paleozoic age, the
Murray Desert is a plain constituted of Tertiary rocks. Like
that of the Central Australian Region, the rainfall is absolutely
small.

The geophilous florula of this region, excepting the exclu-
sively maritime species, is of the same type as that of Region
C, though it possesses fewer restricted species. The fluviatile
and paludinal species of the River Murray, which receives little
or no drainage in its passage through this region, assimilate
the vegetation of the Murray Region to that of Region Sc.

Reeton E, or that of the South-East, beg the extreme
south-east corner of this colony, centred about the volcanic
area of Mount Gambier. To the Rev. J. E. Tenison Woods,
F.L.S., &c., my obligations are due for the use of a MS. list of
plants observed by him in the South-East district of this colony
between the years 1857 and 1867. It contains the names of
over 200 species hitherto unrecorded for that part of South
Australia. Baron F. von Mueller is the authority for nearly
all of them. Its vegetation has the general characteristic of
that of Region S ¢, and is mainly distinguished from it by the
possession of species which here reach their western limit. The
sole representative in South Australia of the order Capri-
foliacee occurs in this region. The northern boundary line of
the region must be somewhat south of the railroad connecting
Kingston and Narracoorte.

Recton S, or the Sourn Avstrratian RecGron, embraces the
rest of the province. It may be divided into the following
districts :—

a. The country to the north of the head of St. Vincent’s Gulf.

6. Eyre’s Peninsula, and westward to the head of the Great
Australian Bight, south of the south-western boundary of
Region C.

ce. The country south of District a, east of St. Vincent’s Gulf,
and on the east limited by the Murray Desert.

d. Yorke’s Peninsula.

k. Kangaroo Island

The prominent botanical features of Region S have been
referred to under Region C.

Note.—The capital and small letters in the columns indi-
cating the distribution of a species are correspondingly those
of the regions and districts used in the foregoing paragraphs.

49

The letters enclosed in brackets indicate that the species are
of modern introduction into the districts denoted by such
letters.

The following table represents the number of species in-
habitine each region, and the number of species restricted to
each :—

| ‘ ran ri of ai 4 é Ey, 7 par
WC aE ton, | SiN Gal O eG Was ate
|
| | ak ik Gee
Total number of species... .. 688 |550 455 9 267 |382 643 381 154
Number of restricted species.. |355 | 81 124 2 25 | 31 | 96), 9.) 13
and marked varieties..| 3/ 3) 2/ 4)—/ 1/ 3/ 2) 4

The high percentage of restricted species inhabiting each
region seems to justify that botanical division of the province
which has herein been established. ' Nevertheless, the above
figures may not represent the whole truth; thus the small
number of species catalogued for the Regions M and E includes,
perhaps, only the less common forms; and if the real numerical
strength of each were known, doubtlessly the total of peculiar
species in the adjoining regions might be much reduced, though
the number of restricted species in Regions M and E would
not be materially altered. The same remarks will also apply
to the districts of Region 8. It should be remembered that
the boundaries of the regions and districts are not rigidly
defined, as such can only be laid down after an exhaustive inquiry
into the climatological, botanical, and geological features of
each division And at the same time, that in a first attempt of
the kind, it has not always been easy to find the geographic
columns for each species, more particularly because one region
must overlap or pass gradually into another.

Dr. Schomburgk’s list of extra-tropical plants gives the
names of 1,214 species; but the number is reducible to 1,074
by exclusion of certain introduced species and others not
known to belong to extra-tropical South Australia, and by
suppression of names not of specific value. Some species have
wrongly assigned to them a South Australian habitus in the
Flora Australiensis, by reason of certain Victorian localities
being quoted for this colony. Baron von Mueller has con-
siderably reduced the number of species recognised by Mr.
Bentham, but whether the results obtained are in accordance
with or opposed to the teachings of the living plants is a
question that each botanist must endeavour to answer for him-
self, as the plan of the present work does not admit of a dis-
cussion of the many questions raised by them.

50

The result’ of the present compilation, so far as numbers
are concerned, is as follows :-—

Orders. Genera. Species.

1. Dicotyledones ... epee 360 1,230
2. Monocotyledonex ple 112 321
3. Acotyledonee ... oe tes 18 31
98 490 1,582

The most prominent orders by the number of their species
are—
Ratio of Species

No. of Species. No. of Genera. to Genera as 1.

1. Composite ... 200 53 37
2. Leguminose ... 165 34 4°8
3. Graminee ... Webi 4.0 37
4, Chenopodiaces 72 12 6

5. Cyperacee... 69 I 6:3
6. Myrtacee ... 65 11 59

In a subordinate rank—

7. Orchidacee ... AT Wa 27
8. Goodenovier ... 40 8 5

9. Myoporinee ... 39 2 19°5
10. Malvacee _... 34 8 42
11. Crucifere ... 33 10 33
12. Proteacee ... 32 8 4

The figures in the third column represent in an inverse
sequence the prominence of the natural orders in respect to
morphological variety ; Orchidacez heading the list and Myo-
porinez closing it.

DICOTYLEDONEZ. | |
RanuncuLaces (Fl. Aust., vol. 1.) |

Clematis aristata, R. Brown; 6 E
microphylla, De Cand.; 7 E
Myosurus minimus, Line; 8 E
Ranunculus aquatilis, Lanne; 10 |M|
lappaceus, Sith; 12 E

rivularis, Banks; 18 ME

parviflorus, Linné; 14 Cc

Sy ey is SS

DInnENIACEs (FI. Aust., vol. I.)

Hibbertia densiflora, F. J.; 26 i c
stricta, R. Brown; 27 iM| |a@|ble\d
Billardieri, #. 1; 28 \Ela

51

Hibbertia acicularis, #” IL; 29
fasciculata, R. Brown; 33
virgata, R. Brown; 34
glaberrima, / J/.; 39

Lavrine® (FI. Aust., vol. V.)

Cassytha glabella, R. Brown; 309
pubescens, 2. Brown; 310
melantha, R. Brown; 311

PaPAVERACES® (FI. Aust., vol. I.)
Papaver aculeatum, Thunb.; 68

CruciFeR® (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)

Nasturtium terrestre, R. Brown; 65
Cardamine laciniata, /. J2.; 69
hirsuta, Linné; 70
eustylis, # Jf; 71
Alyssum mininum, Pallas; 71
Sisymbrium filifolium, / J; 74
trisectum, F. JZ; 74
nasturtioides, # d/.; 74
cardaminoides, F. J.; 7
Erysimum curvipes, #. 2; 75
brevipes, #. JL, 75
lasiocarpum, & A.; 76
Blennodia, &. A.; 76
Richardsi, #. J.; Frag. x., 105 |
Stenopetalum velutinum, #. JZ; 78
lineare, 2. Brown; 78
spherocarpum, /. J/.; 78
nutans, # W.; 79
Menkea spherocarpa, #. JZ; Frag. viii., 223)
australis, Lehmann; 80
Capsella elliptica, Meyer; 81
pilosula, # J2.; 82
humistrata, # M.; Frag. xi., 25
cochlearina, / J/.; 88
Drummond, &. J/.; 88
Geococcus pusillus, Drummond; 80
Lepidium strongylophyllum, /. J/.; 84
leptopetalum, & MZ.; 84:
phlebopetalum, F. Jf; 85
monoplocoides, #. A/.; 85
papillosum, &. A; 86
folosum, Desv.; 86

5

ruderale, Linné; 86

a

a
a

Ss)

Soa oan

S

d|

d

d

52

CapparipDE®s (FI. Aust., vol. 1.)
Capparis Mitchell, Smzth ; 96
Cleome viscosa, Linné ; 90

Viotace® (FI. Aust., vol. I.)

Viola betonicefolia, Smith; 99
hederacea, Labill.; 99
Hybanthus floribundus, # J2.; 102
aurantiacus, #7. AZ.; 102

Droseraces (Fl. Aust., vol. IT.)

Drosera Indica, Linnéd; 456
glanduligera, Lehm.; 457
pygmea, De Cand.; 457
Burmanni, Vahl.; 459
spathulata, Labzll.; 459
binata, Zabzll,; 461
Whittakeri, Planchon ; 462
auriculata, Backh.; 465
peltata, Smith ; 465
Menziesi, R. Brown ; 468

Prrrosrore® (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)

Pittosporum phillyreoides, De Cand.; 112.

Bursaria spinosa, Cav.; 115 |

Marianthus bignoniaceus, #. d/.; 118

Billardiera longiflora, Zabill.; 123

scandens, Smith; 128
cymosa, Ff. Mf.; 124
Cheiranthera linearis, A. Cunn.; 127
volubilis, Benth.; 128

PotyeaLEeHx (FI. Aust., vol. I.)
Comesperma scoparium, Steetz; 143
volubile, Labill.; 144
sylvestre, Lindley ; 146
calymega, Labill.; 147
polygaloides, # Jf; 149

TREMANDRES (FI. Aust., vol. I.)

Tetratheca ciliata, Lindley ; 130
var. ericitolia, Smeth; 131
pilosa, Labill.; 131

STERCULIACE® (FI. Aust., vol. 1.)

Gilesia binifolia, # Jf; Frag. ix., 42

C

C

C

M

M

M

M)

a

a

a

k

k

Melhania ineana, Heyne ; 234
Waltheria Indica, Linné; 236
Commersonia magniflora, 7. I; Frag. x., 22
loxophylla, #7 AL; 240
Seringea nephrosperma, / J/.; 246
Hookeriana, Walp.; 246
integrifoha, # JL.; 247
Thomasia petalocalyx, FM, ; 255
Lasiopetalum discolor, Hooker ; 260
Behrii, F Ail 261
Baueri, Steetz ; 263
Schulzeni, IR I; 265
Brachychiton Gregori, #. M.; Frag. iv., 137

Matvacem (FI. Aust., vol. I.)

Lavatera plebeia, Smith ; 185
Malvastrum spicatum, A. Gray y; 187
Plagianthus spicatus, Benth.; 189
glomeratus, Benth. © IG)
microphyllus, #. J; 190
Berthe, # M.; Frag. v., 1038
Sida corrugata, Lindley ; 192
cardiophylla, #. AZ; Frag. viii., 242
intricata, # Af.; 193
virgata, Hooker; 194
eryphiopetala, #. JL; 194
petrophila, # Jf; 194
calyxhymenia, Gay; 194
iclusa, Bentham; 197
Howittia trilocularis, F. Jf.; 198
Abutilon tubulosum, 4. Cunn.; 200
leucopetalum, F. J.; 200
Mitchelli, Benth.; 201
macrum, /. Jf; Frag. ix., 59
otocarpum, &. MZ.; 202
Avicenne, Gaerti.; 203
Fraseri, Hooker; 205
diplotrichum, F. IZ.; 205
Hibiscus trionum, Zinné; 210
brachysiphonius, &. I.; 210
microchlenus, F. I; 211
Pinonianus, Gaud.; 211
Krichaufianus, & Jf.; 216
Sturtii, Hooker; 216
Wrayz, Lind.; 217; Frag. ix., 128
Farragei, F. Mi: Frag. Vill., 94]
hakeifolius, Giord.; 220

a

CORO O TOR OeORane

M

M

M

E|

a
a

a
a

I~)

b
ble

ad

54:

Gossypium Sturtii, #7. Af; 222
australe, #, A.; 220
Evurnorsrace® (Il. Aust., vol. VI.)
> Euphorbia australis, Botss.; 48
Drummondi, Boiss.; 49
Wheeleri, Baill.; 49
eremophila, 4A. Cunn.; 52
Poranthera ericoides, Klotzsch; 55
microphylla, Brong.; 56
Pseudanthus micranthus, Benth.; 59
Beyeria viscosa, Jiq., var. opaca; 65
var. uneinata; 65
Ricinocarpus pinifolius, Desf; 70
Bertya Cunninghami, Planchon; 75
oleifolia, Planchon; 76
rotundifolia, #. J/.; 7
Monotaxis luteiflora, #. I; Frag. x., 51
Amperea spartioides, Brong.; 84
Phyllanthus calycinus, Labill.; 105
Fuernrohri, F. J; 107
trachspermus, F#. JZ.; 108
lacunarius, #. JZ; 108
thymoides, Sieb.; 109
Gunnii, Hooker; 110
Adriana tomentosa, Sand.; 134
quadripartita, Gaud.; 135

Urricace® (Fl. Aust., vol. VI.)

Ficus platypoda, A. Cunn.; 169
orbicularis, A. Cunn.; 175
Parietaria debilis, G. Forst.; 188

Sapinpacez (FI. Aust., vol. L.)

Diplopeltis Stuarti, # 1.; 456
Atalaya hemiglauca, #. J2.; 463
Heterodendron oleifolium, F. A; 469
Dodonea petiolaris, #. 1; 475
viscosa, Linné; 475
var. attenuata; 477
procumbens, #. 1; 478
lobulata, F. JL; 479

bursarifolia, Behr and &. J.; 482

Baueri, Hndlicher; 482
hexandra, # JZ; 488
humilis, Hndlicher; 485
boroniefolia, G. Don; 485

C

M
M

M

M
M

| @

a

~~!

a a 8

d
d

d

d

NAAR

k

k

55

Dodonea stenozyga, # AL; 486

microzyga, F. M.; rae. ix., 86

Hyrrricinem (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)
Hypericum Japonicum, Thunb.; 182

Eratinem (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)
Elatine Americana, Arnott; 178

Titracrem® (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)
Corchorus sidoides, / AZ. 278

Linem (FI. Aust., vol. I.)
Linum marginale, 4. Cunn.; 288

GERANIACE® (Fl. Aust., vol. [.)

Geranium dissectum, Linné; 296
Erodium eygnorum, Vees; 297
Pelargonium australe, Willd.; 298
var. erodioides, Hook.
Rodneyanum, Lind.; 299
Oxalis corniculata, Linné; 301

ZYGOPHYLLE® (FI. Aust., vol. T.)

Tribulus terrestris, Linné; 288
hystrix, &. Brown; 289
Zygophyllum apiculatum, #. AL.; 292
glaucescens, #. JZ.; 293
erenatum, F. 12; 2938
iodocarpum, | JZ; 293

prismatothecum, Ff. AZ.; 298
Billardieri, De Cand.; 298

var. bilobum

fruticulosum, De Cand.; 294.
ammophilum, #. JZ.; Fr. xi.,28

Nitraria Schoberi, Linné; 291

Ruracez (Fl. Aust., vol. 1.)

Zieria veronicea, # AL; 305

Boronia Edwardsi, Benth.; 312
pinnata, Smith; 318
cerulescens, F. M.; 320
polygalifolia, Smith; 320
fiifolia, # M.; 325
clavellifolia, #. J2.; 325

Eriostemon obovalis, A. Cunn.; 334

linearis, A. Cunn.; 334

C

C

M

M

BE

|B

RSegeegees

a

a

| @

Qo n

a

S

a ©

d

d

56

Eriostemon difformis, A. Cunn.; 385
var. (2) teretifolius
pungens, Lind.; 388
Hillebrandi, #. J/.; 340
brachyphyllus, # JZ; 341
lepidotus, Spreng.; 342
eapitatus, # M.; 346
Correa emula, Ff. AZ.; 353
alba, Andr.; 354
speciosa, A7t.; 354
decumbens, F. J/.; 356
Geijera salicifolia, Schott.; 364

Meriacem (FI. Aust., vol. I.)
Owenia acidula, #. AZ; 385

FRaANKENIACED® (FI). Aust., vol. I.)
Frankenia pauciflora, De Cand.; 151

Prytoraccace® (FI. Aust., vol. V.)

Didymotheca thesioides, Hooker; 145
pleiococea, F. JZ; 146

Gyrostemon ramulosus, Desf:; 147

Codonocarpus pyramidalis, # JZ; 148
cotinifolius, Ff. J; 148

CaRYOPHYLLEE® (FI. Aust., vol. I.)

Saponaria tubulosa, # JZ; 155
Stellaria pungens, Brong.; 157
glauca, Withering; 158
cespitosa, J. Hooker; 158
multiflora, Hooker; 159
Sagina procumbens, Linné; 160
apetala, Linné; 160
Colobanthus Billardieri, Fenzl; 161
Spergularia rubra, Linné; 161
var. marina
Polyearpon tetraphyllum, Linné; 1638
Polycarpzea synandra, F. J.; 165
corymbosa, Lam.; 166
Scleranthus pungens, 2. Brown; vol. v.,

Portunace® (FI. Aust., vol. L.)

Portulaca oleracea, Linné; 169
filifolia, F. J2.; 169
Claytonia Balonnensis, Lindley; 172
polyandra, Hooker; 172

C

C

Cc
C

260

Cc,

M

re) fre ©)

M

M

)| M

M

M

M

M

a

a

1b

a oa

d

d

d

h
kh

57

Claytonia pleiopetala, #. 7; Frag. x., 70

pusilla, Lind.; 174

volubilis, Benth.; 174
brevipedata, #. 1.; Frag. x., 69
calyptrata, Hooker ; 174:
pumila, # MW; (Frag. x., 68] 175
corrigiolacea, F. M.; 175
pygmnea, F. I; 176
ptychosperma, /. IZ.; Frag. x.,70
Australasica, J. Hooker; 177

Q

Amarantace® (Fl, Aust., vol. V.)

Polyenemum pentandrum, / MZ; 211
diandrum, #. J/.; 211
mesembryanthemum, / AZ; F. yii1., 38
Euxolus Mitchelli, #. J; 214
Ptilotus obovatus, F. A; 220
alopecuroideus, #7. I/.; 224
nobilis, F. AL: 224
macrocephalus, Povret; 225
hemisteirus, F’. J/.; 226
exaltatus, Nees; 227
Beckeri, &/. W.; 228
gomphrenoides, Ff. AZ.; 229
erubescens, Schlecht ; 230
helipteroides, #’. J/.; 231
spathulatus, Pozret; 236
leucocomus, I’. J/.; 238
Hood, F. W.; Frag. viii., 2382
parvifolius, #7. A.; 241
Murrayi, &. I; 243
latitolius, R. Brown; 244
Alternanthera triandra, Lamarck ; 249
sessilis, R. Brown; 249

CuENopoDIAcE® (Fl. Aust., vol. V.)
Rhagodia Billardieri, R. Brown ; 152
parabolica, R. Brown; 153
Gaudichaudiana, Jog.; 154
crassifolia, R. Brown; 154
spinescens, &. Brown; 155

Ae ee © Ce) &

SS

var. deltophylla
nutans, Rk. Brown; 156

Chenopodium nitrariaceum, F. J; 158

microphyllum, F. J/.; 161
elaucum, Linné; 161
earinatum, R. Brown; 162

BREESE

S

ad
ad

58

Chenopodium pumilio, 2. Brown; 1638 |
eristatum, I’. W7,; 163 c\m| |a@|6 |
atriplicinum, /’. JZ; 168 c|M| |a@ |

Dysphania plantaginella, F’. 4Z.; 164 C |

littoralis, R. Brown; 164 C | M|

myriocephala, Benth.; 165 M

Atriplex stipitatum, Benth.; 168 C|M| |a@
paludosum, #. Brown; 169 b\c\d\k
var. appendiculatum (sill) ;

nummularium, Zind.; 170 C|M
cinereum, Poiret; 171 mM Ela|bleldlk
rhagodioides, /”. JZ; 172 M|
inerassatum, /’. MW.; 172 Cc
vesicarium, Heward; 172 C|M| |@
velutinellum, J”. M.; 174 Cilia
fissivalve, F. M.; Frag.ix., 123 |ce| |
angulatum, Benth.; 174 M| |a@
semibaccatum, 2. Brown; 175 c
Muelleri, Benth.; 175 C | M| d
prostratum, &. Brown; 176 k
microcarpum, Benth.; 176 d
pumilio, &. Brown; 176 | b| |\d
leptocarpum, F’. M.; 178 M
halimoides, Zind.; 178 cla) | ald
holocarpum, fF’. M.; 179 Gi |
spongiosum, /’. M.; 179 c|M

Enchylena tomentosa, Ah. Brown; 181 ‘lc |M a|ble\d

Chenolea enchylenoides, F. J; 182 e\d

Dallachyana, Benth.; 191 M

tricornis, Benth.; 191 M
sclerolenoides, #’. M.; 192 c|M, |a@
uniflora, F’. M.; 194 b
diacantha, F’. M.; 194 c|M ble|d
bicornis, F. M.; 195 Cc

biflora, #’. 7.; 196 c|M b
paradoxa, #. M.; 196 M c
tricuspis, # d2.; 200 c|M b
bicuspis, &. JZ.; 200 c a
quinquecuspis, #. dJZ.; 199 M
echinopsila, # JZ; 201 C|M
salsuginosa, # J; 197 M

Threlkeldia diffusa, R. Brown; 197 c

Babbagia dipterocarpa, # dZ.; 192 c

Kochia fimbriolata, # I; Frag. ix.,75 | c

lobiflora, #. A7.; 184: Cc
lanosa, Lind.; 184 c|M

triptera, Benth.; 185 c|M,

59

Kochia oppositifolia, 7. M.; 185
brevifolia, R. Brown; 185
pyramidata, Benth.; 186
eriantha, / M7:; 186
appressa, Benth.; 188
villosa, Lind.; 186
ciliata, # W.; 188
brachyptera, # J7.; 189
stelligera, # J; 189
decaptera, # M.; Frag. ix., 75

Salicornia robusta, / IW; 202

arbuscula, &. Brown ; 203

tenuis, Benth.; 204

australis, Soland.; 205
Sueda maritima, Duwmort.; 206
Salsola Kali, Linné; 207

Ficorr# (FI. Aust., vol. IIT.)

Mesembryanthemum australe, Soland.; 324
equilaterale, Haw.; 324
Tetragonia expansa, Murray ; 325
implexicoma, J. Hooker ; 326
Aizoon quadrifidum, #! M.; 327
zygophylloides, # M.; Krag. x., 83
Gunnia septifraga, #. M.; 327
Trianthema pilosa, #. 1; 330
erystallina, Vahl.; 330
Mollugo orygioides, #. MZ; 333
Glinus, A. Rich.; 338
Spergula, Lenné; 334
Cerviana, Ser.; 334

Ponyeonaces (FI. Aust., vol. V.)

Rumex Brownii, Campdera; 263
flexuosus, Solander ; 264
erystallinus, Lange; 265
bidens, &. Brown ; 265

Polygonum aviculare, Linné; 267

plebejum, R. Brown ; 267
prostratum, FR. Brown; 268
hydropiper, Linné ; 269
minus, Hudson ; 269
lapathifolium, Linné; 270
attenuatum, R. Brown; 272
Muhlenbeckia adpressa, Meissner ; 278
polygonoides, #. IL; 275
Cunninghami, # I; 276

AoA aa

Q

M

M

w

EH} @

E| @

bie
ble

b

id
d

ad

a} |

60

Nycracinrm (Fl. Aust., vol. V.)

Boerhaayia diffusa, Zinné; 277
repanda, Walld.; 278

Leeuminos# (Fl. Aust., vol. IT.)

Brachysema Chambersi, / J7.; 13
Mirbelia oxyclada, #. JZ.; 38
Isotropis atropurpurea, /. JZ.; 40
Wheeleri, # JL; 40,
Gompholobium minus, Smivioe 45
Burtonia polyzyga, Benth. : ; 50
Spherolobium vimineum, Smith; 65
Viminaria denudata, Sinith ; 68
Daviesia arthropoda, P. i; Frag. vili., 225
corymbosa, Smith ; 76
ulicina, Smith; 81
genistifolia, A. Cunn.; 82
inerassata, Smith; 83
brevifola, Zind.; 84
pectinata, Lind.; 87
Aotus villosa, Smith ; 90
Phyllota Sturt, Benth.; 95
pleurandroides, # JL.; 96
Gastrolobium grandiflorum, 7. Jf; 103
elachistum, # JL; Frag. ix.,67
Pultensea daphnoides, Wendl.; 112
stricta, Sims; 112
mucronata, #. W.; 114
pedunculata, Hooker; 118
mollis, Lind.; 128
rigida, R. Brown; 130
acerosa, R. Brown; 131
humilis, Benth.; 182
vestita, R. Brown; 132
laxiflora, Benth.; 1838
largiflorens, #. W.; 134
densifolia, #. JZ.; 186
villifera, Sieb.; 137
involuecrata, Benth.; 138
prostrata, Benth.; 188
eanaliculata, #. 1.; 139
tenuifolia, R. Brown; 139
EKutaxia empetrifolia, Schlecht.; 145
Dillwynia hispida, Lind.; 147
ericifolia, Smith ; 147
floribunda, Smith ; 149

OY ei fey ©

(SY ie)

Q

fo}

M

M

M

M

M

M
M
M

&

a

8

a]

na

=]

d
ad

k

k

61

Dillwynia cinerascens, R. Brown; 151
patula, # MW; 151
Platylobium triangulare, &. Brown ; 152

obtusangulum, Hooker ; 153
Bossiea cinerea, Rk. Brown; 160
prostrata, &. Brown; 162
riparia, A. Cunn.; 166
Walkeri, F. JZ; 167
Templetonia retusa, 2. Brown; 169
egena, Benth.; 170
sulcata, Benth.; 171
Hovea longifolia, R. Brown ; 172
heterophylla, 4. Cunn.; 172
Goodia lotifolia, Salisb.; 177
medicaginea, #. M7.; Frag. i., 10
Crotalaria Cunninghami, Rk. Brown; 182
dissitiflora, Benth.; 184
Trigonella suavissima, Lind.; 187
Lotus australis, Andr.; 188
var. Behrianus
Psoralea balsamica, #7. J2.; 191
eriantha, Benth.; 192
patens, Lind.; 192
leucantha, # M.; 193
adscendens, # M.; 193
eo enneaphylla, Linné ; 196
viscosa, Lamarck ; 198
hirsuta, Line ; 198
monophylla, De Cand. ; 199
australis, Willd.; 199
brevidens, Benth.; 200
coronillefolia, A. Cunn.; 201

Ptychosema anomalum, EF M. ; Frag. 1x., 62

Sesbania aculeata, Pers.; 213,

Chanthus Dampieri, Yale Ounn.; 214

Swainsona Greyana, Lind. ; 216
coronillefolia, Salish. ; 217
colutoides, F. ‘IL; Frag. XAG
phacoides, Benth.; 217
Burkitti, #. J; 218
Burkei, #. JZ; 218
oligophylla, # J; 219
campylantha, # dZ.; 219
procumbens, # M.; 220
phacifolia, # Jf; 221
lessertiifolia, De Cand.; 222

Q

AQAA AaAe eG

Cc

unifoliolata, #12; Fre. viii., 226! c

M

M

= &

M

Se & &

&

g

a
E| @

aa

kh

62

Swainsona microphylla, 4. Gray; 223
laxa, R. Brown; 224
_ Glycyrrhiza psoraloides, Benth.; 225
Lespedeza lanata, Benth.; 241
Glycine falcata, Benth.; 243
clandestina, Wendl.; 248
Latrobeana, Benth.; 24:4
tabacina, Labill.; 244
sericea, Benth.; 245
Kennedya monophylla, #. J2.; 246
prostrata, R. Brown; 250

prorepens, F. W.; Frag. viii., 225

Erythrina vespertilio, Benth.; 258

Cassia Sophera, Linné; 283
venusta, F. W.; 284
notabilis, F. 1.; 284
pleurocarpa, F. M.; 284
elutinosa, De Cand.; 286
circinata, Benth.; 286
phyllodinea, R. Brown; 287
eremophila, 4A. Cunn.; 287

var. heteroloba

artemisioides, Gaud.; 288
Sturtu, &. Brown; 288
desolata, F. 1f.; 289

Petalostylis labicheoides, &. Brown ; 292

Bauhinia Leichhardti, #. 1f.; 295

Acacia continua, Benth.; 322
spinescens, Benth.; 323
nyssophylla, #. M.; 325
patens, &. J; 329
tetragonophylla, # J2.; 330
rupicola, #. IL; 333
rhigiophylla, # JZ; 333
oxycedrus, Steb.; 334
verticillata, Willd.; 334
rigens, A. Cunn.; 337
papyrocarpa, Benth.; 338
calamifolia, Sweet; 339
lycopodifolia, 4. Cumn.; 342

spondylophylla, FIL; Frag. viil., 243

armata, R. Brown; 3847

strongylophylla, FIL; Frag.viii., 226

vomeriformis, A. Cunn.; 350
obliqua, A. Cunn.; 353
acinacea, Lind.; 353
lineata, A. Cunn.; 353

Qa

Q

M{
M
M

M

= &

M

M

g

Oa

a

QS oe

SS

ad\k

63

Acacia anceps, De Cand.; 355
microcarpa, & M.; 357
montana, Benth.; 357
verniciflua, A. Cunn.; 358
dodoneifolia, Willd.; 359
sentis, /. M.; 360
retinodes, Schlecht. ; 362
neriifolia, A. Cunn.; 363
notabilis, F. W.; 365
pycnantha, Benth.; 365
hakeoides, A. Cunn.; 367
salicina, Lind.; 367
suaveolens, Willd.; 369
Murrayana, / I; 370
prominens, A. Cumn.; 371
brachybotrya, Benth.; 373
Wattsiana, # I.; 374
myrtifolia, Willd.; 376
sublanata, Benth.; 378

minutifolia, F. W.; Frag. viii., 243

homalophylla, A. Cunn.; 383
Oswaldi, F. JL; 384
stenophylla, 4. Cunn.; 385
sclerophylla, Lind.; 386
farinosa, Lind.; 386
melanoxylon, R. Brown; 388
retivenia, /. W.; 392
longifolia, Willd.; 397
Burkitti, #. I; 400
cyperophylla, F. I/.; 400
aneura, . MW.; 402
decurrens, Willd.; 414

Rosace® (FI. Aust., vol. IT.)

Geum urbanum, Linné; 428
Potentilla anserina, Linné; 429
Rubus parviflorus, Linné; 430
Alchemilla arvensis, Scop.; 482
vulgaris, Linné; 432
Acena ovina, A. Cunn.; 433
sanguisorbe, Vahl.; 434:

SaAxIFRAGE® (FI. Aust., vol. IT.)

Bauera rubioides, Andr.; 447

CrassvLace® (FI. Aust., vol. IT.)

Tillea verticillaris, 4. Cunn.; 451

Q Q

SEES

Hee & &

ico}

aa

Ce OS
° °
Se

EE

64:

Tillea purpurata, Hooker; 451
macrantha, Hooker; 452
intricata, Nees ; 452

Harorace® (FI). Aust., vol. IT.)

Loudonia aurea, Lind.; 472
Behrui, Schlecht.; 472
Haloragis mucronata, WVees ; 475
elata, A. Cunn.; 476
Gossei, F. M.; Frag. viii., 161
ceratophylla, Hndl.; 478
acutangula, #. W.; 478
odontocarpa, F. M.; 479
micrantha, R. Brown; 482
heterophylla, Brong.; 488
tetragyna, Labill.; 484
teucrioides, De Cand.; 484:
Meionectes Browniu, J. Hooker; 486
Myriophyllum variefolium, J. Hooker; 487
elatinoides, Gaud.; 487
verrucosum, Lind.; 488
Muelleri, Sond.; 488
integrifolium, J. Hooker; 490
Callitriche verna, Linné; 492

CERATOPHYLLE® (FI. Aust., vol. II.)
Ceratophyllum demersum, Linné; 491

Onacrace® (Fl. Aust., vol. ITT.)

Epilobium tetragonum, Linné; 305, &e.
var. pallidiflorum
Jussiza repens, Linné; 306.

Lytnrace® (FI. Aust., vol. IIT.)

Ammannia Indiea, De Cand.; 297
multiflora, Rorb.; 298
Lythrum Salicaria, Linné; 298
Hyssopifolia, Linné; 298

Mynrrace# (Fl. Aust., vol. IIT.)

Darwinia micropetala, Benth.; 14
Schuermanni, Benth.; 15
Verticordia Wilhelmi, / J; 19
Calycothrix longiflora, #. M.; 49
tetragona, Labill.; 50
Lhotzkya glaberrima, Ff. 1.; 53
genetylloides, # JZ.; 54 |

M

M

M

M

a d
cld
a Cc
a
bie k
E Cc kh
a c
a\bie\d
b
c
c
E c\d
E
aD) Cc
1D; Cc
Cc
E c
C |
E
EK
E bie
Cc
10)
EK Cc
K Cc
k
b
b
E|a|6|e\d\k
k

65

Thryptomene Maisonneuvi, / M.; 61
Mitchelliana, # J; 61
Miqueliana, # J.; 62
ericea, /. I7.; 62
Elliotti, Ff. 1; Frag. ix., 62

auriculata, # I; Frag. x., 24) ¢

flaviflora, FI. ; Frag. viii., 13
microphylla, #. dJ/.; 65
Beckea crassifolia, Lind.; 76
polystemonea, F. I/.; 77
ericea, F. W.; 77
Behru, F. I; 83
Leptospermum levigatum, # JZ.; 103
scoparium, Forster; 105
lanigerum, Smith; 106
myrsinoides, Schlecht.; 109
Kunzea pomifera, #. JZ.; 116
Callistemon coccineus, #. J/.; 120
salignus, Smith ; 120
teretifolius, F. W.; 122
brachyandrus, Lind.; 122
Melaleuca acuminata, F. AZ.; 182
gibbosa, Labill.; 183
decussata, R. Brown; 133
Wilsoni, #. JZ; 134
squarrosa, Smith; 139
parviflora, Lindley ; 145
cylindrica, R. Brown; 146
uncinata, R. Brown; 150
glomerata, F. J7.; 151
squamea, Labill.; 155
ericifolia, Smith; 159
var. pustulata, Hooker ; 160
Eucalyptus pauciflora, Szeb.; 201
Sieberiana, F. 17; 202
obliqua, L’ Heritier; 204
eapitellata, Smzth ; 206
santalifolia, F. JZ.; 206
var. (2) Baxteri; 207
leucoxylon, F. JZ; 210
eracilis, W. M.; 211
paniculata, Smzth; 211
largiflorens, /. IZ; 214
uneinata, Turcz.; 216
odorata, Behr; 215
Behriana, F. J.; 216
corynocalyx, #. A.; 218

OAanaagngnnas

d\

k

k

on

oy ay a es

66

Eucalyptus hemiphloia, # 12; 219, 216
microtheea, # AL.; 223
cosmophylla, M J2.; 225
goniocalyx, #. M.; 229
dumosa, A. Cumn.; 230

var. conglobata
inerassata, Labill.; 231
pachyphylla, # J; 237
Youngiana, #. M.; Frag. x., 5
viminalis, Labill.; 239
rostrata, Schlecht.; 240
Gunnii, Hooker ; 246
oleosa, F. M.; 248
gamophylla, F. 1.; Frag.x1., 40

Cucursiracem (Fl. Aust., vol. IIT.)

Cucumis acidus, Jacg.; 317
Mukia, seabrella, Arn.; 321

STACKHOUSIED (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)

Stackhousia spathulata, Szeb.; 406
linariefolia, A. Cunn.; 407
megaloptera, FI.; Fg. vii., 35

Macegregoria racemigera, IZ; he. viii., 161

Ruamyace® (Fl. Aust., vol. I.)

Pomaderris apetala, Labill.; 419
obeordata, Fenzl; 421
racemosa, Hooker; 421
Spyridium parvifolium, # JZ; 428
spathulatum, &. Brown; 430
phlebophyllum, / JZ; 480
eoactilifolium, Benth.; 431
halmaturinum, #. J.; 432
bifidum, #. J; 432
subochreatum, Rezssek ; 438
eriocephalum, Fenzl; 434
var. vexilliferum; 433
leucophractum, #. M/.; 435 |
Waterhousei, / JL; 436
Cryptandra hispidula, Reissek; 439
amara, Smith; 440
tomentosa, Lind.; 441
propingqua, 4. Cunn.; 442

THYMELE® (Fl. Aust., vol. VL.)

Pimelea glauca, &. Brown; 15

M

M

M

M

M

&

&

a

a

| @

a

SY aS

b

d
d

d

d

ad

c\d

Cc

k

k

k

k
k

67

Pimelea spathulata, Zabill.; 17

hgustrina, Labdll.; 18

var. macrostegia
humilis, 2. Brown; 19
simplex, / dZ.; 23
trichostachya, Lind.; 24:
microcephala, R. Brown; 27
elachantha, I’. 1.; 28
serpyllifoha, R. Brown; 29
flava, Rk. Brown; 29
petrophila, # JZ; 30
ammocharis, / JZ.; 30
eurviflora, Rk. Brown ; 31
octophylla, R. Brown ; 32
petrea, Meissn.; 33
phylicoides, MWeissn.; 33
stricta, Meissn.; 34

k

k

k

k

Prornace® (FL. Aust., vol. V.)

Petrophila multisecta, #. J.; 335
Isopogon ceratophyllus, R. Brown; 347 M
Adenanthos terminalis, R. Brown ; 335
Conospermum patens, Schlecht.; 371 M
Persoonia juniperina, Labill.; 408 M
Grevillea pterosperma, # M/.; 432 C|M
ilieifolia, R. Brown; 437 M
Treueriana, &. Jf; Frag. ix., 123) ¢
juneifolia, Hooker ; 447 ¢C
lavandulacea, Schlecht.; 448 M
aspera, R. Brown; 450 Cc
pauciflora, &. Brown; 453
angulata, &. Brown ; 455 C
Wickhami, Metssn. ; 455 C

Qa 92 8

i~=

Huegeli, Metssn.; 457 M|E

striata, &. Brown; 462 C
parviflora, R. Brown; 472; var.
acuaria, / A.
nematophylla, #. MZ. ; 482 C
stenobotrya, #. M.; Frag. ix., 3 |c
Hakea lorea, R. Brown; 496 c
Pampliniana, Kippist ; 507 M
vittata, R. Brown; 507
rostrata, F. A.; 508
rugosa, &. Brown; 508 M
acicularis, R. Brown; 514
leucoptera, R. Brown; 515 clM

aS oS

68

Hakea cycloptera, R. Brown; 515
multilineata, Metssn.; 518
ulicina, R. Brown; 524
flexilis, # J.; 530

Banksia marginata, Cav. 55

ornata, H’. AL: 557

Lorantuace® (Fl. Aust., vol. IIT.)

Loranthus celastroides, Sieb.; 389
angustifolius, R. Brown; 390
Exocarpi, TBeibp 392
var. (?) linearifolius; 391
lhnophyllus, Fenzl; 393
pendulus, Szeb.; 394
var. Melaleucee
var. canus ; 3895
erandibracteus, 1’. A.; 395

3

Viscum articulatum, Burm. ; 396
SantTatacem (Fl. Aust., vol. VL.)
Santalum lanceolatum, &. Brown; 214
acuminatum, De Cand.; 216
persicarium, F. M.; 216
Choretrum elomeratum, fi. Brown : 218
chrysanthum, /’. M.; 218
spicatum, F’. M.; 218
Leptomeria aphylla, 2. Brown : 222
Anthobolus exocarpoides. F’ F.M.; No xa
Exocarpus cupressiformis, Labill. 229
spartea, &. Brown; 229
aphylla, R. Brown; 230
stricta, R. Brown ; 230
OxactineE# (FI. Aust., vol. I.)
Olax Benthamiana, Iig.; 393
UMBELLIFER® (Fi. Aust., vol. IIL.)
Hydrocotyle vulgaris, Lianne; 339
hirta, &. Brown; 340
laxiflora, De Cand. ; 340
callicarpa, Bunge ; 343
trachycarpa, F’. M.; 343
capillaris, F’. M.; 344
Asiatica, Linné; 346
Didiscus pilosus, Benth.: 348
cyanopetalus, F. M.; 348

eriocarpus, F. JZ. ; 348

Q

| M

M

M/E

M

M

a

a

i

oS)

a aa ©

is)

aa a9

d

d

QRS

d

hk
k

69

Didiseus anisocarpus, Ff’. M.; 349
elaucitolius, #’. M.; 350
Trachymene heterophylla, #. JZ; 354
Xanthosia pusilla, Bunge; 361
dissecta, J. Hooker; 362
Eryngium rostratum, Cav.; 370
vesiculosum, Labill.; 370
plantagineum, #. W.; 371
Apium prostratum, Labill.; 372
Crantzia lineata, Nutt.; 374
Daucus brachiatus, Sieb.; 376

Caprironiace® (FI. Aust., vol. IIT.)
Sambucus Gaudichaudiana, De Cand.; 398

Rusices (FI. Aust., vol. IIT.)

Oldenlandia tilleacea, F’. M.; 405
Dentella repens, Forst.; 406
Canthium latifolium, # I.; 421
Coprosoma hirtella, Labzll.; 529
Opercularia scabrida, Schlecht.; 433
ovata, J. Hooker; 435
varia, J. Hooker ; 435
Pomax umbellata, Solander ; 437
Asperula oligantha, # M.; 444
Galium geminifolium, # IL; 445
Gaudichaudi, De Cand.; 446
australe, De Cand.; 446

Composit (FI. Aust., vol. III.)

Adenostemma viscosum, Forst.; 462

Aster grandiflorus, #. JL; 469
pannosus, #7 I.; 469
myrsinoides, Labill.; 470
tubuliflorus, # JZ; 475
axillaris, F. J2.; 475
ramulosus, Labill. ; 476
floribundus, #. M.; 477
microphyllus, Labzll.; 477
subspicatus, F. Jf.; 478
pimeleoides, A. Cunn.; 479
conocephalus, #. J; 480
magniflorus, F. I.; 480
caleareus, #. J.; 481
Muelleri, Sonder; 481
Stuartii, #. 12; 481
decurrens, De Cand.; 481

a

| ie

d

2 &

d\k
d

70

Aster glutescens, #. I.; 482 pars

teretifolius, / JL; 482
glandulosus, Labill.; 483

megalodontus, # 1; Frag. viii., 244:

Ferresi, F. J.; 487
exul, Lind.|; 487
var. glabriuseula
picridifolus, # JZ; 487
Huegeli, F’. M.; 488
var. squamifolia

Vittadinia australis, A. Rich.; 490
Podocoma cuneitolia, R. Brown; 493
Minuria leptophylla, De Cand.; 498
Cunninghami, De Cand.; 498
Candollei, F. 1; Frag. x., 56

suedifolia, F. I; 499

Calotis cunefolia, R. Brown; 501

cymbacantha, Ff’. W.; 502
erinacea, Steetz ; 502

scabiosifolia, Sond. & F. A.; 503

scapigera, Hooker ; 503
lappulacea, Benth. ; 504
plumulifera, # J; 505

porphyroglossa, I’. AZ.; 505

hispidula, #. J7.; 506

Lagenophora Billardieri, Cass.; 507

Huegeli, Benth.; 507

emphysopus, J. Hooker; 508
Brachycome diversifolia, Misch. & May.; 511
goniocarpa, Sond. & F. M.; 512

pachyptera, Turcz.; 512
Tatei, f. M.; (m.s.)
Muelleri, Sonder.; 514:
eraminea, F. Jf.; 514
basaltica, # W.; 515
trachycarpa, # M.; 515
exilis, Sonder.; 516
debilis, Sonder.; 516
decipiens, J. Hooker ; 516
cardiocarpa, F. M.; 517
ciliaris, Labill.; 518
calocarpa, Ff. I; 519
tenella, Turcz.; 521

Billardieri, F. 12; Frag.

Q

C

Q

Pterocaulon sphacelatus, Hook. & Benth.; 523) c

Cc

Erodiophyllum Elderi, & JZ; Frag. ix., 120} ¢
Pluchea Hyrea, F. Z.; 528

C

M

M
M

M

M|

,M

ae

&

a

a

d

71

Epaltes australis, Less.; 530
Pterigeron liatroides, Benth.; 532
microglossus, Benth.; 532
dentatifolius, # IZ; Fe. ix., 119
Siegesbeckia orientalis, Linné; 535
Wedelia platyglossa, # 1.; 536
Glossogyne tenuifolia, Ouss.; 544
Flaveria Australasica, Hooker; 546
Cotula filifolia, Thunb.; 548
coronopifolia, Linné; 540
australis, Hooker; 550
reptans, Benth.; 551
Centipeda orbicularis, Lowr.; Fg. vii., 142
Cunninghami, / Jf; 553 pars
thespidioides, FJ. ; Fg. vii., 143
Hlachanthus pusillus, # JZ; 555
Tsoetopsis graminifolia, Turez.; 556
Myriocephalus rhizocephalus, De Cand. ; 557
Rudalli, #. Jf; 559
Polycalymma Stuarti, Sond. et M.; 860
Angianthus tomentosus, Wendl.; 562
pleuropappus, Benth.; 563
brachypappus, #. 12.; 563
tenellus, #. A.; 564
pusillus, Benth.; 564
Preissianus, Steetz ; 566
strictus, Steetz; 568
Gnephosis Burkitti, Benth.; 570
erlocarpa, &. M.; 570
skirrophora, Benth. ; 570
arachnoidea, Turez.; 571
cadonopappa, #. W.; Fe. ix., 2
Calocephalus Brownn, #. W.; 574
Sonderi, / JL; 575
lacteus, Less.; 575
citreus, Less.; 575
platycephalus, F. W.; 576
Cephalipterum Drummondi, A. Gray; 577
Gnaphalodes uliginosum, A. Gray; 578
Craspedia Richea, Cass.; 579
pleiocephala, #. dZ.; 580
chrysantha, Schlecht.; 580
elobosa, Benth.; 580
Chthonocephalus pseudoevax, Steetz ; 582
Ixodia achilleoides, R. Brown ; 583
Cassinia longifolia, R. Brown ; 586
aculeata, R. Brown; 586

M

M

Bee &

a

aoa

SNS SO

i)

a

d

d

k

72

Cassinia laevis, R. Brown; 587
arcuata, R. Brown; 587
spectabilis, Zabill.; 588
Humea cassiniacea, #. MW.; 589
punctulata, #7. 1; 589
Eriochlamys Behrii, Sond. & Ff. M.; 591
Toxanthus perpusillus, Turez.; 592
Muelleri, Benth.; 592
Rutidosis helichrysoides, De Cand.; 594
Pumilo, Benth.; 595
Millotia tenuifolia, Ozss.; 596
Greevesii, #. W.; 596
Txiolena leptolepis, De Cand. ; 597
supina, #. J.; 598
tomentosa, Sond. & F’. M.; 598
Athrixia tenella, Benth.; 600
Podotheca angustifolia, Oass.; 601
Podolepis acuminata, R. Brown; 604
canescens, A. Cunn.; 605
rugata, Labill.; 606
Lessoni, Benth.; 606
Siemssenia, /. 1.; 607
Leptorhynchus squamatus, Labdill.; 608
ambiguus, Turcz.; 609
pulchellus, # JZ; 610

elongatus, DeC.; 616, Fe.xi., 85
medius, A. Cunn.; 610, Fe.xi.,85

Waitzia, Sonder.; 610
Helichrysum Cassinianum, Gaud.; 611
Davenporti, F. I; 616
semifertile, / M.; 617
Baxteri, A. Cunn.; 617
scorpioides, Labill.; 618
rutidolepis, De Cand.; 618

obtusifolium, FIZ. & Sond.;619

lucidum, Henckel; 620

retusum. F. Mf; Frag. viii., 46
decurrens, F. W.; Fre. viii., 46

diotophyllum, #. AZ.; 628
adenophorum, /. J.; 622

leucopsidium, De Cand.; 622
Blandowskianum, Steetz ; 622

podolepideum, F. M/.; 624
apiculatum, De Cand.; 624

semipapposum, De Cand.; 625

ferrugineum, Labill.; 631

C

Thomsoni, F. I; Fg. viii, 45!c

M

M

M

a
a

a

ano

Qa a

Qa

Qa aS

SO oa os

CSCIC Cm CONGS

d

d

d

d

k

k

bro
i)

Helichrysum Ayersi, # J/.; We. viii., 167 |

Waitzia corymbosa, Wendl.; 635

Helipterum roseum, Benth.; 640 lc
anthemoides, De Cand.; 641
polygalifolium, De Cand.; 641 |
floribundum, De Cand.; 642 |

var, Stuartinum, Sond.,

heteranthum, Turez.; 642 |
involucratum, /. J7.; 646 | ¢
tenellum, Zurez.; 646 |
strictum, Benth.; 646
stipitatum, WAL; 643
ineanum, De Cand.; 643
Cotula, De Cand.; 644
hyalospermum, F. J/.; 644
iene He Me rags, 07
corymbiflorum, Schlecht.; 647
pygmeum, De Cand.; 647

moschatum, A. Cunn.; 648
Tietkensi, F. AL; Fe. viii., 227
pterochetum, #/ J/.; 648
exiguum, F. A/.; 649
dimorpholepis, Benth.; 650
Gnaphalium luteo-album, Linné; 653
Japonicum, Thanb.; 653
indutum, Hooker; 655
Stuartina Muelleri, Sonder.; 657
Erechthites picridioides, Turcz.; 658
arguta, De Cand.; 659
mixta, De Cand.; 659
quadridentata, De Cand.; 660
hispidula, De Cand.; 660
Senecio Gregorii, F AZ.; 663
megaglossus, Ff. MW.; 665
| magnificus, F. I; 665
| lautus, G. Forst.; 667
Behrianus, Sond. & Muell.; 669
_brachyglossus, F. JZ; 669
Georgianus, De Cand.; 670
odoratus, Hornem.; 671
hypoleucus, Benth.; 672
Cunninghami, De Cand.; 671
anethifolius, A. Cunn.; 672
Cymbonotus Lawsonianus, Gaudich.; 674
Microseris Forsteri, Hooker; 676
Picris hieracioides, Linné; 678

G

Charsleye, &. JZ.; Fg. viii., 168) c :

ayn

Aaa an

7A.

SrytiptEe® (Fl. Aust., vol. TV.) |

Stylidium graminifolium, Swartz ; 10
calearatum, FR. Brown; 14
floribundum, 2. Brown; 15 6
despectum, R. Brown ; D2

Leeuwenhookia dubia, Sonder; 34

CaMPANULACER (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)

Lobelia heterophylla, Zabill.; 124 C
Browniana, Roem. & Schult.
microsperma, #. JZ.; Frag. x., 41
simplicicaulis, 2. Brown: ” 104,
rhombifolia, De Vr.; . 126
anceps, Thunb. : 128
pratioides, Benth.; 131
Benthami, 7. JZ ; 133 (puberula)
concolor, R. Browi; 133

Tsotoma petrea, FP M.; 135. C
scapigera, Don 136 |
fluviatilis, # J/.; 136 |

Wahlenbergia gracilis, De Oand.; 137 Ke

Q

GoovENOVIES® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.) |
Leschenaultia divaricata, 7. J/.; 43 Ke
striata, EF AVE Fe. Viil., 245, c
Velleia connata, F. Mm; 46 Le
paradoxa, Jt Brown; 48 |
Goodenia Rameli, F. J; 57 C

ovata, Smith; 59
amplexans, / JL; 60

varia, R. Brown; 61 ||

geniculata, R. Brown; 62

hirsuta, 7 IL; 64 \c
Vilmorinie, F. J7.; 68 lc
Nicholsoni, F. JZ. 69 C
grandiflora, Sims; 69 c
Chambersi, # JZ; 70 lc
calearata, F. W.; 69 | c
albiflora, Schlecht.; 70 |

Mitehelli, Benth.; 71 ic
heterochila, F IZ.; 71 1c |

Mueckeana, 7. AZ; Frag. viii., 56 c

eycloptera, R. Brown; 74 | C|

pinnatifida, Schlecht.; 75 |
glauca, #. J.; 76 Ro!

microptera, #. M.; 77 1c]

M
Nah a

M a
M

|EH| @|

Qo 2

d

d

d\ kk

ad

d

d

75

Selliera radicans, Cav.; 82
Catosperma Muelleri, Benth.; 83
Sceevola spinescens, 22. Brown; 87
depauperata, R. Brown; 91
parvifoha, /. 12; 91
collaris, #. 1.; 92
suaveolens, R. Brown ; 95
ovalifolia, R. Brown; 96
erassitolia, Labill.; 96
zmula, F. Brown; 99
humilis, R. Brown; 100
microcarpa, Cav.; 101
linearis, R. Brown; 102
Dampiera lanceolata; A. Cunn.; 118
rosmarinifolia, Schlecht.; 114
stricta, R. Brown; 115
Brunonia australis, Smzth; 121

Gentrane® (FI. Aust., vol. LV.)

Sebea ovata, R. Brown; 371
Erythrea australis, R. Brown; 371
Gentiana montana, G. Forst.; 373
Limnanthemum exaltatum, / J/.; 376
crenatum, £. I/.; 379

Logantace® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)
Mitrasacme paradoxa, 2. Brown; 359
Logania longifolia, R. Brown; 361

crassifolia, 2. Brown; 362
ovata, R. Brown ; 362
linifolia, Schlecht.; 368
nuda, #. AL; 365

PrantaGine® (FI. Aust., vol. V.)
Plantago varia, R. Brown; 139

var. (2) parviflora

PRIMULACE® (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)
Samolus repens, Pers.; 271

JaAsMINE® (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)
Jasminum lineare, R. Brown; 295
caleareum, J. Jf.; 297
Apvocyne® (FI. Aust., vol: IV.)
Carissa Brownu, / JL; 305
Alyxia buxifolia, R. Brown ; 307

| M

M|E|

He & &

| &@

a

a |

oOo fl

cld\k

ed

76
Notonerium Gossei, Benth.; Gen. Plant., 698

ASCLEPIADE® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)
. Sarcostemma australe, PR. Brown; 328 Cc
Cynanchum floribundum, &. Brown; 332 | ¢
Marsdenia Leichhardtiana, 7. J/.; 341 C
Sonanace® (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)
Solanum aviculare, G. Forst.; 447

(or

simile, BF M.; 448 ic
fasciculatum, FP. M.; Frag. vi., 144| c
ferocissimum, Lindley; 451 C
oligacanthum, / JZ.; 454 Cc
esuriale, Lindley ; 454 |e
chenopodinum, F. J.; 454 6
Sturtn, & IL; 454 Cc

hystrix, R. Brown; 458
eremophilum, #. Jf; 459

Jacunarium, #! Jf; 461 C
petrophilum, #. J2.; 461 C
ellipticum, &. Brown; 464 c
Lycium australe, # If; 467 c
Datura Leichhardti, /. f.; 468 lc
Nicotiana sauveolens, Lehm.; 469 c
Anthocercis anisantha, Hndlicher ; 477 C

angustifolia, # J; 478

myosotidea, #. Af.; 478
Eadesui, Z IL.; 480
Duboisia Hopwoodi, F iM; 480 U
Anthrotroche Blackii, BE Ue; Frag. vui1., 232) c
ScROPHULARIACEH (Il. Aust., vol. IV.)
Mimulus repens, 2. Brown; 482 c
gracilis, 2. Brown ; 482 Cc
prostratus, Benth.; 483 C
Stemodia viscosa, Roxb.; 486 C
pedicellaris, FU; Frag. viii, 231) ¢
Morgania, #. JL; "488 lc
Gratiola peruviana, Linné; 493 |
Limosella aquatica, Linné; 508 |
Curdieana, F. i; Frag. 1x., 166 C
Veronica decorosa, FM; : 506 |
Derwentia, Littlejohn ; 507 |
gracilis, R. Brown; 508 |
distans, &. Brown; 509 |
calycina, &. Brown; 509 |
Euphrasia Brown, & Jf.; 520 | c

M

M

M

a
A]

c|
a c|

dik
d

77

Euphrasia scabra, 2. Rrown; 521
Acantuacem (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)

Ruellia australis, 2. Brown; 547

Justicia procumbens, Linnd; 549
Kempeana, # J.; Frag. xi., 101

OropancHace® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)
Orobanche cernua, Loefl.; 533

LENTIBULARIACE® (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)

Utricularia flexuosa, Vahl.; 525
dichotoma, Labill.; 529
Polypompholyx tenella, Lehm.; 582

Bienoniace® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)

Tecoma australis, R. Brown; 537
PEDALINED (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)
Josephinia Eugenie, &. W.; 557
ConvonvuLace® (Fl. Aust., vol. IV.)

Ipomeea Davenporti, # JL.; 415
costata, #. I.; 419
Muelleri, Benth.; 423
heterophylla, R. Brown ; 426

Convolvulus erubescens, Sims; 4.29

sepium, Linné; 430

Breweria rosea, F. JZ; 436

Cressa cretica, Linné; 437

Evolvulus linifolius, Linné; 437

Dichondra repens, G. Forst.; 438

Wilsonia humilis, R. Brown; 439
rotundifolia, Hooker; 440

Cuscuta australis, R. Brown; 441

BoraGine® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)

Coldenia procumbens, Linné ; 391

Helotropium Curassavicum, Zinné ; 393
europeum, Linn; 394
undulatum, Vahl.; 394
asperrimun, A. Brown; 394
ovalifolium, Forst.; 396
filaginoides, Benth.; 398
pleiopterum, #7. If; Fe.ix.,121

Halgania anagalloides, Hndl.; 402

cyanea, Lindley ; 402

eae

GQ Oo

eaqcaeaace

M

a

a

a

a

a

a

C

d

d

78

Halgania lavandulacea, Hndl.; 408
Trichodesma Zeylanicum, 2. Brown; 404
Myosotis australis, 2. Brown ; 405 |
Eritrichium australasicum, De Oand.: 406 |
Echinospermum coneavum, /. JZ.; 407 |
Cynoglossum suaveolens, R. Brown; 409 |
australe, R. Brown ; 409
Drummondi, Benth.; 409
LasiaT®# (FI. Aust., vol. V.)
Plectranthus parviflorus, Henchel; 78
Mentha grandiflora, Benth.; 82
australis, R. Brown; 83
gracilis, R. Brown; 83
satureioides, R. Brown; 84
Lycopus australis, Rk. Brown ; 85
Prunella vulgaris, Linné; 87
Scutellaria mollis, R. Brown; 88
humilis, R. Brown; 88 |
Prostanthera lasianthos, Labill.; 93
rotundifolia, R. Brown; 96
spinosa, #. JZ.; 99
Behriana, Schlecht.; 102
Wilkieana, FIL; Fe. viii., 230
Baxteri, A. Cunn.; 102
striatiflora, #. J7.; 102
eurybioides, #. J.; 105
coccinea, Ff. AL.; 107
calycina, # I.; 107
Microcorys Macredieana, FA. ; Fg. viii., 231
Westringia rigida, R. Brown; 129
Dampieri, Rk. Brown; 129
Teucrium racemosum, R. Brown; 132
corymbosum, f. Brown; 133
sessilifiorum, Benth.; 1384
Ajuga australis, R. Brown; 136
VERBENACE® (FI. Aust., vol. V.)
Verbena officinalis, Linné; 36
Neweastlia spodiotricha, #. JZ. ; 40
bracteosa, Ff. AZ.; Frag. viui., 49
cephalantha, #. JZ.; Frag. ix., 4
Dicrastyles ochrotricha, #. AL; 42
Beveridgei, #. JL. ; Frag. viii., 50)
Gilesii, # M.; Frag. viui., 229
Dorani, #. W.; Frag. viii., 230

Lewellini, # JZ; Frag. xi., 86

iC

Cc

C

M
M
M

M
M

M

M

M

HEHE Eee

t

a

a

a

|B |

Lo

a]

G

[¢]

d

d
ad
d

k

79

Avicennia officinalis, Linnd ; 69
Myororinm (Fl. Aust., vol. V.)

Myoporum Cunninghami, Benth.; 4
insulare, R. Brown; 4
viscosum, 72. Brown; 5
deserti, A. Cunn.; 5
parvifolium, &. Brown; 6
brevipes, Benth.; 6
platyearpum, 2. Brown ; 7

Eremophila Dalyana, F#. JZ; 10
scoparia, F. M.; 10
Delisseri, / AZ.; 11
Weldu, # J; Frag. vii., 109
erassifolia, #. WZ; 11
Behriana, F. A.; 12
Christophori, #7. AZ.; Fg. ix., 120
densifolia, #. J7.; 18
eibbifoha, F. AZ.; 13
divaricata, W. I; 14
santalina, # M7.; 15
rotundifolia, #. JZ; 19
oppositifolia, R. Rrown ; 20
Paisleyi, &. M.; 20
Sturtu, R. Brown ; 21
Hughesu, F. WZ; Frag. vii1., 228
Gibsoni, # JZ; Frag. viii., 227
Gilesu, F. JZ; Frag. vii., 49
Berryi, # M.; Frag. vii., 228
Latrobei, F. W7.; 22
MacDonnelli, / J7.; 22
longifolia, # JZ; 23
polyclada, F. A; 24
Freelingi, #. AZ; 25
viridifolia, /’. A.

Goodwin, F. A; 25

Elderi, 7 J2.; Frag. viii,, 228
Willsu, # AL; 26

Brownii, F. M.; 27

Duttoni, #. A; 28

maculata, I’. M.; 29
latifolia, # JL; 30
alternifolia, R. Brown ; 30

EpeacripEe® (FI. Aust., vol. IV.)

Styphelia adscendens, R. Brown; 146
pusilliflora, # JZ; 149

M
M

M

M

M
M

2
4!

a\b\e

|
|
le

a Cc
a bie

ad

d

d

d

Styphelia humifusa, Pers.; 156
Sonderi, J”. AZ.; 158
strigosa, Smith; 175
Richei, Labill.; 186
australis, #’. M.; 186
eollina, Labill.; 191
coneurva, F’. M.; 198
virgata, Labill.; 201
ericoides, Smith ; 200
cordifolia, # A7.; 214
hirtella, # A/.; 218
rufa, Ff’, M.; 220
Woodsi, F. M.; 225
serrulata, Labill.; 227
patula, Spreng.; 227
ovalifolia, Spreng.; 228
depressa, Spreng.; 228
fasciculiflora, # AZ.; 229
Monotoea elliptica, R. Brown ; 230
Brachyloma ericoides, Sond.; 172
daphnoides, Smith ; 173
Epacris impressa, Labill.; 235
obtusifolia, Smith ; 237
lanuginosa, Labill.; 238
microphylla, R. Brown ; 240
Sprengelia incarnata, Smith ; 249

CasvaRInEem® (FI. Aust., vol. VI.)

Casuarina quadrivalvis, Labill.; 195
elauca, Sieb.; 196
lepidophloia, # JZ; Frag. x., 115
suberosa, Ott. & Dietr.; 197
distyla, Vent.; 198
torulosa, Azt.; 200
Decaisneana, #. M.; 201
bicuspidata, Benth.; 202

ConiFER® (FI. Aust., vol. VI.)

Callitris verrucosa, R. Brown ; 237
rhomboidea, R. Brown; 237

CrcapEm (FI. Aust., vol. VI.)

C|M/)E

IME

M/E

C\|M

Encephalartos Macdonnelli, AZ; F.ix., 124) c!

a

a

a

a

b

b

b

|b

b

e\d\k
C A
ral
ce \h
Cine)
a
ed
C|
C | kh
e\d h
d
le| |k
C
C hk
C
al
e|
eld\k
cld\k
cld\k
al:

81

MONOCOTYLEDONES,

Hyprocuarive®m (Fl. Aust., vol. VI.)
Blyxa Roxburghi, Rich.; 258
Vallisneria spiralis, Linné; 259
Halophila ovata, Gawd.; vol. vii., 182

OrcHipEe® (Fl. Aust., vol. VI.)

Dipodium punctatum, #. Brown; 301

Cymbidium canaliculatum, 2. Brown; 302

Calochilus Robertsoni, Benth.; 315
Thelymitra ixioides, Sw.; 317
aristata, Lind.; 319
longifolia, Horster ; 319
fusco-lutea, R. Brown; 321
earnea, Ff. Brown; 321
flexuosa, Hndl.; 322
antennifera, J. Hooker; 322
Diuris palustris, Lend.; 327
maculata, Smzth; 327
pedunculata, &. Brown; 328
sulphurea, R. Brown ; 330
longifolia, &. Brown ; 331
Orthoceras strictum, &. Brown; 332
Cryptostylis longifolia, R. Brown ; 333
Prasophyllum elatum, R. Brown; 337
patens, #. Brown; 339
fuseum, fe. Brown; 339

nigricans, . Brown ; 3483

Vepperi, &. AL. (i.s.)
Microtis porrifolia, Spreng.; 347
atrata, Lind.; 349
Corysanthes pruinosa, A. Cunn.; 351
Pterostylis concinna, R. Brown; 355
eurta, fe. Brown; 355
nutans, &. Brown; 356
nana, R. Brown; 357
cucullata, R. Brown; 357
reflexa, R. Brown; 359
barbata, Lind. ; 362
mutica, &. Brown; 363
ruta, R. Brown; 368
var. Mitchelli
longifoha, R. Brown; 364
vittata, Lind.; 364
Acianthus exsertus, R. Brown; 370
H

M

M

M
M

M

M

&

a

[ce]

aaa agagnagagnga 8

Oa aa s

d

d

ad
d
d

ad

VARA

=)

82

Eriochilus autumnalis, R. Brown; 372
Lyperanthus nigricans, R. Brown ; 374
Cyrtostylis reniformis, R. Brown ; 376
Caladenia Menziesi, R. Brown; 379
Patersoni, R. Brown; 381
var. filamentosa, 2. Brown; 381
latifolia, R. Brown; 384
earnea, 2. Brown; 886
deformis, R. Brown; 3888
Glossodia major, R. Brown; 392
minor, &. Brown; 392

Iripp® (Fl. Aust., vol. VL.)

Patersonia glauca, R. Brown; 402
longiscapa, Sweet; 402
Sisyrinchium eyaneum, Lind.; 410

AMARYLLIDE® (FI. Aust., vol. VI.)

Hypoxis hygrometrica, Labill.; 449
elabella, R. Brown ; 450
var. pusilla; 450
Crinum flaccidum, Herb.; 454
pedunculatum, 2. Brown; 455
Calostemma purpureum, R. Brown ; 457
luteum, Sims; 457

Lri1acre# (FI. Aust., vol. VIT.)

Dianella levis, R. Brown; 14
revoluta, R. Brown; 15
Wurmbsea dioica, / J7.; 29
Burchardia umbellata, R. Brown ; 33
Bulbine bulbosa, Haw.; 34
semibarbata, Haw.; 35
Thysanotus tuberosus, #. Brown; 41
exasperatus, #. JL; 42
Baueri, R. Brown; 42
Patersoni, R. Brown; 43
dichotomus, PR. Brown; 44
Caesia vittata, R. Brown; 46
parviflora, R. Brown; 47
Chamescilla corymbosa, &. Brown; 48
Tricoryne elatior, &. Brown; 52
Arthropodium paniculatum, R. Brown; 56
minus, Rk. Brown; 56
Dichopogon strictus, Rk. Brown ; ‘58
Sieberianus, Kunth: 59
Bartlingia sessiliflora, FB MM, : 66

Cc

M

M

M

M

M

a

a

a

a
a

a

Qo on

a

a aoa 8

SO F &

Sana ana s

d
d
d
d

dik

d
d

d

k

k

83

XYRIDE® (Fl. Aust., vol. VII.)

Xyris operculata, Labill.; 79
gracilis, &. Brown; 79

Narapen (Fl. Aust., vol. VIT.)

Triglochin striata, Ruiz & Pav.; 166
centrocarpa, Hooker; 167
mucronata, 2. Brown; 168
procera, &. Brown; 168

Potamogeton natans, Linné; 170
erispus, Linné ; 172
obtusifolius, Mert. & Koch; 172
acutifolius, Link; 173
pectinatus, Linné; 173

Ruppia maritima, Linné; 174

Posidonia australis, Hooker; 175

Zostera nana, Mertens; 176

marina, Linn., var.angustifolia; 176

Cymodocea antarctica, Endl.; 177

Lepilena Preissii, #. Jf; 180

Naias tenuifolia, R. Brown; 181

Lemyace® (FI. Aust., vol. VIL.)

Lemna trisulea, Linné; 162
minor, Linné; 163
oligorrhiza, Kurz; 163

TypHacem (FI. Aust., vol. VIL.)

Typha angustifolia, Linné; 159
Muelleri, Rohrbach; 160, Fg. vii., 116

Patm® (Fl. Aust., vol. VII.)
Livistona Marie, F. 1; Frag. xi., 54

Juncace® (Fl. Aust., vol. VII.)

Xerotes longifolia, Labill.; 97
dura, F. A.; 97
Brown, #. W.; Frag. vii, 206
sororia, &. M.; 100
glauca, Rk. Brown; 105
effusa, Lind.; 102 .
micrantha, Hndl.; 108
filiformis, R. Brown; 103
elongata, Benth.; 106
juncea, Ff. J.; 108
leucocephala, R. Brown; 109

Q

Qa

Cc

M/E

ea angaaas

d

Ss

d
d

aaagagangs
Q

k

84

Xanthorrhea minor, R. Brown; 114:
semiplana, /”, J.; 115
australis, R. Brown; 116
quadrangulata, # Jf; 117
Calectasia cyanea, R. Brown; 121
Luzula campestris, De Cand.; 123
Juncus planifolius, R. Brown ; 125
cespititius, LH. Mey.; 126
bufonius, Linné; 127
communis, #. Mey.; 128
pauciflorus, R. Brown; 129
pallidus, &. Brown ; 130
maritimus, Lamarck ; 1380
prismatocarpus, 2. Brown; 131

[Restracem® (FI. Aust., vol. VII.)

Lepyrodia Muelleri, Benth.; 215
Restio tetraphyllus, Ladbzll.; 228
Leptocarpus tenax, R. Brown; 232
Brownu, J. Hooker; 233
Calastrophus fastigiatus, /. J2.; 239
Lepidobolus drapetocoleus, / J7.; 245

CENTROLEPIDER (FI. Aust., vol. VII.)

Trithuria submersa, J. Hooker ; 199
Aphelia gracilis, Sond.; 201
pumilio, # JL; 201
Centrolepis polygyna, Hieron ; 203
glabra, #. I; 205
aristata, Roem. & Schult.; 206
fascicularis, Labill.; 207
strigosa, Roem. & Schult.; 207

CrrErRAce® (Fl. Aust., vol. VIL.)

~ Kyllnga monocephala, Rofttb.; 251

Cyperus eragrostis, Vahl.; 258
pygmeus, ottb.; 262
squarrosus, Linné ; 268
difformis, Linné; 268
trinervis, R. Brown ; 269
vaginatus, 2. Brown; 272
holoschcenus, R. Brown ; 273
Gilesii, Benth.; 274
fulvus, R. Brown; 274
alterniflorus, R. Brown ; 275
Tria, Linné; 276
diphyllus, Retz; 279

M

M
M

M

& &

Se &

aS oS

io)

io)

S a ona O©Qaoaagees

ao

d

d

85

Cyperus rotundus, Linné; 279
subulatus, f. Brown; 281
Gunniana, Hooker; 288
exaltatus, Retz; 285

Heleocharis sphacelata, &. Brown; 292

acuta, R. Brown ; 294:
multicaulis, Smith ; 295
Fimbristylis velata, 2. Brown; 309
diphylla, Vahl; 311
barbata, Benth.; 321

Scirpus fluitans, Linne; 325
setaceus, Linné ; 327
riparius, Spreng.; 327
cartilagineus, Spreng.; 328
inundatus, Spreng.; 329
supinus, Linné ; 330
nodosus, Rofth.; 331
pungens, Vahl.; 338
lacustris, Linné; 333
maritimus, Linné; 385

Lipocarpha microcephala, Kunth; 337

Chorisandra enodis, Nees ; 344

Schcenus nitens, J. Hooker; 362
Tepperi, #. 17.; Frag. xi., 106
brevitolius, &. Brown; 370
melanostachys, R. Brown ; 370
Brownii, J. Hooker; 373
axillaris, J. Hooker; 375

Lepidosperma gladiatum, Labill.; 387

elatius, Labill.; 388
concavum, . Brown; 390
viscidum, fe. Brown; 398
laterale, R. Brown ; 393
congestum, 2. Brown ; 394
semiteres, #. IZ.; 396
canescens, Beckheler ; 396
filiforme, Labill.; 398
carphoides, #. JZ.; 400

Cladium marisecus, 2. Brown; 402
articulatum, R. Brown; 403
glomeratum, R. Brown; 404
tetraquetrum, Hooker ; 406
Gunn, Hooker; 407
junceum, &. Brown; 408
filum, R. Brown; 409
lanigerum, R. Brown; 415
deustum, R. Brown; 416

M

Mi

a

a oa

aS

ao

aoa nago aaa S

Qa oa Qs

Que & GS

d

d

d
d

d

86

Cladium psittacorum, / JL; 418

Carex inversa, 2. Brown; 438
chlorantha, 2. Brown; 440
paniculata, Linné ; 440
tereticaulis, #. WZ.; 441
vulgaris, Fries; 442
pumila, Zhunb.; 445
Gunniana, Boott; 446
pseudocyperus, Linné; 448

GRraMiIne® (FI. Aust., vol. VII.)

Panicum ccenicolum, #. JL; 467
divaricatissimum, Rk. Brown; 467
leucophoum, H. B. & K.; 472
gracile, R. Brown ; 475
Gilesii, Benth.; 477
distachyum, Linné; 478
reversum, / M.; 478
adspersum, Zrin.; 481
pauciflorum, 2. Brown ; 483
effusum, R. Brown; 488
decompositum, 2. Brown; 489
prolutum, #. JZ; 490

Setaria glauca, Linné; 492

viridis, Linné; 494
refracta, F. JL; 494

Spinifex hirsutus, Labill.; 508
paradoxus, R. Brown ; 504

Lappago racemosa, Willd.; 506

Neurachne alopecuroides, R. Brown ; 507

Mitchelliana, Mees ; 508
Munroi, & 1.; 508

Hemarthia compressa, 2. Brown; 510

Erianthus fulvus, Awnth; 526

Andropogon sericeus, 2. Brown ; 529

pertusus, Willd.; 530
annulatus, R. Brown; 531
intermedius, Forst.; 539
laniger, Desf; 533
Gryllus, Linné; 537
Imperata arundinacea, Cyr.; 536
Anthistiria ciliata, Linné; 542
avenacea, # MW.; 543
membranacea, Lind.; 543

Ehrharta stipoides, Labzll.; 552

Aristidia stipoides, &. Brown; 561
arenaria, Gaud.; 561

eye) ©) CY ©

Q

M
M

M

wz

Se &

eee

a

a oa as

(el

is)

d

87

Aristidia Behriana, / J7.; 562
ealycina, A. Brown ; 563

Stipa elegantissima, Labill.; 565
flavescens, Labill.; 566
erinita, Gaud.; 567
setacea, 2. Brown; 568
semibarbata, R. Brown; 568
pubescens, &. Brown; 569
aristiglumis, F. J2.; 570

Pentapogon Billardieri, R. Brown ; 572

Dichelachne crinita, J. Hooker ; 574
Agrostis Solandri, # df; 579, &e.
quadriseta, &. Brown; 581
venusta, Trin. ; 576
scabra, PR. Brown; 583
montana, &. Brown; 581
densa, F. W.; 582
Deschampsia cespitosa, Linné; 587
- Amphibromus Neesii, Stewd.; 589
Amphipogon strictus, R. Brown; 597
Echinopogon ovatus, G. Forst.; 599
Pappophorum commune, # M/.; 601
Astrebla pectinata, #. J.; 602
triticoides, F. M.; 602
Triraphis mollis, &. Brown; 603
Cynodon dactylon, Pers.; 609
ciliaris, Benth.; 610
convergens, # M/.; 610
Chloris pectinata, Benth.; 612
divaricata, R. Brown; 612
acicularis, Lind.; 612
truncata, R. Brown; 612
barbata, Sw.; 613
Eleusine cruciata, Lamarck ; 615
subdigitata, F. W.; 617
Sporobolus virginicus, Awnth; 621
var. pallida
indicus, R. Brown; 622
actinocladus, F. A/.; 623
Eriachne aristidea, F. JZ.; 629
ovata, ees ; 630
scleranthoides, #. JZ.; 631
obtusa, Rk. Brown; 6382
Phragmites communis, Jrin.; 636
Roxburghi, Awnth
Distichlis maritima, Rafin.; 637

Elytrophorus articulatus, Beawv.; 638

M,

M |}

M|

M

M|

M

Be

a

M

M

[E

a

a

a

a

a

a
a

a

aS aS

d
d

Oo as

a

d

a aoa s

88

Eragrostis tenella, Beaur.; 643
trichophylla, Benth.; 644
leptocarpa, Benth.; 644
pilosa, Beawv.; 645 ©
diandra, R. Brown; 646
concinna, Steud.; 647
speciosa, Steud.; 648
laniflora, Benth.; 648
chetophylla, Steud.; 648
lacunaria, / J/.; 649
faleata, Gaud.; 649

Poa cespitosa, G. Forst.; 651

nodosa, Nees; 653
lepida, A. JL; 654
Fordeana, F. J.; 657
fluitans, Linné, sp.; 657
syrtica, F M.; 658
ramigera, Ff. M.; 659

Schedonorus littoralis, Beawv.; 655

Bromus arenarius, Labill.; 661

Festuca fusca, Linné; 619

loliiformis, #. A7.; 618

Triodia pungens, ft. Brown; 606

irritans, R. Brown; 607

Diplachne Muelleri, Benth.; 619

Danthonia penicillata, #. 1f.; 592

Agropyrum scabrum, Beauv.; 665

Lepturus cylindricus, Trin.; 668

incurvatus, Trin.; 663

ACOTYLEDONE.

LycoropiacE& (FI. Aust., vol. VII.)

Lycopodium densum, Labill.; 676
Selaginella Preissiana, Spring ; 677
uliginosa, Spring; 678
Azolla pinnata, #. Brown; 679
filiculoides, Lamarck ; 680

MarsitnEacez (Fl. Aust., vol. VII.)
Marsilea quadrifolia, Linné; 683
Finices (Fl. Aust., vol. VII.)

Ophioglossum vulgatum, Linné ; 688
Schizea bifida, Swartz ; 698
Gleichenia circinata, Swartz; 697

(er ee) Cue}

(S}

Qe Cer ee

M

M)

a

a

Oa as

d

d
ad

89

Todea barbara, 7. Moore; 699
Dicksonia antarctica, Labill.; 712
Lindsea linearis, Swartz; 719
Adiantum ethiopicum, Linné; 724
hispidulum, Swartz; 725
Cheilanthes tenuifolia, Swartz; 726
vellea, #. M.; 773
distans, A. Braun; 774
Pteris aquilina, Linné; 732
incisa, Thunb.; 732
Lomaria discolor, Willd.; 735
lanceolata, Spreng.; 735
capensis, Willd.; 737
Asplenium flabellifolium, Cav.; 745
fureatum, Thunb.; 747
bulbiferum, Forst.; 748
Aspidium molle, Swartz; 756
decompositum, Spreng.; 758
Polypodium punctatum, Thunb.; 764
Grammitis Reynoldsi, # W.; 775
rutefolia, R. Brown; 775
leptophylla, Swartz ; 776

SUPPLEMENTAL LIST OF SPECIES.

CRUCIFERD.
Barbarea vulgaris, R. Brown; 66

CaPPARIDER.
Capparis spinosa, Linné; 94 (nummularia)
CARYOPHYLLER.
Drymaria filiformis, Benth.; 162
EUPHORBIACES.
Phyllanthus rhytidospermus, F. Jf; 100

SAPINDACER.
Dodonza lanceolata, 7 I; 475
Tepperi, # J. (m.s.)
CHENOPODIACES.
Kochia humillima, F. 1; Frag. ix., 168
Fricowers.
Trianthema humillima, F. Jf; Frag. x., 738
I

Q

Q

Q

Q

S &

Qa aas

k

d

d

d

90

UMBELLIFERZ.
Hydrocotyle rugulosa, Turez.; 344 d

LEGUMINOS &.
Crotalaria medicaginea, Willd.; 183
Indigofera linifolia, Retz.; 195
Tephrosia purpurea, Pers.; 209
Rhynchosia minima, De Cand. ; 267 Cc

N.B.—The total number of species contained in the foregoing lists is 1,599.

aaa

‘

ADDENDA TO GEOGRAPHICAL COLUMNS.

Region M. Clematis microphylla; Hibbertia densiflora, HZ.
acicularis ; Drosera glanduligera, D. Whittakeri ;
Poranthera microphylla; Adriana quadripartita ;
Geranium dissectum; Pelargonium australe ;
Zygophyllum ammophilwn ; Swainsona lessertiifolia ;
Kennedya prostrata; Alchemilla arvensis; Tillea
verticillaris ; Callitriche verna; Cotula australis ;
Gnaphalium Japonicum; Stuartina Muelleri;
Myoporum viscosum ; Marsilea quadrifolia.

Region C. <Abutilon Fraseri ; Claytonia corrigiolacea ; Chenolea
paradoxa.

Region 8 c. Hibbertia acicularis.

Region S d. Geococcus pusillus; Eucalyptus dumosa; Claytonia
pygmea; Stylidiwum calearatum ; Centrolepis
aristata; and 16 others, for which see Mr.
Tepper’s Supplement to Plants about Ardrossan.

The figures in the tables on pages 49 and 50 are no longer cor-
rect; but asthe deductions based upon them are not materially
affected by the new reading, a revision of them is deferred to a
future occasion. In the meanwhile, the compiler solicits the

assistance of all botanists to make the geographical lists as
complete as possible.

ERRATA

p. 54, line 21, for trachspermus read trachyspermus.
line 25, for Sand. read Gaud.
p. 71, line 10, for 540 read 549.

91

THE *‘ BAY OF BISCAY” SOIL
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA, AND ITS FORMATION.

By Orro Trrrer, F.L.S., Corr. Member.
[Read June 1, 1880.]

INTRODUCTORY CITATION.

“«T may remark in connection with the clays overlying the Miocene lime-
stone that it is on their surfaces that the ‘ Bay of Biscay’ land prevails.
This name is applied to tracts covered with mounds or ridges grouped in the
most irregular way, and without any relation to the natural slope of the
surface. The ridges, which rarely exceed a foot in height, are composed of
clay, while the depressions are occupied by alluvium or sandy loam; and
though it is generally held that the soil of the depressions extend in depth,
yet my observations are totally opposed to that view. How the depressions
have been formed on the clay soil, and how they have been partially filled,
are questions which, I hope, will occupy the attention of some member of
this Society.”—Prof. R. Tate, F.G.S.; President’s Anniversary Address
Trans. A. Phil. Soc., 1878-9, page lx.

In many parts of South Australia a clayey soil occurs, which
is popularly called by the above name, and is justly regarded
by most people as one of the most productive. Among other
localities we meet it in the undulating Tertiary regions north of
Gawler, in the neighbourhood of Tanunda, Greenock, Sheaoak
Log, Freeling (villages north of Adelaide), and extending far
beyond Kapunda. Again, the same soil is found in small
patches near Ardrossan, Yorke’s Peninsula. Maitland, in the
centre of the same peninsula, is surrounded by it, from whence
it stretches into the neighbouring hundreds. In fact, it is
found toa greater or less extent in many counties, but the
above localities have been examined by me.

Tts most characteristic feature is the unevenness of its sur-
face, forming shallow round depressions 6 to 18 inches in
depth, and without an outlet. These arc surrounded by eleva-
tions of varying width, sometimes forming almost ridges, at
others equalling or exceeding the depressions in area. The
sides are never steep; but frequently one incline is longer than
the other, then the shorter one is also the steeper. We meet
this surface formation on the broad gently-rounded summit of
hills, as well as on almost level gradually rising plains, bounded

92

on two or three sides by lower ground; and sometimes on the
inclines of the hills.

Under the last-mentioned circumstances the said inclines are
either very gradual or in terraces. As long as the ground
remains in its pristine state, very few or no watercourse are
distinguishable ; those found are very wide, shallow, and carry
very little water. But as soon as the continuity of the turf,
noted for its luxuriance, is broken by the farmer’s plough, the
traveller’s dray, or an exceptionally heavy thunderstorm, the
bed rapidly deepens, on account of the peculiar nature of the
soil, and in a short time assumes respectable dimensions,
specially remarkable for the steepness of its banks. If not
carefully attended to, the denudation proceeds at so rapid a
rate that perhaps in less than a century the whole surface of
these regions would, for a considerable depth, be carried out
to sea. The cause of this lies in the constitution of the soil.
It consists of a dark-red or brown clay, containing much lime
and a little fine gravel. Some portions are almost black, other
patches grey or bluish. The former occupy generally a part of
the elevation and inner slope, sometimes the lowest part also ;
the latter the remaining part of the slope, generally that facing
the higher level of the whole area. However, even where the
differences in colour are less marked, a newly-ploughed field of
virgin soil of this description presents, when viewed from some
distance, always a curious irregularly mottled appearance.

When dry the whole surface is scored in every direction by
numerous cracks, often from one to two inches wide, and
extending to a considerable depth. The light-coloured patches
are much less affected than the darker, but all are rendered in
proportion more or less friable and yielding to a most fatiguing
extent for weary travellers, &c., and ina very short time the
feet of animals and the wheels of vehicles triturate it into
incredibly minute particles, forming clouds of dust. If a
heavy shower of rain fall for an hour or two the whole surface
is changed into an exceedingly adhesive mire, heavily clogging
feet and wheels with tough pug. Owing to the uneven
surface the water is detained, and a large quantity at once
percolates through the larger and smaller cracks, carrying
with it a considerable moiety of the loose soil to some depth,
and widening the channel in the descent. In the narrower
portions of the latter, grass leaves, stray pebbles, &c., will be
arrested, and will prevent the closing of the fissure, when the
clay expands on saturation, and will facilitate its reopening
when the clay shrinks on drying. Actual repeated obser-
vations seem to demonstrate that at least the larger of these
fissures do open year after year, and are productive at
times of rather practical annoyances. Thusa large crack through

93

two opposite walls eighteen inches thick in a house of an ac-
quaintance opens out wide every summer and contracts closely
every winter. Some large cracks had been observed in the
ground before building but were regarded as superficial
merely. Whence do these fissures lead ? Direct observations
prove that these adhesive clays are succeeded by layers of
limestone concretions, gravel beds, decaying calcareous slates,
&e. Asall these are very porous, they afford easy channels
for the drainage of the surface waters and the materials
carried in a comminuted state by the same, and thus surface
watercourses are rendered unnecessary. If this process be
frequently repeated, as is no doubt the case every year, it
follows that the friable, fertile soil around the vents must
gradually diminish, and shallow depressions be formed in the
course of time, slower or faster, as local circumstances favour.
Only one instance remarkable for rapidity of effect can be
cited. Ina “ Bay of Biscay soil” region, on a somewhat steep
slope descending from New Mecklenburg plain towards the
River North Para, west of Tanunda, a hole was noticed in the
ground after a heavy rain; its diameter was about three
inches, the depth rather more, the sides steep. A small rill
of flood-water escaped into it, without overflowing in the
direction of the steep banks of a brooklet some 20 or 30 yards
distant. This insignificant vent gradually widened, and in
less than two years had augmented to three feet in depth, and
over four feet diameter.

The conclusions deduced from the foregoing are:—(1) If
the subterranean vents be relatively few, the depressions
will be correspondingly apart; (2) the longer the time has
been during which operations as described have been carried
on, the narrower will be the ridges between the depressions ;
(3) the more friable the soil the steeper will be the slopes;
(4) if the fissures be very small, numerous, and equally
distributed, assuming uniform porosity of the subsoil also,
none or very shallow depressions will be formed, because
every part of the area will be reduced simultaneously at the
same rate nearly. Thus the depth and distribution of the
depressions depend on inequality of distribution and size of
the temporary fissures, the friability of the soil, the porosity
of the subsoil, and time.

If the nature of the soil is such as to admit of very rapid
expansion, and consequent long detention of the muddy
waters, a fine sediment will collect in the bottom, which,
drying hard when exposed, will at last prevent any deep
fissures from forming, and thus constitute what in colonial
parlance are termed “claypans’’—a blessing for all regions
destitute of permanent springs. Some of these are scattered in

94.

the dense mallee scrub between Ardrossan, Yorke Valley, and
Kalkabury upon gently inclined flats, and their immediate
neighbourhood is at once made manifest by a distinct vegeta-
tion, including Hucalyptus incrassata, Callestemon coceineus,
Juncus pallidus, and J. bufonius, &e., which depend on the
greater moisture there obtainable. Ina similar manner even
lakelets of some extent may be formed anew by the closing
or chocking up of the subterranean vents for draining off the
rainwater. Thus since about 1852, an almost permanent sheet of
water has covered an area of some 120 acres at Hoffnungsthal,
near Lyndoch, which had been farmed for several years and
produced some splendid crops of wheat. The soil consisted of
deep black loam—friable when dry, stiff and adhesive when
wet. Under this a yellow arenaceous clay followed, becoming
more and more gravelly at increased depths, till at sixteen to
twenty feet brackish water stopped further sinking. This
basin, inclosed on three sides by high hills of micaceous slates,
hornblende schists, quartzites, &c., and at the fourth by a
small rising plain, through which at a distance of about a mile
a brook flowed, whose bed was at a higher level than that of the
basin, had been overgrown with grass and numerous eucalypts,
and never observed to contain stagnant water while in its
natural state. The drainage received from a considerable area
for the locality no doubt then escaped by numerous under-

round channels, which were choked when the farmers’ plough
broke the turf and produced more sediment than could be
carried along. The first inundation lasted some three months
only, when the ground became sufficiently dry for another
crop, which grew most luxuriantly, till in the succeeding
August it was overwhelmed again by the water in augmented
quantity. But only the third year beheld its permanency, the
water henceforth being only removed by evaporation. This
fact, together with the death of the trees after the first flood,
proves the gradual closing of the underground outlets (caused
by the stirring of the soil), and thereby the correctness of the
theory. Some people believed that the opening of the subter-
ranean springs (according to the popular but fallacious idea
that tillage, &c., facilitates their increase) was the cause, but
this would demand complicated phenomena, the occurrence of
which to assume is not warranted in the slightest degree by
the surrounding country. It is to be mentioned that out of
six or seven wells sunk around the margin only two contained
fresh water, the rest so brackish as scarcely to be fit for cattle.
The flood water was at first quite fresh, but in the course of
years assumed a more and more saline character, and now the
whole has the general aspect of an ordinary salt lagoon. The
above naturally suggests that this and similar other areas in

95

great number, containing rich black soil, but vitiated by the
accumulation of salts, might frequently be reclaimed under
proper scientific guidance (and with small expense considering
the value of such lands), but of this our paternal colonial
Government is still very impatient, trusting rather to amateurs,
who call themselves ‘“ practical.”

Returning after this digression touching the origin of clay-
pans and salt lagoons to the “ Bay of Biscay” soil it will be
noted that an attempt has been made to show and prove that
its peculiar surface configuration is due to denudation, vertically
downwards, the lateral motion of the waters being retarded or
prevented altogether (temporarily, at least) by the nature of
the soil; and, it is hoped, this task has been accomplished

satisfactorily.

The question now arises, Where and how has this peculiar
soil been formed originally ? and to which geological period
does it appertain ?

Replying to this latter question first, for the sake of conve-
nience, this soil seems to belong, in the areas examined at least,
chiefly to the Tertiary and Post-Tertiaries, extending to the
most recent near the sea-coast.

Whether the former was formed by ice action or atmospheric
influences, so much seems sure to an observer of the littoral
mudbanks and salt marshes around the head of St. Vincent’s
Gulf that originally the ‘‘Bay of Biscay” soil must have
originated in a similar manner and under similar circumstances
—that is to say, that in the writer's opinion the present ‘‘ Bay
of Biscay” lands were the mudflats and marshes of former
periods. The extensive lowlands around the head of St.
Vincent’s Gulf, in the neighbourhood of Port Wakefield, the
recent marine origin of which is undoubted, afford a good
illustration, and may be called growing “Bay of Biscay ”’
lands, the great unevenness of the former being the exaggerated
unfinished form of the latter.

Studying localities like the above we find that, while slowly
rising above the sea-level, irregular low ridges are formed
through exceptionally high tides by deposits of seaweeds, sand,
mud, &c., enclosing depressions of various dimensions, fre-
quently retaining part of the flood-waters. When permanently
established, these depressions, for some time, gradually are
filled up by the dense growth and decay of plants like Salicornia
arbuscula, the blowing in of sands, dust, weeds, &e., and the
inward pressure of the denser ridges., The shells decay, their
lime is dissolved and removed by the water, charged with car-
bonice acid, obtained from decaying vegetable remains. The
soil only admitting the downward motion of the water to a
certain depth, part of the lime is reprecipitated as tabular or

96

globular concretions. Augmenting through long period, these
layers consolidate to a greater or less extent, and give consis-
tency to the subsoil. When examined, they always show their
upper portion to be the hardest and firmest, presenting some
openings of variable size at irregular distances, through which
the surface drainage alone can escape. These openings, col-
lecting the waters and thereby facilitating the formation of
subterranean channels, will be found to be where the percola-
tion of the water is most abundant—.e., below the depres-
sions ; but also elsewhere, if the former be far apart, as other
circumstances favour the escape of surface water, and wherever
such exist, there in the course of time a hollow will be formed
by the gradual removal of part of the soil directly above the
place. Thus we come to the same conclusions as those arrived
at from a different starting point.

The generally black colour of the soil in these mud-flats is
caused by the carbon of decaying organisms and imperfectly
oxygenised iron, as proved when exposed to red heat. Both
ingredients change simultaneously through the chemical
action of the water. The iron taking up more oxygen assumes
the characteristic colour, and imparts it to the soil; the carbon
is turned into carbonic acid and removed. The latter occurs
most rapidly in the depressions. The acidulated water removes
a part—or the whole, in small patches—of the iron oxide, re-
depositing it at lower levels, viz., among buried sands and
gravels, cementing them into ferruginous sandstones and con-
glomerates (assisted, no doubt, by soluble silicates obtained
from the same sources), or forming beds or patches of loose
lapill-like concretions with polished exterior surface, some-
times exploding with a tiny crash when thrown in the fire.
Operations like the foregoing when acting through long periods
may be safely assumed as quite capable to produce all the
results in changing the surface aspect of large areas as de-
scribed, and although one cannot watch them at any one place,
yet their respective stages can be observed at different iocal-
ities. According to this the black portions of the “ Bay of
Biscay’ soil are considered to be due to some unremoyed
carbon, &c.; the reddish parts to ferric oxide; the light-coloured
parts either to the entire absence of either, or the super-
abundance of lime; both causes render them less suited for
vegetable growth till supplied with mould from the neighbouring
more productive regions.

If downward denudation be very rapid, as in some parts of
the coast plain near Ardrossan, even the greater part of the
clay may have disappeared from the ridges, and only some
mixed with mould be left in the depressions. In this case the
former will be the more barren portions, consisting of smal

97

limestone concretions, sandy clay, &c., and besides obtain
less moisture, the water being collected and retained by the
hollows. These, therefore, exhibit a denser growth of grass
and herbs, and consequently an accumulation of mould.

To account for the different inclinations which the ‘‘ Bay of
Biscay” soil shows, an unequal, but else regular, elevation of
the whole area is required ; but the various inclines may also
have been produced by differential denudation, the latter being
more rapidly carried on where the soil operated on was thickest,
and thus the valleys scooped out between the hills; on the sides
of the hills a part of the soil was left, which originally occupied
different levels.

In proof of the theory advanced as to the origin of this
peculiar soil, a few observations will be cited. In the neigh-
bourhood of ‘“ Bay of Biscay” regions extensive patches of fine
white sand are found, generally overgrown by dense scrub ;
but occasionally holes are found blown out by wind, in which
are left all heavier ingredients. Amongst these the writer has
sometimes found fragments of large shells. Being 30 to 40
miles from the next sea-shore, their carriage thence by human
agency is, at least, very improbable. Whether these sands be
assigned to a marine or lacustrine origin is immaterial, as that
would not affect the final result. Underlying these sands and
the “ Bay of Biscay” clays, are frequently found thin layers of
ferruginous sandstones and conglomerates, destitute of fossils
(except some cavities resembling those left by the removal of
large shells or echinids, and some fossilized wood), fringing the
respective regions to a great extent, they are found neither to
retain the same direction (part denudation), nor the same level
(inequality of elevation) ; never of great vertical thickness,
they are penetrated by numerous perpendicular smooth fissures,
partly filled with fine oxide of iron and small round holes,
through which the rainwater penetrates to the underlying beds.
The latter consist of gravels and sand, in some places that were
examined; in others of an arenaceous clay strongly impreg-
nated by saline substances, impure salt forming numerous small
veins and nests therein. Below these again purplish ferruginous
shales of a peculiar wavy structure follow invariably where
examined near Nuriootpa, Tanunda, and Greenock.

The latter observations were first made by the writer in
1876-7, and if the saline clays should prove a general feature
in connection with the “Bay of Biscay”’ soil, their discovery
would reveal the cause why wells in such regions always
produce salt-water. The whole series rests unconformable
upon paleozoic rocks of pre-silurian age.

Having first shown, by assuming an originally level surface,
that the physical properties of this soil admitted and necessitated

95

its present surface configuration, through the operation of
simple natural causes, and then referred to the forming of the
soil as a marine or lacustrine sediment in sheltered and
gradually rising localities, and followed the various changes to
some extent, with some proofs that the requisite products
really do exist where to be expected—it is hoped that the
foregoing pages may prove sufficient as a basis (temporary,
at least) whereon to ground a more perfect explanation after
extended observations by abler minds.

99

ON SOME

NEW CORALS FROM THE AUSTRALIAN
TERTIARIES.

By the Rev. J. E. Tentson Woops, F.G.S8., F.L.S., President
of Lin. Soc., N.S.W.; Hon. Member.

[Read July 6, 1880.]

I propose to describe in this paper three new fossil corals.
The first two were sent to me by Professor Tate, and are those
referred to by him in his paper on the “ Natural History of
the Country around the Head of the Great Australian Bight’’
(Trans. Phil. Soc., Adelaide, 1879), at p. 107, in the following
terms :—“ Mr. J. Clark, telegraph-master at Eucla, has pre-
sented to me a few fossils and stones picked up by him on the
surface [of the Bunda Plateau] at Fairlie’s last camp, 80 miles
N.N.E. from Eucla. The fossils* are undoubtedly older Ter-
tiary, and though their tests are calcedonized and deeply
stained with oxide of iron, yet as the matrix is a yellow
crystalline limestone, I would refer them to the horizon of the
upper bed of the Bunda Cliffs.’ This deposit he correlates
with the upper set of fossiliferous beds of the R. Murray
Cliffs, and with the Muddy Creek Miocene strata.

It will be seen from the following remarks that both the
species are decidedly tropical in aspect. One belongs to a
genus which is only known in the tropics; and whilst the other
has representatives in the temperate seas of Australia, yet none
of the existing species are of such a large size, and none of the
forms peculiar to the temperate seas are in any way similar.
These fossils form another link in the chain of evidence as to
the semi-tropical character of the fauna of our Tertiary seas.
They are certainly to be ranked as amongst the most interesting
discoveries made, though the whole of our radiate Tertiary
fauna is replete with features of interest and novelty.

In the section of tabular Madreporaria there are four
families—two with great development of ccoenenchyma (Mille-
poride and Seriatoporide) and two with little or none (Favosi-
tide and Thecide). The Milleporide have a tabular foliaceous
or massive ccenenchyma, and the Seriatoporide have the same
structure compact; there are four genera in the latter :—

*The species are—Cerithium Nullarboricum, Tate; Plesiastrea, sp., and
Seriatopora, sp.

100

Denpropora—Coenenchyma smooth, calices scattered.

TrachHyrora—Ceenenchyma vermiculate.

Rwasporora—Coenenchyma finely hispid, calices serial, septa
very distinct.

SERIATOPORA—NSepta scarcely visible.

The genus Seriatopora is thus defined—Corallum aborescent ;
cenenchyma finely hispid; calices disposed in an ascending
series ; columella large, compact, and placed in the direction of
the axis of the branches; visceral chambers obliterated com-
pletely in the course of growth.

It is doubtful whether there are ten species in all of this
genus, but it is one of the most common on all the barrier reefs
of Australia; and probably Seriatopora subulata is the most
extensively distributed throughout the Pacific and Australian
seas. There are no fossil forms known to me, unless those
which may occur in the raised beaches on the coast of Java.
The discovery of the present fossil (herein described as Serza-
topora antiqua) in the Australian Tertiaries is a fact of great
interest, especially as it has been found in a latitude far out-
side where any reef-building corals exist now.

Seriatopora antiqua, spec. nov.

The fragment is evidently a portion of a broad, compressed,
and coalescent branch, resulting from the union of smaller
ones, as in S. swbulata. The branches are hollow. The canen-
chyma is very hard and compact, and shows no traces of struc-
ture where broken; it is much worn, but here and there
exhibits traces of its hispid character in numerous worn

granules. Calices about one millimetre in diameter, very
close, surrounded by a raised ring, rather deep. Colwmella of

the form of a large rounded tubercle, much higher than the
septa, which are six in number, visible, but not conspicuously
SO. /

The fragment is 25 millimetres long, ten thick, and fifteen
wide ; but there are also projections like the terminations of
branches.

In the size of the calices and the distinctness of the septa,
the species resembles Seriatopora spinosa, Ehrenberg, which is
found in the Red Sea.

Plesiastrea grandis, spec. nov.

Oorallum a much-worn fragment, about 65 millimetres high,
75 wide, and from 20 to 25 thick. The fragment is broken, so
as to expose the plan of the calices and every kind of section.
Corallites evidently radiating in a convex manner from a
central disc; they are long, closely packed, and united by a

101

very abundant exotheca. Calices circular; septa in four cycles,
three of which are of equal length. There are no calices
sufficiently perfect to show the pali; but in section the septa
are all much thickened close to the columella, which seems to
have been compact. Hndotheca very abundant, curved up-
wards from the columella, and showing eight or ten transverse
partitions to each of the loculi. Coste continuous with the
septa, those belonging to the first cycle being very long, and
showing no break at the wall, but passing through it into the
septa. Sometimes, though rarely, the cost are confluent with
the coste of the neighbouring ealice, but in this case there is
always a thin lamina of epitheca, which forms in section a
secondary wall. The internal edges of the septa appear to
have been dentate. The endotheca and exotheca are about
equally abundant, and the fourth cycle of septa is rudimentary
in some of the systems, and very small in all.

Diameter of calices, seven to eight millimetres.

I have already described one fossil species of Plesiastrea,
P. St. Vincenti (Trans. Phil. Soc., Adelaide, 1878, p. 116), but
it is much smaller than this species. The genus may be said to
be almost an Australian one, and the discovery of two fossil
species entitle it still more to this character. The present
species is quite tropical in aspect, and would form reefs. It is
unusually hard and compact in texture, and, like the fossil
previously described, it is very ferruginous, which is not the
case with P. St. Vincenti. The details are not very satisfac-
torily seen, but other specimens will doubtless be discovered in
the course of time.

Microtrochus minutus, spec. nov.; Pl. iv., figs. 3a—3b.

The third species of coral here to be noticed is a minute
fossil adhering to the base of a Lwnulite from the Miocene beds
of Muddy Creek. It probably belongs to the second or epithe-
cated division of Trochosmiliacee,-but being in a young state
not anything very definite about its position can be stated,
though I do not think it belongs to any described.

Corallum minute, not a millimetre in height, attached by
one side to the base of Lwnulites cupola, mihi; rather higher
than broad. Side with six distinct coste, which are larger
towards the end. About half way up they are concealed by
concentric layers of rugose epitheca, through which the cost
are faintly visible. Calice nearly circular, uneven at the
edge. Septa twelve in number, undulating, sparsely spinous,
finely granular, with toothed uneven edges. Colwmella repre-
sented by three or four twisted processes, which are joined to
the septa. Hndotheca doubtful, but apparently existing
between some of the lower septa.

102

DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME

NEW SPECIES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIAN
PULMONIFERA.

By Prorsessor Ratpx Tarr, A.LS., F.G.S., &c., President.
[Read July 6, 1880.]

Ancylus Australicus, spec. nov. Plate iv., figs. 4a—4b.

Shell pale, thin, and delicate; conic depressed, lengthened ;
sides subrectilinear or slightly convex, diverging slightly
forwards. Apex blunt post-median, with about two-fifths the
shell behind it, inclining backwards, and directed towards the
right; the line from the apex to posterior border slightly
concave, to the anterior border almost rectilinear. Peritreme
oval, distinctly narrowed posteriorly.

Dimensions of a moderately large example ; length, one-sixth
of an inch; breadth, one-tenth of an inch; height, one-
seventeenth of an inch, the respective dimensions being in
the ratio of 100, 60, and 35.

The newly-formed shell is of a pale horn colour, but older
parts have a reddish to blackish-brown coloured epidermis.
The anterior portion of the cone is ornamented with strong ~
concentric folds.

The foot of the animal is translucent, white, and is obtusely
rounded behind. The tentacles are translucent, white, tri-
angular, and subcompressed at the base, but are cylindrical in
the upper part, ending in a blunt tip. The eyes are black, and
in front of and slightly interior to the bases of the tentacles.
The muzzle is emarginate, when extended. Only the tips of
the tentacles are visible from beneath the shell when the
animal is gliding.

Habitat and Station —This species was first made known to
me by Mr. Stirling Smeaton, B.A., who collected one example
in a stream at Lyndoch Valley. I have since found it on the
under side of the floating leaves of Triglochin procera in the
Reedbeds ; and abundantly in the River Torrens at Adelaide,
on the under side of stones and on the submerged leaves of
aquatic plants. Mr. Bednall informs me that he collected it in
1876 in the Brownhill and Waterfall Gully Creeks.

103

Affinities and Differences.—The apex of the shell of Ancylus
Australicus having a decided inclination to right, the shell is
sinistral, and, therefore, belongs to the genus Ancylus, and not
to Velletia. The present species is the first, so far as I am
aware, that has been recorded from this continent; though no
less than three species have been described from Tasmania. Of
these, 4. Cumingianus, Bourg., has no congener ; 4. Tusmanicus,
T. Woods, is separable from our shell by its proportionately
greater height, and by its posterior apex; A. Woodsz, Johnston,
comes much nearer to it. A comparison of specimens of the
two species shows that A. Australicus differs in the following
chief particulars from A. Woodsii—It is of a much larger
size, is relatively more elevated and broader, and the apex is
excentric.

Limnea subaquatilis, spec. nov. Plate iv., figs. 6a—6b.

Shell thin, fragile, shining horn coloured; ovate subven-
tricose whorls four longitudinally, but faintly wrinkled. Spire
short, pointed; suture impressed. Aperture large ovate, half
the length of the shell. Columella fold thin, opaque white,
and reflected.

Dimensions—Total length, seven-twentieths of an inch;
length of spire, two-twentieths of an inch; length of aperture,
five-twentieths of an inch; breadth, three-twentieths of an
inch. :

Habitat—Among paludinal herbage growing on the marshy
margins of the River Torrens at Adelaide.

This new species is allied to the Tasmanian L. Huonensis,
T. Woods, but the last whorl is relatively narrower, and in
consequence the revolution of the whorls is less oblique. But
a species from the same island sent to me by Mr. Petterd, with
the manuscript name of Suwecinea Johnstoni comes very near to
our shell, if it be not identical withit ; however, the Tasmanian
specimens, which I have examined, are all young examples, and
it becomes difficult to give distinctive characters ; nevertheless,
in them the spire is more exsert, and the last whorl is slightly
flattened at the suture. Mr. Petterd informs me that his
S. Johnstont lives among wet moss, a habitat not so dissimilar
from that in which L. subaquatilis has been found.

Limnea papyracea, spec. nov. Plate iv., figs. 5a—ic.

Shell oblong ovate, very thin, smooth and shining, pale horn-
coloured; wrinkied transversely. Spire rather short, whorls
half-rounded at the sutures, last whorl ovate-oblong anteriorly
sub-expanded, outer lip sinuously produced about the middle.
Columella fold slender, slightly tortuous; inner lip widely and
thinly spread. Figs. 5a and 50 represent a large specimen

104

selected asa type ; figs. 5¢ are those of a varietal form in which
the last whorl is more abrupt at the suture and shows a
tendency to embrace the spire.

Dimensions of type specimen.—Total length, ‘475; length of
spire, 175; breadth, -275; length of aperture, “4; greatest
breadth, °2 inch.

Locality—Numerous dead shells from the bed of a dried up
marsh near Penola, South Australia.

Bulimus Myoporine, spec. nov.

Syn. B. sinistrorsus, Zute, Trans. Phil. Soc., Adelaide, p. 134,
t. 5, fig. 4.

The change in the specific name is necessary because Deshayes
described many years ago a New Caledonian shell under the
name of B. sinistrorsus. The name, here substituted, has
reference to the habitat of the snail, that of living under the
shelter of Myoporum parvifolium.

DESCRIPTION OF A
NEW SPECIES OF BELEMNITE

FROM THE MESOZOIC STRATA OF CENTRAL
AUSTRALIA.

By Proressor Rateu Tarr, A.LS., F.G.S., &., President.
[Read July 6, 1880.!

Belemnites Canhami, spec. nov. Plate iv., figs. 2a—2c.

Guard hastate, terminating in an acute, sub-mucronate,
central point ; contracted in the medio-alveolar region; com-
pressed ventro-dorsally, the ratio of the two diameters
measured at a little further back than at the alveolar apex is
as 2 to 3.

Each dorso-lateral face presents, through the whole length
of the alveolar region, a deep and sharply cut furrow. In the
region of the alveolar apex it makes an abrupt turn on to the
medial line of the side of the guard, then splits into two
shallow grooves, separated by a uniform distance about equal
to their own width, which are continued to the apex.

The Phragmacone is sub-oblong in its transverse section, the
dorso-ventral diameter is to the other in the proportion of 11
to 18. The stphuncle is subinternal, and the axis of the
phragmacone is nearly straight.

105

The length of the guard is four inches; the greatest diameter
is ;2;ths, and the corresponding shortest diameter is ;%,ths of
an inch ; the axis of the guard is 25 inches.

EXpbaNATION or Fre@ures.

2a. Lateral aspect, showing the lateral groove with its flexure
and bifurcation.

2b. Dorsal aspect, showing lateral furrows.

2c. Transverse section of alveolus, showing the unsymmetrical
position of the dorso-lateral furrows, and the thin test
on the ventral side ; s, the siphuncle.

Affinities and Remarks—This Belemnite is related to B.
australis, Phillips (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., London, vol. xxvi.,
p. 258, t. xvi., figs. 1 and 2), but differs from it in being more
distinctly hastate, much more compressed, and in the lateral
grooves being continued into a double sulcus. Phillips seems
to me to have included two, if not three, species under B.
australis ; and, judging from the remarks of the author and
the drawings, the form represented by figs. 3 and 4 cannot be
far removed, if separable, from B. Canhami. Dr. Hector has,
im my opinion, misinterpreted the characters of B. australis,
when he apphes that designation to a species from the
cretaceous rocks of New Zealand. (Trans. New Zealand
Institute).

The number of specimens of B. Canhami examined by me is
sixteen ; these include examples ranging from 1} up to 4 inches.
in length. All exhibit such unmistakable community of
characters, which cannot be said of the forms collected under
the name of B. australis, that I cannot doubt that a good ©
species, distinct from the typical B. australis (figs. 1 and 2, op.
cit.), is represented by them.

Locality and Horizon.—Mesozoic beds near Peake, Central
Australia. Forwarded by Mr. J. Canham, Corr. Memb., to
whom the species is dedicated in recognition of his aid in
advancing our knowledge of the Natural History of this
province. Mr. Chandler, of Peake, writes me “that the
specimens you have, were got from the Woodduck Creek, and
none have as yet been found in conjunction with fossiliferous
rock.” The rock here referred to is one yielding MJonotis
Barklyi, Cytherea Clarket, &e.

A second species of Belemnites (incorrectly referred by me to
B. australis, vide Trans. Phil. Soc., p. 1., 1879,) oceurs in associa-
tion with the fore-mentioned lamellibranchs at Mount Mar-
garet, as proved by the collections made there by Mr. R.
Beetson. The few specimens to hand are too much weathered
for specific determination.

Jd

106

THE GEOLOGY OF THE HUNDRED OF
MUNNO PARA.

PART II—THE UPLAND MIOCENE AND FUNDA-
MENTAL ROCKS AND ECONOMICS.

By Gavin Scovunar, Corresponding Member.
[Read August 3, 1880.]

Plates v.—vi.

ConTENTS :
1. Introduction and Surface Configuration.
2. Upland Miocene :—Description of Strata; Range; Vegetation upon;
Water-bearing properties; Origin; Relation to Auriferous Cements.
3. Fundamental Rocks :—
Supposed age.
Geological structure, extent, and surface characteristics.
Quartzites—description, distribution, and origin of.
Clay Slate ; Metamorphosed limestone.
4, Economics :—Mineral deposits; building materials and road metal.
Springs issuing from Fundamental Rocks ; Soils and vegetation.

Introductory Remarks.—Having in the former part of this
paper carried a description of the geology of the district down
to the beginning of the Drift period, I will now endeavour to
occupy your attention with a description of the older rocks.
Following the same plan, I shall in the first place treat of the
Miocenes or Upland Tertiaries; afterwards the Fundamental
Rocks, and conclude with a short outline of the economic
geology and of the soils of the various rocks.

Form of the Ground Occupied by the Older Strata—A glance
at the map and longitudinal section will show that the
quartzite series on the east and west occupy high ground, and
enclose a longitudinal depression north and south constituted
of clay-slate and thin limestones, which have yielded to a
larger degree to atmospheric and aqueous action than the
quartzites have done. It will further be seen that the direction
of the channels of Tenafeat Creek and the South Para River,
after receiving the water of that tributary, have been deter-
mined pretty much, if not wholly, by the trend and northly
termination of the Munno Para quartzites. Though the

107

drainage of North-Eastern Munno Para, North-Western Para
Wirra, and South-Western Barossa, through this numerical
reducing and thinning-out to the north of the Munno Para
quartzites, finds a comparatively easy outlet to the west. On
the other hand, it will be seen that the quartzites intersect
the modern watercourses bounding the district on the south-
east and south. Thrice had these drainage waters to contend
for mastery with the quartzites ere they succeeded im pene-
trating the stony mass.

I may here state, from the nature and geological structure
of the Para and southern Munno Para hills, that in early
geological times the drainage of Gould’s Creek, Little Para,
and adjoining regions was carried off by way of Golden
Grove and Modbury, meeting the waters of the then Southern
Be probably not far from where the City of Adelaide now
stands.

Urianp MI0cene.

Description of Strata.—These beds attain no great thickness
throughout the district, and the bedding may be said to be
somewhat indistinct; nevertheless, what still remains, in
descending order, can be read as follows :-—

The Upland Tertiaries of Munno Para consist chiefly of soft,
fine-grained, friable sandstone. The silicious materials fre-
quently held together by an argillo-caleareous paste, not
unfrequently impregnated by infiltrations of iron oxides.
Though such be the general characteristics of the formation, I
have not unfrequently found the basement consisting of one
or more of the three following description of beds :—(1.)
Angular fragments of quartz and other rocks (which might be
termed a breccia), held together by a ferruginous paste. (2.)
Though less common, conglomerates, in the true sense of the
term, in some cases held together by a cement of argillo-
calcareous material ; in others, as in the case of the breccias,
by ferruginous matter. (3.) Most commonly, however, the
basement of the deposits consists of mottled argillaceous sand
rock, evidently the characteristic sandstone in a high state of
decay.

Range of the Formation—The Upland Miocenes of Munno
Para constitute a group of outliers, scattered chiefly over the
higher tracts of the district. But these isolated patches are to
the geologist of significant meaning, as each of them, when
systematically arranged, becomes an integral part of an intel-
ligible language, and though time no doubt has wrought sad
havoc in defacing the surface outlines of the country since the
period when the deposition of these beds terminated, yet suffi-
cient still remains to indicate that they once overlaid pretty

108

nearly, if not wholly, the fundamental rocks of the entire
area.

On directing attention to the various outliers 7 sztw, I shall
commence at the south end of the district, pointing out the
situations and characteristics of those occupying the higher
tracts as we proceed north, afterwards indicating the relation
of three patches found zz sitw on the western base of the
range.

Beginning, then, on the south, part of Section 42383 is
occupied with Upland Tertiaries; from that point northerly
these beds continue to overlay the fundamental rocks in
part of Sections 4195, 4196, 4282, 4201, and 4230, in which
section the superficial area increases considerably, at the same
time trending to the east, occupies about one-half of Section
4193, part of 4231, 4862, and about four-fifths of 4363.
With exception of the depression or channel of Little Garden
Creek, the series passes as a whole into Para Wirra, occupying
from 80 to 100 acres in Sections 6381, 6882 in that hundred.
IT may note, in passing that at the junction of the diagonal
roads leading through Section 4363, the watershed of Little
Garden and Gould’s Creek is situate at an elevation of about
700 feet.

From the lowest point in the south-east corner of Section
4357 the beds continue to occupy the rising ground to the north
into Section 4156, where they attain an altitude of something
over 890 feet. From this elevation they gradually thin off, until
in a small valley from 150 to 200 yards north, the old rocks for
a distance of nearly half a mile are completely stripped of their
Miocene covering. In this little valley, according to the Rail-
way Survey Department, the elevation is 872 feet. Passing
north, in Sections 4676, 3263, 3262, 3266, and 3267, they
attain their former development, occupying in the aggregate
about 150 acres. In Section 3262, where the cross section
accompanying this paper intersects the roadway leading
through same, the elevation is 960 feet; from which point, as
we approach Yatalunga, a small outlier of the series occurs on
the highway at the northern boundaries of Sections 3260 and
3267. From thence the old rocks are entirely stripped of the
newer series for a distance of about one and a quarter miles,
where a few characteristic fragments are to be seen in Section
4191. And lastly, at an elevation of 978 feet, the Gawler
Town hill is capped with Upland Miocene, identical in all
respects with the deposits of the same horizon at lower levels.
These beds are cistributed not only over the higher tracts of
the district, but also repose at low elevations on the western
slopes of the range. An inlier surrounded by drift occupies
the bed of the creek in Section 3328; and two small outliers

109

occur, one in Section 3087, at an elevation of 340 feet, and the
other in Section 3306; both are zn situ. As further evidence
of their general prevalence at a former period, detached frag-
ments of quartz, quartzite, and various other pebbles imbedded
in a ferruginous paste, also fragments of the ordinary prevail-
ing Miocene sandstone, all characteristic of the formation,
abound in the soils and subsoils throughout the higher tracts
of the district. Such detached masses occur notably in
Sections 4173, 4148, 4149, 4147, 4160, 3809, and many others.
Further proof is afforded by the occurrence of highly water-
worn pebbles in the soils at various places, especially in
Section 3309, at an elevation of about 550 feet, and though
less profusely, most characteristically so in Section 4160.
These pebbles are of various sizes and kind, and are evidently
the remnants of a Miocene shore line.

Vertical Extent and Stratigraphical Relation to the Primary
Rocks—Because of their great capacity for water, and that in
consequence vertical abrasion is reduced to a minimum, no well-
defined section is presented throughout the whole area; and
though all my measures are merely approximate, yet I think in
several places the formation extends to 30 feet. The deepest
and best exposure is in Section 3263, where Mr. Philip Butler
essayed to open a quarry for the purpose of obtaining stone
for the ashlar-work of his mansion erected at Yatalunga 28
years ago. Though the stone at this place rather exceeds the
general average, both in colour and quality, yet after penetrat-
ing to a depth of ten or twelve feet it was abandoned on
account of its exceeding brashy character.

They everywhere rest unconformably over the uptilted
edges of the Paleozoic or Hozoic rocks, and the basement bed
of the formation is usually an arenaceous mottled clay, but it
is sometimes a breccia or conglomerate ; these various charac-
teristics of the bottom beds being overlain by a white silicious
sandstone of variable thickness and colour.

Vegetation—Throughout the actual area, and that covered
by waste from the Upland Tertiary beds, the soil is of the most
sterile character; consequently vegetation, though represented
by a goodly number of indigenous flowering plants, presents
for a considerable portion of the year a most barren and dismal
aspect. But at spring time these shrubs and herbs, then in
blossom, impart a most pleasing effect to the landscape. The
grasses are all indifferent fodder plants. Timber of all kinds
is also small and dwarfed in size ; in short, forming a criterion
from the vegetable life as developed over the Munno Para
Upland Tertiary outliers, it is well that they have been reduced
to their present circumscribed area, otherwise Munno Para

110

would be now constituting part of an Australian desert, even
though its climate is a fair average for South Australia.

Professor Tate has very kindly supplied the subjoined note:
—‘‘ The following plants are restricted in Munno Para to the
Upland Miocene surfaces. Among shrubs and undershrubs
—Hybanthus floribundus, Boronia cerulescens, Leptospermum
myrsinoides, Calycothri ix tetragona, Hibbertia densiflora, H.
fasciculata, Grevillea lavandulacea, Hakea rugosa, Banksia
marginata, Isopogon ceratophyllus, and Styphelia Sonderi and
other epacrids. Of herbaceous plants the following are con-
spicuous by their profusion and brillianey of blossom :—
Burchardia umbellata, Thelymitra longifolia, Diuris maculata,
Prasophyllum fuscum, Caladenia Pater soni, Pterostylis longi-
folia, and Glossodia major; Drosera auriculata, Kuphrasia
Brownii.”

Water-bearing Properties of the Beds—No permanent spring
of noted consideration issues directly from these beds. Never-
theless, when we consider not only the exceedingly pervious
character of the newer rocks, but also the nature of the sur-
rounding debris (a pervious s sand, in many instances extending
far beyond their present limits in actual sztw), it 1s reasonable
to infer that they materially add, in an indirect way, to the
subterranean water supply which issues forth at lower levels
from the fundamental rocks.

A rough approximate of the annual storage of water derived
through the direct action of these beds and surrounding detritus
may be reckoned as follows :—Superficial extent, 1,400 acres ;
average rainfall, 22 inches. The usual method of solving such
problems, when the upper rock stratum and its superficial
covering consist of medium permeative constituents, is to allow
two-thirds of the annual rain-water as being carried off in the
shape of flood-water and by evaporation. Buta personal know-
ledge of the exceedingly pervious nature of the beds in question
and that of their superficial covering leads me to infer that
142 inches exceed the actual amount of loss thus sustained.
Consequently I estimate the loss at 10 inches. My calulations
are embodied in the following table :-—

Superficial area, 1,400 acres.

Annual average rainfall .. .. 22inches. Total in gallons, 697,466,000
Loss by flood-water, evaporation, &c. 10inches. Total in gallons, 317,030,000
Stored in the strata ne .. 12inches. Total in gallons, 380,436,000
Daily product therefrom .. in gallons, 1,042,290

Numbers of persons that might be)
supplied at the rate of 40 ne
per head a day.

It may be observed hy though the Upland Tertiaries of

Munno Para present a gloomy and weird aspect in so far as

26,057

111

the vegetable kingdom is concerned, yet their sterility in that
respect is wonderfully modified when we consider the great
redeeming feature they present, viz., a vast storage of water
for summer supply to the adjoining neighbourhood.

Origin. No Fossil Remains as yet Discovered in Munno
Para.—tThe origin of this formation, so widely distributed over
the country, is at present one of deep interest to the geologist.
In the early days of my geological aspirations I was of opinion
that the Upland Tertiaries of Munno Para were of subaerial
origin. But since my intimate acquaintance with our esteemed
President—my own observations, in the meantime, having also
extended beyond the limits of the Munno Para beds—I have
relinquished that hypothesis as being one inadequate to meet
the requirements of the case. Professor Tate is of opinion
(see President’s address to the Society, 1878-9, page 59) that
the formation is of ‘‘fresh water origin,” and considers it to
be “contemporaneous with the youngest members of the
Miocene marine strata.” In the absence of further discovery
of fossil remains, arguments both for and against these views
might be raised. I presume the reasons which led the Pro-
fessor to that statement were that the formation has hitherto
yielded no remains of marine life, and that silicified wood,
which is a common representative of lacustrine or fluviatile
deposits, has been frequently found associated with it. It
might be advanced with equal propriety that because of the
wide-spread extent of the formation over hill and dale facing
the present seaboard from an elevation at Gawler of something
less than 300 feet to that of 1,000 elsewhere, the fresh water
deposits could not be going on simultaneously with any
member of the marine, unless a natural barrier then existed
very near a considerable portion of the present eastern coast-
line of Gulf St. Vincent to impound the fresh water from the
salt. Having no positive evidence to that effect, 1 think that
the age of the Upland Tertiaries, if they be of fresh water
origin, most likely preceded the marine Miocene.

Mr. O. Tepper, of Ardrossan, has probably shed more light
on this subject than any other inquirer in the field of South Aus-
tralian geology (see Proceedings of this Society, 1878-9, “Cliffs
and Rocks of Ardrossan, Yorke’s Peninsula,” by O. Tepper,
page 75). By this discovery I regard Mr. Tepper as having so

ar at least traced a stratigraphical connection between the
fossiliferous beds near Muloowurtie Point and the unfossili-
ferous beds of Tanunda and other inland tracts. Therefore,
Mr. Tepper’s discoveries only await further corroborative
evidence to establish the opinion I have for some time enter-
tained, viz., that the patches of Upland Miocene are merely
remnants of marine bottom beds.

112

From the foregoing it will be noticed my argument favours
the theory of marine origin. And although the only fossil
hitherto discovered in the Upland Miocene is silicified wood,
yet its presence is no proof of a purely lacustrine origin of the
deposits, inasmuch as terrestrial vegetation has been frequently
found associated with indubitable marine fossils. So far as I
know, the Upland Miocenes of Munno Para have not pro-
duced a single specimen of silicified wood, though it has been
procured from the debris of a neighbouring outlier in Para
Wirra. Indeed the marine beds at Gawler seem to be the great
emporium of these ancient vegetable relics, and from careful
observation I am led to conclude these chiefly grew near the
spot where they are now found.

Relation to the Auriferous Cements of Barossa and Humbug
Scrub.—That the deposition of the Upland Tertiary beds of
Munno Para and the auriferous cements of Victoria Hill and
other old gold-bearing gravels of Barossa and Humbug Scrubs
belong to the same geological period a doubt cannot be enter-
tained. Ascending from Gawler, they can be traced overlying
at intervals the rugged surface of the old rocks, until at the
Victoria Hill and Lady Alice Mine they attain an altitude of
about 950 feet. Indeed their relationship is so easily read and
defined in that respect that in cases where altitude coincides
deposition may be regarded as having been contemporary.

Why the easterly tracts of the Upland Miocenes have become
more auriferous than those in Munno Para may be attributed
to a higher state of metamorphism prevailing throughout the
fundamental rocks to the east.

FunpDAaMENTAL Rocks.

Supposed Age——Until the appearance of Mr. Tepper’s
“Rocks and Cliffs of Ardrossan,” the fundamental rocks con-
stituting the Adelaide and Flinders Ranges and other minor
groups traversing the southern sea-board of South Australia
were considered by the most eminent authorities to be not
older than Silurian. Mr. A. R. C. Selwyn, in his report to the
South Australian Government of a Geological Tour in this
Colony in 1859, in his usual careful way of expression, sup-
ports that hypothesis. Basing his conclusions from natural
sections of the country, they are :—

That an unconformable series tops the summits of a large
number of the highest of the South Australian hills. The
higher series he regards as of Devonian age, and in the absence
of fossils he concludes that the unconformable subterimposed
beds belong to the system next in point of time, viz., the
Silurian.

In 1866—*“ Physical Geology of Victoria,” page 16—whilst

113

treating of the Upper Paleozoic rocks of the sister colony, we
find that geologist still further modernising the position of our
fundamental rocks. “ Whether,” he says, “the cupriferous,
calcareous, and slaty strata of South Australia are, as 1 am
inclined to believe, members of the same group, is uncertain.
Tf so, they have not yet been recognised in Victoria,’
Valuable, however, as Mr. Selwyn’s geological observations are
in other respects to South Australian geology, yet his dedue-
tions now require modification in accordance with Mr. Tepper’s
Peninsula discovery, that of Lower Silurian fossils in beds un-
conformably overlying the slaty cupriferous group of Selwyn.
But until more light is shed abroad on the subject we may
designate the group of rock constituting the Adelaide chain
and Munno Para hills by the somewhat ambiguous term ‘‘ Pre-
Silurian.”

Geological Structure, Extent, and Surface Characteristics:—
A glance at the map and cross section will show the geological
structure of the Munno Para hills to consist chiefly of clay
slate, frequently intercalated with bands of quartzites, and
less sparingly of marbles, and occasional veins of pure quartz,
principally in small nests and strings throughout the clay
slate. The length of the range may be estimated at from 24
to 26 miles, taking its rise on the south, a little to the north
of the northern boundary of the City of Adelaide, trending
northerly through Yatala, Munno Para—where it attains its
highest altitude—losing its characteristic outlines north of the
South Para River. The topography of the range is solely due
to denusive action, therefore the undulating and fertile table
lands of the Munno Para hills owe their outline and fertility
to the diversified character of the fundamental rocks out of
which they have been fashioned.

QUARTZITES.

Believing that the quartzite bands have acted a conspicuous
part in delineating the topography of Munno Para, I have
arranged them as follows, viz., west and east escarpment, and
middle or mill series.

Using the cross sectional alignment as a base line, it will be
observed that only two of the separate bands of the western
escarpment series appear at the surface there. Proceeding
south, they are traceable through Sections 4161, 4148, 4147,
4159, and south-western portion of 4160. From that point, for
some distance south, both bands (especially the western) become
obscured by an easterly extension of the Drift formation in the
ancient gorge of Smith’s Creek. The eastern one is well
exposed ina quarry in Section 4164. Strike of quartzite as
exposed in quarry 10° west of north; dip 25° easterly; esti-

114

mated thickness, 70 to 80 feet. The general dip of the strata
seems to increase rapidly to the south, for in a gully trending
east and west through Section 4166—wherein the eastern
quartzite band is exposed in a contorted state—the dip of the
clay slate, about 70 yards east of where the quartzite finally
plunges beneath the slate, is 40° east. As represented by
pl. vi., fig. 1., the rocks here have been powerfully affected by
an east and west pressure, and had the quartzites chanced
to have been less exposed a casual observer might readily
have been led to conclude that the distance represented
by the diagram contained at least five quartzite bands,
whereas there cannot be more than two. Likewise it will
be noticed that if denudation had extended a few more feet
in depth the contorted quartzites would have been entirely
swept away. South from this point the old rocks extend to the
west, and include three additional quartzite bands, which in
places—notably so in Sections 3271, 3272, and 3273—have
undergone a considerable amount of east and west pressure,
the effect of. which has produced a bold surface outline toward
the Little Para.

A peculiar quartz reef, or dike, first begins to attract
attention from the debris scattered over the surface on the
western side of the eastern band of this series in Section 3091.
At the southern boundary of Section 3094, it is fully dis-
played at the surface; and in a gully in Section 3268, it has
attained great proportions, and is somewhat columnar in struc-
ture. Its strike at this place is about north-west by west, its
dip from 70° to 80° south-west. Beyond this point it is not_
seen, but about one hundred yards west by south, m Section
3270, a detached portion of the same material, some thousands
of tons in weight, is exhibited in regular order poised on a sub-
stratum of clay-slate.

Williams’ quarries, in Section 3092, are opened in the
western bands of this series. A splitting up, or repetition, of
one or more of the bands appears to have been effected here, for
in the gully where the quarries are situate four bands of
quartzite are seen intercalated with the clay-slate in the
distance of little over 400 yards.

In the bed of the Little Para River, on the eastern side of
Section 4,400, a quartzite band is there seen in horizontal
stratification, which phenomenon, in connection with that at
Williams’ quarries and several others of a similar kind through-
out the district, leads me to infer that the various bands (some
at least) as exposed at different inclinations in the bed of the
river and elsewhere, are repetitions at the surface of the same
beds.

Returning to the north of the cross section. The quartzites

115

as exhibted in a gully leading through Sections 3247, 3306,
3305, and 3304, are, with the exception of one small break in
the series, contorted and squeezed together in such a manner as
to represent a continuous whole for a distance of at least sixty
chains. As will be observed by the map, the western portion
of this series of foldings is no longer traceable, because buried
beneath drift. The eastern limb, however, can be distinctly
traced into a gully about four chains north from the southern
boundary of Sections 3302 and 3303, where the foldings,
are very distinctly shown. Between this point and the
former, a distance of about 32 chains, the average strike is
about 10° east; a few chains north of this the strike suddenly
veers to the west about 20°, plunging the whole series under
the drift shortly after entering the south-west corner of
Section 2183, where no sign of folding is visible.

About half a mile south-east of north-west corner of Section
2183 a quartzite band feathers in amongst the clay-slate.
Though comparatively thin on its first appearance, it increases
in thickness on its way north, and in a gully in Section 3326 it
has attained a thickness of at least 100 feet; the dip is here
60° east. For some considerable distance it again thins off.
To the north, ina gully in Section 3325, the thickness is not
more than 40 feet; the dip also has fallen toabout 40°. From
this point it veers slightly to the east, and from the effect of
an anticlinal fold, and also a thickening of the beds—as shown
in Sissman’s quarry, Section 3325—might be attributed the
bold outline of the hill embraced by Sections 3324 and 3325.
This quarry of road metal has been excavated in the focus of
this anticlinal fold, and the beds are very much fractured, and
split into all shapes and sizes; as also the band seems to be
much thicker than it was in the gully in Section 3325. This
disturbance of the strata has evidently extended north, for in
aTavine in Section 3328 the quartzites are not only seen in a
very massive state, but also as if repeated more than once ;
and what is even more interesting, the bands, so massive and
Numerous here, cannot be traced further. They do not
appear even. in the bed of the gully leading through Sections
3034 and 3216; but on reaching a ravine leading through the
northern side of the latter section, the quartzites are here con-
Secutively intercalated with the clay-slates from the eastern
margin of the drift to the eastern boundary of the section.
Beyond this gully they are not traceable.

Middle or Mili Series—This series traverses the district
pretty uniformly from south to north. Commencing in Sections
3309 and 4174, where, intersected by the cross section and
following their outline south, they continue to follow a pretty
uniform course until reaching Sections 5675 and 4170, at

116

which point the eastern band trends slightly to the east.
These bands, more especially the eastern one, have acted a
most prominent part in deflecting south the courses of the
Little Para and Gould’s Creek. After the eastern band inter-
sects the bed of the former stream its outcrop bears consider-
ably west. I am inclined to think that here and for some
distance south that the eastern band is represented by the
remnant of an anticlinal roll. For, as shown in the map, it
splits into two in Section 5671, the eastern branch crossing
the bed of the Little Para into Yatala, at the Reserve, a little
below Richardson’s ; the western, sweeping on with the course
of the river for a considerable distance, in conjunction with the
middle and western bands, constitutes the eastern escarpment
of the Munno Para hills.

Returning to the north of the cross section, the eastern
member of the series trends somewhat abruptly to the east in
Section 4179. Pursuing a somewhat sinuous course, it finally
terminates, with those of three eastern series, in Section 3330.
The middle and western bands, however, foliow a more direct
course, intersecting the South Para River in Section 3346.
This statement is only fully proven so far as the middle band
is concerned. The point where the western band should
intersect the river—if it extend to there at all—is much
obscured by a surface covering of wash from the adjoining
slopes, therefore its position, as laid down on the map, for a
considerable distance south of the river must be regarded as
somewhat ideal.

Dip and Strike of the Mill Series —In a gully passing through
south-east corner of Section 3309, about 18 chains south of~
cross section, the dip of the western quartzite is 40° east. In
the same gully, about 120 feet below the horizon of this band,
the dip of the clay-slate is 55° east, the strike 5° east mag.
north. Estimated thickness of ‘quartzite, 50 to 60 feet. In
the same section, in a gully to the south, the easterly dip of
the quartzite band has increased to 5°, thickness about the
same. In the same gully, in Section 4173, dip of the slate
about 60 feet below eastern band, 45° east, strike 5° east.
Slate about 60 feet below middle band in Section 4160 (Smith’s
Creek), dip 35° east. At the old mill (about 10 chains west)
dip of quartzite band the same. In a gully leading through
Section 4165 false bedding in the clay-slates is very distinctly
represented ; and although no accurate bearing of the quartzites
could be ascertained, the dip of the surrounding slate is about
48° east, strike, 10° east mag. north. In northern portion of
Section 4168, and southern portion of 4165, a remnant of one
of these prevailing folds so common throughout the strata of the
district is distinctly observable here. Also at junction where

117

gully leading through Section 4168 intercepts that leading
through 4165 another of these folds, I am persuaded, exists
there ; for not only has the outcrop of the western quartzite
band increased to the extent of from 34 to 4 chains over the
surface, but the dip of interbedded slate has decreased very
materially also; the actual dip of which, about 50 feet below
the western quartzite band, is 31° east, thus showing within
a very short distance a lowering of the dip to the extent 17°.

The movements causing the displacement of the original con-
formity of the strata, if 1 judge aright, have operated in a line
nearly 5° west of mag. north, and east of south, for about one
quarter mile south in Section 4168. The same phenomenon
presented in the western band at junction of gullies in Section
4165 is repeated in the middle band on the southern side of
Section 4168, and, nearly in the same alignment south, the
eastern band has either been affected by the same disturbing
agency, or that some very decided movement of sea and land
intervened during the deposition of the eastern quartzite band ;
for, as before mentioned, it splits into two in Section 5671, and
passes into Yatala in that condition. In middle band at north-
west corner of Section 4170, a very fair rough building stone
could be procured. On western side of river, southern boundary
of Section 1560, dip of the slate 28° east, strike 5° east. As
represented in cliff on eastern side of the river in Section
1560, the western member of the eastern band there measures
from 50 to 60 feet in thickness. A little further west the
middle band is exposed in a fine section in the shape of a
miniature waterfall. The western band is not so well exposed
either on the north bank or in the bed of the river. However,
all three are conspicuously seen in regular order, as they
obliquely ascend the bold ascent on the southern side, finally
passing in their course to the south, forming a component part
of the bone structure of the Para hills.

Remarks, North of Cross Section —As the eastern band is
removed from its associates by an additional amount of clay-

_ slate, it also becomes thicker, and its lower portion, in Sections

4181 and 3322, almost assumes the character of true quartz.
Estimated thickness in Section 3322 :—Underiying quartzy
beds, 20 feet ; true quartzites, 30 feet; dip, 40° east ; strike,
10° east. This quartzy character disappears as the band passes
through Sections 4350, 4353, and 3317, but reappears fora short
distance in Section 3316. The outcrop of the western band
exhibits a well-defined course through Section 2188, but it is
not so with the middle. In its course through the southern
portion of Section 2183 the western band has evidently
undergone a reversed anticlinal fold in a north and south
direction. At this point the band measures fully five chains

118

over the surface from east to west, and within that space the |
quartzite beds are found dipping in both directions. Western
side dip not ascertained, eastern side dip 35° east, strike 10° |
east. A few chains north of this point, and about six chains
east from the outcrop of the band, seemingly a reef of quartz
of milk whiteness steals in amongst the clay-slate, running
parallel for a little distance with the strike of the quartzites.
At a distance of about one quarter mile we reach the spring
(Spring Gully); here the band is split into three sections.
Thickness of the western section, about 80 feet; dip, 77°
easterly ; strike, 10° west; overlying clay-slate, about 40 feet; |
dip, 75° east; strike, 8° west; quartzite, about 40 feet; dip,
75° east; strike, 8° west; clay-slate, about 80, feet; to the
east of which is exposed the largest section of quartzite, repre-
senting, from west to east, a surface measurement of four
chains, the western side of which is dipping west at an inclina-
tion of 65° west, strike on that side of the fold 10° west. On
the eastern side of this partially abraded fold the actual dip
of the quartzites was not ascertained. Two chains east from
their junction with the clay-slate the dip of the latter was
found to be 70° east, strike 8° east.

On the north slope of the gully the phenomenon presented |
at the spring becomes altogether obscured, but in a gully
obliquely intersecting northern boundary of Section 2183 the ©
band is again exposed in a connected form, though still exhibit- —
ing a somewhat irregular and confused appearance; dip of
slate rock on western side 70° east, strike 10° west. It then |
passes on through Sections 3323, 3324, and 3329, where it —
becomes entirely covered with slate rock, in which state I |
believe it passes through Section 3333—marked spring—for in ©
the bed of a small gully near the southern boundary of Section —
3336 the round back of an anticlinal roll is seen peeping out |
under the overlying clay slate. From this point, both the _
western and middle bands—(nothing of particular interest is
connected with the middle band north of cross section)—seem
to split up into detached and unreadable sections, as they —
pass through Section 3385; and in Section 3343, 1t becomes —
almost impossible to define the position of their outcrop, and —
so continue in that obscure state until reaching the south bank ©
and bed of the River Para in Section 3346.

Eastern Escarpment Series—By the map it will be seen that |
a distinct series of quartzite bands traverses the eastern side _
of the uplands of the district. Their general bearing is con- |
siderably more west of north than those traversing the western |
escarpment of the Munno Para Hills. I have thought fit to
term the series as above, because, whilst the features of the |
country were being sculptured by the successive action of

119

denusive agency, they preserved a somewhat similar bold out-
line on the east, as the western ones did on the west. It will
also be observed that not one member of this series extends so
far north as Section 3331 All, with one exception, intersect
the bed of the Little Para, and on the south side of the river
impart a bolder outline to hill and dale.

A common character prevails throughout the bands of this
series. In a ravine in Section 4191, east of Gawler Town
Hill, a very fine section of the eatsern band is exposed, pre-
senting a synclinal axis, as represented in diagram I. The
rock here is very hard and compact in structure ; and also the
massive bedding is exceedingly well defined. In consequence
of this fold, as abrasion brought each succeeding bed nearer the
surface, so at last when denudation has excavated below the
axis of the syncline the band has entirely been removed. This
takes place at a distance of less than half a mile north from
where it is so fully developed. As will be seen by the map a
lateral overlap of this band occurs in Section 1645. Whether
this severance of the quartzites be due to original deposition
or to dislocation of the strata, as yet I have not been able to
determine. Dip of this band, at about 200 yards north of cross
section, is 70° east.

Eastern Isolated Band—As shown on the map this band is
entirely confined within the limits of Munno Para; its strike
bears more west and east than any of the others, and J am .
inclined to believe that it is only an extensional fold of one or
other of the bands to the west of it, from which it has been
removed so far in consequence of its low dip, and the depth to
which denudation has been carried. On the South Para
River it is entirely cut off to the north by abrasive action,
the waters of the river having cut a channel into the
slate rock nearly 100 feet below the synclinal axis of the
quartzite. Throughout the highlands of Sections 3347 and
3348 the western limb of this synclinal curve can be also
traced to its termination there by the tortuous outcrop of
the quartzites.

A natural section of this band, in a gully a few yards north
of the southern boundary of Section 1783, shows a down-throw
between two faults. The dip of the adjacent slate is conform-
able to that that of the quartzites abutting against either fault.
At a distance of a few chains east, however, the westerly dip of
the slate gradually changes to the east. The faults, which
are here about four chains apart, traverse the country in a
south-south-east direction, in such a manner that at no great
distance south they become connected as one fault, and that at,
or soon after, their intersection, stratigraphical discordance is
no longer traceable.

120

If solely guided by geographical demarcation, this band com-
pletes the Munno Para series to the east. As it happens in
this case the geographer’s line of demarcation coincides badly
with the geologist’s. Consequently, I have extended the cross
section rather over one mile into Para Wirra, embracing a
limestone band, an extensively developed series of quartzite
bands, and thus constituting a geological line of demarcation
between the less metamorphosed clay slates of Munno Para,
and the mica-schists of Para Wirra.

Origin.—A singular coincidence, one that has not escaped
the keen eye of Professor Tate—see his Presidential address
for 1879—is that the fundamental rocks when followed
easterly in the direction of their prevailing dip become more
highly metamorphosed ; for it is true that vast accumulations
of granite and granitoid rocks, whether of Plutonic or Meta-
morphie origin, are distributed throughout the old sedimentary
rocks constituting the range on the west of the River Murray.
That the superabundant heat arising from what we see of these
outbursts conveyed direct should have effected the condition of
the strata so far west as the western boundary of Para Wirra
is very improbable. Nevertheless, I am of opinion that the
same fiery energy which produced the granite and granitoid
rocks of the Murray Range, effected at the same time the
metamorphism of the Para Wirra beds from a deeper seated
point. A bed of rock on the surface in Para Wirra, from its
natural inclination, as it extends east becomes deeper buried
beneath succeeding beds, and also nearer the seat of Plutonic
energy. Therefore, the bed which at the surface in Para Wirra
represents a mica-slate, in all probability at a moderate depth
represents gniess, at a greater granitoid, and at still greater
depths, and also proceeding into closer proximity to the super-
heated mass, a true granite. In this manner, though youngest
in the series, the Para Wirra rocks may have been affected by
capillary conduction of heat directed through the plane of
original bedding, though placed at considerable distance from
the scene of actual fiery activity. Another theory might be
propounded, which is also the most probable, that the fiery
energy that produced the granite and granitoid rocks to the
east occupied a deeper-seated horizon in the west as it
extended beneath the Para Wirra beds, and thus affected them
vertically upwards.

Mr. A. R. C. Selwyn, in his valuable “ Geological Notes of
South Australia,” suggests that some at least, if not all, of our
quartzite bands might be looked upon as being metamorphosed
Plutonic rocks—a theory which cannot be applied to any of
the Munno Parra bands, unless possibly to one of them. A
flying excursionist, as Mr. Selwyn was whilst here in official

121

capacity, dropping across a quartzite band in a highly metamor-
phosed condition would be very apt to ascribe it to a Plutonic
origin, as being the more simple explanation. Having no
intention whatever to gainsay the opinion of so able an
authority as Mr. Selwyn has proved himself to be in other
respects relative to South Australian geology, yet after a
careful investigation of any given band for a considerable
distance, the invariable conclusion has been favourable to its
sedimentary origin. Proof of their sedimentary origin can be
adduced as follows:—1. Because of their uniform interstrati-
cation with the surrounding clay-slate. 2. Though fractured
extensively by lateral pressure. they still retain the outlines of
original beddings. 3. The quartz grains building up the lesser
metamorphosed specimens invariably bear a water - worn
appearance. 4. Though not abundant, characteristic water-
worn pebbles of a pre-existing quartzite have been found
imbedded within them; also, on one occasion I found an
enclosed fragment of considerable size of a pre-existing clay-
slate.

The foregoing, to my mind at least, fully establish the
sedimentary origin of the quartzites, and from the nature of
the deposits it is inferred that dry land existed not far away,
but in what direction it is scarcely possible to hazard an
opinion. This much might be inferred, from the small per-
centage of embedded pebbles within them, that in whatever
direction this ancient land was situate it did not present a
bold coastline.

CLAY-SLATE.

This class of rocks constitutes by far the largest moiety
of the fundamental rock system of the district. In some
cases the beds are found gradually passing from a fine
gritty quartzite to that of the characteristic slate. In others
the slates are divided from the quartzites or marbles simply by
a flaky parting. Frequently metamorphism (which in no case
throughout the district of Munno Para has acted intensely)
has most powerfully affected the slates near their junction with
the quartzites, quartz reefs, nests, and strings of quartz. Near
their junction with the latter, frequently the slate has become
chloritised in character, slippery to the touch, and greenish in
colour. Where metamorphism has acted moderately, especially
where soda and other allied chemicals are present, the slate beds
are in a state of rapid decay. Thirty years’ observation has led
me to believe that in situations where these allied influences
are in unison abrasion of the clay-slate is going on at the rate
of several inches per century.

K

122

Maree, or MreramorpHoseD LIMESTONE.

In no case have I been able to trace this class of rocks con-
tinuously throughout the entire extent of the district. This
fact at once leads me to conclude that their deposition was
more restricted by local influences than that of the sands now
constituting the quartzites. I have invariably found that
abrupt depressions of the surface indicate their lines of out-
crop. The beds have a tendency to decay pretty uniformly
with the intercalated clay-slate, and in the low-lying parts
they are covered to a considerable depth with recent
debris. It is, therefore, only by the aid of these depressions
and where they stand out in bolder relief on the ridges, that
their outcrops can be traced extensively at all.

Beginning from the west, the first in order of the Munno
Para marbles is a compact grey stone, overlying, at a distance
of 30 feet, the eastern quartzite band of the Mill series. In
Section 4173 it attains no great thickness, and I have not been
able to trace it further south than into Section 1678. But by
the aid of the above-mentioned surface depressions [ have fol-
lowed the line of outcrop north into Section 4350, where a
very good section of the outcrop is exposed, averaging a thick-
ness of from 12 to 20 feet, and further extension in this
direction is indicated by the presence of surface blocks of the
same kind of stone.

No. 2. A black stone, somewhat slaty in character in places,
is situated about 12 chains east of the former. It follows a
north and south line into Section 4178; by the help of the
surface depressions I have been enabled to follow the line of
strike south into Section 4215. The lmited exposure of the
bed prevents accurate measurement of its thickness being ~
taken, but in Section 4173 it is estimated at from 30 to 40
feet.

No. 3. Intersects cross section in Section 3266. Its
position is only inferred by a chain of surface depressions, and
a few small blocks strewn over the adjoining surface.

No. 4. Another stratum peeps out, though faintly, in Sections
4146 and 4350.

No. 5. As shown on map, passes through Sections 3347,
3348, and 3349. |

No. 6. Still further east another band occurs in Section
1082 and 1033, the strike of which is about parallel to that of
the eastern quartzite band. No. 5, in passing south, from
about five chains within Section 3348, trends in the same
direction.

Also on a spur overlooking the bed of the river, in Section
1787, an impure marble has been detected.

Origin.—The occurrence of limestone suggests the proba-

123

bility that life existed in the sea in which it was deposited ;
but as lime must have formed a constituent of the waters of
the ocean before life was there to utilise it, and knowing the
rocks constituting the Adelaide chain and Munno Para to be
much older than the Silurians of Yorke’s Peninsula, it is quite

ossible that the material forming the marbles of our ancient
fundamental rocks was collected from the early water by
direct chemical agency.

QuARTzZ REEFS.

Except the vast mass referred to at page 114 (Gf it bea
quartz reef), and one peeping out in a gully excavated
in the drift in Section 3036, and nests and strings frequently
occurring throughout the clay-slate, no other sign of quartz
reefs, in the true sense of the term, occurs throughout the
rocks on the western side of the watershed.

On the South Para River, however, in Sections 3347 and.
3348, a pure white quartz vein is seen trending in a north and
south direction, seemingly in conformity with the dip and
strike of the surrounding strata. Also another occurs in like
conformity with the general stratification in Section 1033.
Near this place in the bed of the river, the old alluvial work-
ings are situated, where gold in anything like paying quantities
was first discovered in South Australia, in 1850; and these
attracted the attention of a few until the advent of the gold
mania in Sydney and Victoria. From what I have been able to
gather of the nature and character of the gold found here, I
am inclined to think it was not derived from the adjoining
quartz reef, but had been transported hither from a distance,
probably from some extinct outlier of the gold-bearing Miocene
gravels of Barossa.

Economic PuRPosEs.

Copper.—Slight indications of this metal have been found
staining the nests and strings of quartz distributed throughout
the clay slate. However, up to the present time no find has
been made of sufficient importance to induce a systematic
search.

Iron—An ore of this metal is indicated as occurring in
interstratification in the cross section. JI am, nevertheless, not
yet quite convinced whether or not it is correctly so placed.
Surface indications, however, in Sections 3267 and 4146, and
elsewhere over the same line of strike, have induced me
strongly to infer that an interstratification of that mineral
occurs in the fundamental system near the place shown in
section, pl. vi., fig. 2.

124

Burzpine Marertat.

Embracing the fundamental rocks, building material, such
as it is, is plentiful throughout the eastern tracts of Munno
Para. As might be expected the best is obtained from the
quartzites, and these (with the exceptionof Williams’s Quarry,
Section 3092; Billings’ Quarry, Section 3094; and Bald’s
Quarry, Section 3306—none of which could be used for fine
ashlar-work) are fit for strong rubble work only.

No attempts have been made to procure building stone from
the clay-slate except to the east of Gawler South, and as the
stone seems to be less adapted for building purposes than that
from Glen Osmond—and even this, to my mind, is deficient
in some respects—I cannot recommend its use.

Fundamental Limestone—No natural sections of these beds
are displayed throughout the district ; nevertheless, along the
line of strike advantageous sites for quarries could be selected,
and, in my opinion, an excellent and durable building stone
could in many cases be procured.

Travertine—Very little of this material has been used in
Munno Para for building purposes, unless it be for mortar.

Mortar—The travertines of the Munno Para hills, on
account of various impurities, are poorly adapted for building
purposes generally. Probably the greatest defect is their
including small nodules of fundamental limestone. Unless
the greatest care is exercised during the process of slacking,
the inclusions remain undissolved, bursting and destroying the
work months after its execution.

Sand.—Sand of very fair quality for building and other
economic purposes is procurable from dunes of a similar
character to those situate in the neighbourhood of Alberton
throughout the lower tracts of the district. In the highlands
the waste from the Upland Tertiaries furnishes a material for
finishing plaster work not surpassed by anything obtained in
the colony.

Brick.—In no case, to my knowledge, except at Smithfield—
where the works are abandoned—has this auxiliary to the
builder been manufactured. Should a demand ever spring up
abundance of raw material will be found throughout the rede-
positions of the drift, along the banks of the Gawler and
Little Para Rivers.

Roap MeErat.

If discriminate selection were exercised by those in power
over our macadamised road system, abundance of most
durable road metal could be procured throughout the
quartzites and fundamental limestones of Munno Para. As
already stated, in some of the quartzites the feldspathic paste

125

is in a high state of decomposition, so that stone of this kind,
though containing much silica, is, nevertheless, exceedingly
friable ; and when such is used for road metal the percentage
of argillaceous matter is altogether insufficient to hold together
the more indestructible, but incohesive, particles of silica.
Roads constructed or repaired with sin material always
present during our hot and dry summer months a rough and
eritty surface, every casual puff of dry wind renewing the
grating powers of the rasp.

Fundamental Limestone —W ith all due respect to the opinion
of the members of our various Road Boards, District Councils,
and superintending officers, I am persuaded that they would do
well to direct greater attention to this class of material for
road-making and mending purposes. Being fully convinced
that the metamorphosed limestones of Gawler Hill are 100 per
cent. more durable for road purposes than many of the
quartzites used, | venture to suggest to those in authority that
the marbles should have at least a fair trial.

Travertines—Except where the traffic is light, or for
blinding purpose, those of Munno Para are not adapted for
road construction.

Clay-slate—The harder sorts, when broken to 4 inch gauge,
make a very fair foundation for new roads. Also, I am of
opinion that a mixture—say of one to six or eight—broken up
with quartzite, would tend to bind and prolong the wear of
that material greatly, having seen the highly decomposed
specimens of that rock used to great benefit in blinding over
quartzite metal.

SPRINGS ISSUING FROM THE FUNDAMENTAL Rocks.

Probably no like extent in South Australia can boast so
goodly a number of surface springs of excellent water as can
Munno Para East. To obtain that happy condition the
country must necessarily possess the following qualifications :-—
First, an absorbent super-stratum ; second, a moderately
retentive sub-stratum. These geological characteristics Munno
Para East naturally possess in a marked degree, therefore it
behoves the occupants of the soil to see that these natural
gifts are not infringed upon.

In a former part I had occasion to direct attention to the
exceedingly absorbent properties of the Upland Miocene bed.
My object now is to show how the waters directed from the
surface by the action of these beds into subterranean channels
again re-appear at the surface in the shape of refreshing springs.
A glance at the map will show the absorbent, or Miocene, beds,
chiefly occupying the higher tracts. Rainwater falling upon
this superficial sponge soon penetrates beyond the influence of

126

active evaporation, and on reaching the up-turned edges of the
older beds trickles in at every pore and crevice surcharging the
same to great depths. We have thus formed at considerable
altitude an internal cistern, as it were, which has only to be
tapped, naturally or artificially, at a lower level to obtain an
overflow. In this case, to reach the contents of the subter-
ranean reservoir, nature has excavated the deep valleys of
Gould’s, Little Garden, and Tenafeat Creeks nearly in paral-
lelism with the strike, and on the dip side of the fundamental
rocks. These geological features would naturally lead the
geologist to conclude that all, or nearly so, of the outflow
would be by these channels. It is not so, however; the deep,
transverse chasms of Smith’s Creek and Spring Gully have
effected an outlet direct to the west, by which by far the
ereatest outflow takes place. Indeed I might almost venture
to say that the permanent supply to these creeks is not to be
surpassed for the given area by any other in South Australia.
On the map I have indicated the sites of the springs, all of
which flank the heights overlaid by the Upland Miocene beds.

SorLs.

The soils in Munno Para partake much of the character of
the beds on which they rest. Therefore, throughout the
uplands, the character of the soil might be taken as a pretty
sure index to the kind of rock below. Where a stiff clay soil
prevails the bed-rock will consist chiefly of clay-slate. When
the soil is more friable and loamy, the underlying slate is pro-
bably interbedded with a band of fundamental limestone giving
a more pulverous character to the soil, and this is in my
opinion one of the chief sources of our crust limestone or
travertine. This description of soil, though probably not so
inexhaustible, is in the virgin state more fertile than those
overlying the Drift. The soils formed from the debris of the
quartzites and Upland Miocenes are generally of a coarse
sandy character, and are less enduring than either of the
above.

Finally, I beg to direct attention to patches of subsoil
occurring in protected spots at high altitudes, which at first
sight might readily be mistaken for outliers of the true Drift
series. A little mvestigation of the imbedded material and
comparison with that from the natural surroundings, from
whence it might reasonably be expected to have been derived,
has invariably led me to the conclusion that it is merely the
product of a comparatively recent subaerial wash from the
adjoining slopes.

VEGETATION.
Thirty years ago the prevailing indigenous grasses of Munno

127

Para were the Speargrass, Kangaroo grass, and a few others
now long since extinct. As cultivation progressed, the first to
invade these native forms were the Canarygrass and Wild
Oat; afterwards the Barleygrass, and lastly the Silvergrass
and Cape-weed.

Native Flax, in the early days, was a common plant through-
out the lower tracts, and the common Grass-tree also found a
favourite station on some of the soils derived from the waste
of the quartzite bands.

In the arboreous class much greater diversification pre-
vailed. The characteristic trees inhabiting the quartzite soils
were the Sheaoak, Poison-berry tree, an occasional Native
Cherry-tree, Wattle (Acacia pycnantha), and Peppermint. As
the situation approached the higher altitudes and partially
oseupied by the Upland Miocene, the latter give place to
varieties of the Blue Gum and White Gum. The alluvial flats
of Gould’s, Little Garden, and Tenafeat Creeks and their
tributaries, and the sources of Smith’s Creek, were the favourite
stations of the Red Gum, in some cases sustaining those trees
to wonderful sizes.

Soils derived from and immediately overlying the clay-slate
and marbles, for the greater part produce Wattles, chiefly the
black variety, which are indigenous to the soils of the Drift
also.

The arboreous plants originally inhabiting the lower tracts
(Peachy Belt) were large Peppermint, Mallee, Pine, Native
Peach, and a vast variety of shrubs, which have all, or nearly
all, become extinct since the advent of modern husbandry,

Conclusion—If these lines—I don’t flatter myself they are
faultless—tend to create a greater interest in the minds of our
inhabitants towards the development of South Australian
geology, I have attained the chief object that prompted me to
devote many a spare hour in collecting the ground-work upon
which the remarks are based, fully intending to extend the
sectional line across the Schist formations of the Barossa
Ranges to the newer Miocene beds of the Murray Plateau.

Having so far completed—though I am afraid imperfectly—a
self-imposed task, it now devolves upon me to acknowledge my
indebtedness to those I have found ready to assist in my
labours in the field, especially to Mr. John Alexander, Mr.
Alexander Adams, Mr. Robert Paterson, and pre-eminently to
Professor Tate, of the Adelaide University. To the last named
gentleman I am not only indebted in an especial manner for
his labours and valuable practical suggestions in the field, but
also for arranging the subject matter of the foregoing lines
into greater conformity with scientific requirements.

128

EXPLANATION TO PLATES.

Plate V. Geological map of the eastern half of the Hundred
of Munno Para. Scale, one inch to a mile.

Plate VI. Fig. 1. Diagrammatic section of about twenty
chains in gully passing through Sections 4,166 and
4,155.

Fig. 2. Horizontal Section from Railway Station
at Smithfield, bearing E. 14° 8. into the Hundred of Para
Wirra. Datum line, 160 feet above low-water mark.
Horizontal scale, three inches to one mile; vertical scale,
quarter-inch to 100 feet.

129

PLANTS INDIGENOUS TO THE WNEIGH-
BOURHOOD OF HERMANNSBURG,

ON THE RIVER FINKE, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

By the Rev. J. Kemer, Missionary.

[Communicated by Baron F. von Mueller, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., &c.,
Hon. Memb. |

[Read October 5, 1880.]

Introductory Note by Baron F. von Mueller.—t had named the
species of the following list of plants from Mr. Kempe’s suc-
cessive collections. As a constituted whole it gives a good idea
of the vegetation of the mission locality. Next year a second
list will be given. Mr. Kempe writes—‘“If rain should fall
in summer, then nearly all species of flowering plants, even
most of the shrubs, commence to blossom a second time. The
maximum temperature is in the shade 120° F., and the minimum
isc. B.”

DICOTYLEDONOUS PLANTS.

CRUCIFERS.

Lepidium papillosum, F. M.; L. phlebopetalum, F. M.; LL.
ruderale, Linné. All annuals, widely dispersed over
the whole country, and blooming in August.

Stenopetalum nutans, F. M.; an annual.

Erysimwm lasiocarpum, F. M.; an annual, growing in shady
places only, particularly under shrubs; flowers in August.

CaPpPARIDER.

Capparis spinosa, Linné and C. Mitchelli, Lindley ; both peren-
nial shrubs. The latter attains to a height of 10 to
12 feet, whilst C. spinosa, the true caper-plant, 1s a some-
what trailing shrub, growing up and near the ranges, even
on the most arid and deserted places. The month of
November is the usual time of blooming, but C. spinosa
is blooming and bearing fruit nearly all the year, even in
winter.

Cleome viscosa, Linné, is annual, which grows only on stony
places.

130

VIOLACER.
Hybanthus aurantiacus, F. M. A low perennial, growing
mostly on calcareous soils, even on barren limestone hills ;
it flowers nearly the whole summer.

STERCULIACER.
Melhania incana, Heyne ; a small shrub, widely dispersed.
Commersonia sp., grows on the sandhills, where it keeps green
all the year.
Waltheria indica, Linné. This low perennial is confined to the
Glen of Palms.

MALvaces.

Hibiscus microlenus, F.M. <A shrub attaining the height of
four to six feet. It grows on the most arid places on the
hills, and blooms, with yellow flowers, nearly the whole
summer.

Gossypium Sturtii, F. M. Grows mostly everywhere in the
sandhills.

Abutilon Fraseri, Hooker. This plant is growing almost any-
where, whilst

A. tubulosum, Hooker, is only to be found here in the ranges.

Stda corrugata, Lindl. A perennial widely spread over the
country.

Malvastrum spicatum, A. Gray. This annual grows also every-
where, but best on calcareous soil among and under the
shade of larger shrubs.

Lavatera plebeja, Sims. An annual which attains the height
of six to eight feet. It grows only in the river-beds and
in swampy ground.

HUPHORBIACER.

Adriana tomentosa, Gaudichaud. Perennial, and growing mostly
in the river-beds and near all creeks.

Phyllanthus rhytidospermus, F.M. Annual, growing only in
shady places in the ranges.

Euphorbia Drummondi, Bois, and H. eremophila,; Cunn., are
annuals spread all over the country around here.

URTICACER.
Parwetaria debilis, Forst.; an annual growing in the ranges.

SAPINDACER.

Atalaya hemiglauca, F.M. This plant grows here only in the
ranges, even on bare rocks.

Dodoena vicosa, Linné, and D. lanceolata, F. M., are shrubs,
flowering in August. The former flourishes the most on
sandy soils, whilst the latter grows only within or near
the ranges.

181

TILIACER.

Corchorus sidoides, ¥. M. A small perennial shrub, flourishing
best on calcareous soils.

GERANIACER.

Erodium cygnorwm, Nees. An annual growing only in shady
places within the ranges; flowers can be seen all the
summer.

Oxalis corniculata, Linné. This annual grows only after rains
in the beds of creeks.

ZYGOPHYLLER.

Zygophyllum apiculatum, F. M.; Z. ammophilum, F. M.; Z.
Jructiculosum, Cand. The two first are annuals, and, here,
the first messengers of the coming spring. The three are
disposed all over the country around here, and will grow
on the driest sandy soil.

PHYTOLACCACER.

Gyrostemon ramulosus, Desf. A shrub growing on limestone
hills, and in general on stony ground.

Codonocarpus cotinifolius, F. M. A tree attaining the height of
20 to 30 feet; it seems to prefer the most deserted places,
as itis only to be found either on sandhills or on rocky
ground.

CaRYOPHYLLER.
Polycarpea corymbosa, Lam. An annual growing on stony

ground.
PoRTULACCE.

Claytonia Balonnensis, Lindl., and C. corrigiolacca, F. M., are
annuals, and grow almost everywhere here, provided the
soil is not too dry.

AMARANTACER.

Huxolus Mitchelli, F. M., an annual growing on stony tracts.

Prilotus nobilis, F. M. This annual is only growing here on
rich soil in the ranges ; whilst

P. obovatus, KF. M., and P. helipteroides, F. M., can be seen
almost everywhere, particularly on sandy plains.

Alternanthera triandra, Lamarck.

CHENOPODIACER.

| Rhagodia spinescens, R. Brown. A shrub growing only in shady
places, particularly among dense bush.

Chenopodium carinatum, R. Br. An annual spread all over the
country.

Dysphania plantaginella, F. M. An annual; it grows only in
rich and moist soil, particularly in swampy places.

132

Enchylena tomentosa, R. Br., is widely dispersed.

Chenolea diacantha, F. M. A small annual growing on stony ~
ground ; sheep feed well upon it.

C. paradoxa F. M., grows almost everywhere.

Kochia villosa, Lindl., grows mostly on calcareous soils ; whilst

K. eriantha, F. M., can be seen everywhere. Sheep feed well
on both species.

Salsola Kali, Linné. An annual which attains an enormous
size.

NycraGinex.

Boerhaavia diffusa, Linné. Grows here only in the Glen of
Palms, and is perennial.

LEGUMINOS®.

Brachysema Chambersi, F. M. <A perennial; it grows here
only on the sandhill on Rudall’s Creek. The natives eat
the flowers of it.

Isotropis atropurpurea, F. M. Annual growing everywhere.

I. Wheeleri, F. M. Perennial, growing on sandy soil in
general, mostly on sandhills.

Crotalaria Cunningham, R. Br. Growing even on the most arid
tracts.

C. medicaginea, Willd. Grows only on rich soil; whilst

C. dissitiflora, Beuth., will grow even on the white sand of the

creeks.

Lotus australis, Seringe. Annual, and growing mostly on sandy
soils.

Psoralea patens, Lindl. Perennial, and spread all over the
country.

Indigofera linifolia, Retzius. Annual, growing only in rich
loamy ground.

I. viscosa, Lam., and TI. enneaphylla, Linné, are both annuals of
rich clayey soil.

I. brevidens, Bentham. A shrub, growing here only in the
ranges.

Tephrosia purpurea, Pers., on stony ground.

Rhynchosia minima, De Cand., is a creeping perennial growing
in stony places.

Glycine clandestina, Wend\. Perennial, grows on sandhills.

Cassia pleurocarpa, F. M. A shrub, grows on sandy soil.

C. sophera, Linné, is an annual flourishing best in river beds.

C. glutinosa, Cand. A shrub growing on rocky tracts.

C. desolata, F. M.

C. artemisioides, Gaudich.

C. eremophila, Cunn.

Petalostylis labicheoides, R. Br., a little shrub growing on lime-
stone hills and the ranges.

All shrubs, growing in all deserted
places.

133

Acacias, all phyllodineous, are here in a vast number of species,
but their names shall follow next year.

HALORAGER.
Haloragis Gossei, F. M. An annual, growing all about.

Myrracren.
Calycothrix longifolia, F. M.
Melaleuca glomerata, F. M.; MM. parviflora, Lindl. Shrubs
growing almost everywhere.

Eucalyptus pachyphylla, EF. M.; £. gamophylia, F. M.; and £.
oleosa, F. M.

PROTEACER.
Grevillea Sturtii, R. Br., in the ranges; G. angulata, R. Br.
Hakea lorea, R. Br.; Glen of Palms. 4. leucoptera, on loamy

plains. Several other kinds of Protaceous plants exist
here.

THYMELER.
Pimelea trichostachya, Lindl. A small perennial growing on
stony rises.
SANTALACE.
Santalum lanceolatum, R. Br.

UMBELLIFERS.

Didiscus glaucifolius, ¥. M:) Both annuals, growing here only
Daucus brachiatus, Sieb. on rich but loose soil.

RUBIACER.

Canthiwm latifolium, ¥F. M. A tall shrub, growing on stony
ground, particularly in the ranges. Its sweet berries are
the favourite eating of the natives here.

Composit”.

Of this order a vast number of species exist here; some only
are given. Several are good for sheep as well as for cattle
and horses.

Aster subspicatus, F. M., and A. Ferresi, F. M., are not restricted
to any particular tract.

Vittadinia australis, Rich., grows on sandy soil.

Podocoma cunetfolia, R. Br. An annual growing on limestone
hills only.

Calotis lappulacea, Benth.; C. hispidula, F.M. Annuals, on
sandy soils.

EE iciilon Billardieri, ¥. M. A perennial, flourishing mostly
on limestone hills.

Pluchea Eyrea, ¥. M. Annual, widely dispersed here.

134

Pterigeron microglossus, Benth. Perennial, growing on sandy
tracts. It has very lovely flowers.

Wedelia sp. A perennial shrub growing in the ranges and
stony places in general.

Glossogyne tenuifolia, Cass. Annual, on sandy soil.

Angianthus sp. An annual, growing only in pila places.

Rutidosis helichrysoides, De Cand. An annual flouris ing mostly

on limestone hills. It is spreading rapidly.

Iviolena tomentosa, Sond. and F.M. A perennial, growing
everywhere.

Podolepis canescens, Cunn.- A small annual, growing only on
sandhills.

Helichrysum Cassinianum, Gaud. Annual, growing the most
luxuriantly amongst dense mulga-shrubs.

HA. Lawrencella, F. M.; an annual, in shady and moist places.

Hi. lucidum, Henckel. Annual, spread over the whole country,
but the lovely flowers develop their beauty only in the
most deserted tracts.

HZ. apiculatum, Cand. Annual or biennial, growing anywhere.
Horses are extremely fond of it.

H. Thomsoni, F.M.; an annual growing only in shady places
in the ranges.

Helipterum floribundum, Cand. Annual; rich loamy plains are
after rains quite covered with its flowers.

H. stipitatum, F. M.; this annual plant with its lovely flowers
exists here only jn the sandhills.

HZ. incanum, Cand. Perennial, growing on stony, even very
arid ground.

HI. Tietkensi, F.M.; this annual is growing almost everywhere.

Gnaphaliumn luteo-album, Linné. An annual growing in or near ~
creeks.

Erechthites picridioides, Turcz. An annual, in moist sand of
the river beds, flowering nearly the whole summer.

Senecio Gregorit, F.M.; an annual, blooming early in spring,
and growing everywhere, even on poor sandy soil; whilst

S. magnificus, F. M., grows only on limestone hills.

CAMPANULACE.
Isotoma petrea, F.M.; an annual, on rocks; very poisonous,
but avoided by stock.
Wahlenbergia gracilis, De Cand. An annual, growing very
densely on the plains. There are two varieties here, one
with large flowers, and the other with very small ones.

GOODENOVIACER.

Leschenaultia divaricata, ¥.M.; an annual, dispersed all over
the country.

135

Velleia connata, F.M.; an annual, on limestone hills; it
possesses a tonic bitterness.

Goodenia Rameli, ¥. M.; on the ranges; whilst

G. Mueckeana, ¥.M., is only to be found on sandhills.

Scevola parvifolia, ¥.M.; an evergreen perennial, growing in
all deserted places.

Brunonia australis, Smith. An annual, in sandy regions.

GENTIANED.

Hrythrea australis, Br. Annual, grows in the sand of the
river beds; a good tonic herb, not touched by pastoral
animals.

PRIMULACEE
Samolus repens, Pers. Growing generally near the water.

JASMINE.

Jasminum lineare, R. Br. A shrubby plant.
J. caleareum, F.M.; also perennial, and growing in the ranges,

APOCYNES.

Carissa Brownii, ¥. M., var. angustifolia, is confined to the Glen
of Palms. The flowers are white, and appear in June;
the leaves are of a lively green.

ASCLEPIADE®.

Sarcostemma australe, R. Br.
Cynanchum floribundum, R. Br. In sand of the creeks.

SOLANACED.
Solanum esuriale, Lindl. Perennial, on sandy soil.
S. Sturtii. A shrub six to eight feet high in the ranges.
S. ellipticum, Br. Herbaceous, growing on rich clayey soil, and
also in the ranges.
Nicotiana suaveolens, Lehm., (Native tobacco), grows in the
moist sand of river beds, and attains an enormous size.

ScROPHULARIACES.
Stemodia Morgania, ¥.M.; spread all over the country.

ACANTHACER. '
Justicia procumbens, L. A small shrub, growing everywhere,
especially in limestone country.
J. Kempeana, ¥. M.; a dwarf perennial.
BIGNONIACE &.

Tecoma australis, Br. A somewhat creeping shrub, growing in
the ranges.

136

CONVOLVULACER.

Breweria rosea, ¥. M. A perennial, blooming in August, flowers
violet, of great beauty.

_ EBvolvulus linifolius, L. A small annual, growing in the
ranges.

BoraGinacen.

Heliotropium curassaviewn, L., and H. asperrimam, Br. Annuals,
growing on stony ground.

Halgania cyanea, Lindl. Perennial, grows on the top of the
ranges, as well as on sandhills.

Trichodesma Zeylanicum, Br. A tall annual, growing mostly
on stony ground, and blooming nearly all the year. The
delight of the dromedaries.

Cynoglossum Drummondi, Benth. Annual, growing everywhere.

LABiarTa.

Prostanthera striatiflora, ¥. M. A shrub growing on rich plains.

P. Basteri, Cunn. A variety of this grows in shady places
only in the ranges. It isa shrub six to eight feet high,
with white flowers, and very small leaves of a whitish hue.

VERBENACES.

Dicrastyles Lewellini, F. M. A perennial of very dense growth,
flowers blue, leaves of a whitish hue; it is widely spread
in the sandhills.

MYoproRinz.

Eremophila Macdonneli, F.M. A trailing shrub; it grows
everywhere.

The following are all shrubs, not restricted in habitat,
growing nearly everywhere, but mostly in the ranges :—

EF. Willsti, F. M.; #. Brownz, EF. M.; EH. Sturti, Br.; £.
Latrobei, ¥. M:; and 2. Freelingi, F. M.

CaSUARINER.

Casuarina Decaisneana, F.M., on sandhills.

CYCADER.
Encephalartos Macdonnelli, F. M., in the ranges.

CONIFERS.
Oallitris verrucosa, R. Br., only in the ranges.

MONOCOTYLEDONOUS PLANTS.
PaLMz@.

Livistona Marie, ¥. M. Along the Finke River and some of
its small tributaries.

137

JUNCACER.
Xerotes leucocephala, R. Br.

GRAMINER.
Andropogon sp., perennial confined to the ranges.
Pappophorum commune, ¥. M., annual, only in the ranges.
Festuca irritans (the Spinifex of colonists) ; is the real plague
of the country ; it grows everywhere.

ACOTYLEDONOUS PLANTS.
FILIces.
Chetlanthes vellea, ¥. M., perennial, growing on rocks only.

DIAGNOSES OF

NEW SPECIES OF PLANTS DISCOVERED
IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

Translated and communicated by Srirtine Smeaton, B.A.,
- Associate.

[Read October 5, 1880.]

Justicia Kempeana. F-. v. M., Fragmenta Phytographie Australia,
vol. xi., p. 101. (Ord. Acanthacez).

Very thinly pubescent, herbaceous, leaves small, circular or
obovate and wedge-shaped, crenately dentate, or almost entire ;
flowers axillary solitary, or more rarely almost sessile in twos
and threes; bracts herbaceous, leaf-like; calyx five-cleft,
below narrow-lanceolate, above lineas-subulate, the lips of the
projecting corolla about double the calyx and equal to its own
tube ; the lower lip shortly trifid; the stamens projecting
from the throat of the corolla, one cell of the anthers shortly
spurred, the style and ovary smooth; capsule much stipitate ;
seeds warty and rough.

Near the MacDonnell Range—Rev. H. Kempe. In the
neighbourhood of the Ashburton River and between the
Gascoyne and Murchison Rivers—E. Giles.

A perennial herb, one foot and a half high, or shorter.
Branches thickly covered with appressed hairs. Leaves
shortly petiolate, oblong, and wedge-shaped; upper ones

L

138

sometimes narrow lanceolate, three to six lines long, and
occasionally nine lines. Two opposite bracts one and
a-half to three lines long (in the narrow-leaved variety
‘longer and linear-lanceolate). Calyx about one quarter
inch long. Corolla rose-tinted; upper lip almost semi-ovate,
very shortly and bluntly two-toothed, or nearly entire;
the lobes of the lower lip bluntly rounded, the middle one
broadest ; the tube with the lower lip slightly crested in two
longitudinal folds, below, the cresting doubly barbed, from
which arise small folds ascending to the upper lip, indicating
possibly two suppressed stamens ; the middle lobe of the lower
lip outside in the bud; the upper lip inside before unfolding ;
zestivation imbricate, not contorted. Stamens two, with smooth
slender filaments slightly thickened above. Anthers smooth,
coherent for a time ; the free lobe oblique and somewhat the
higher, the spur of the lower lobe pale and nearly mem-
braneous, narrow, and almost acute. Style hairlike, smooth,
nearly half an inch long. Stigma very small, semi-ovate.
Disc cup-shaped, sinuate-dentate. Ovary four-celled; gem-
mules both superior. Capsule five to six lines long; the
seedless base a little shorter than the hollows of the cells.
Seeds brown, round, a little more than one line across, with
flattened prickly rugosities, half surrounded by an acute
retinaculum.

From the neighbouring species of Justicia hygrophila it is
chiefly separated by its shorter and almost shrubby stem,
greater hairiness, smaller leaves (often toothed), leafy bracts,
the often solitary flowers, corollas more evidently hairy on the
outside, and (as to the variety with narrow bracts) the longer
stalked capsule; and, finally, the seeds more warty than
granulated with the thickened edge.

Flowers in August and September, and prefers a limy soil.

Scheenus Tepperi. F.v. M.; loc. cit., p. 106. (Ord. Cyperacez).

Very dwarf, stem very short, one-spiked, much exceeded by the
very narrow-chanelled leaves; lowest bracts produced into a
long narrow leafy appendage; the other bracts few, mem-
branous, with a rather wide margin; a single fertile flower ; no
hypogynous bristles; seed vessel three-cornered, obovate, pale
in colour, striated longitudinally with three narrow folds.

Yorke’s Peninsula—Otto Tepper.

Plant forms tufts. Leaves for the most part from one to
one and a-half inches in length, barely one-third line in width,
beardless, a little rough at the edge. The flowerless part of
the stem searcely equal in length to the peduncular spikelet.
Bracts besides the leafy point two and three lines long; the
upper ones narrow but rather obtuse. Stem hollowed out or

139

eurved for the reception of the solitary fruit. Stamens unseen
as yet by me. Style two to three lines long, thin and bristle-
like. Stigmas three, hairy, a little shorter than the style.
Seed vessel two-thirds of a line long.

This species approaches Schenus trachycarpum, but differs
from it in its extraordinary dwarfness, shortened peduncle,
shorter bracts below the involucre, longer and more mem-
braneous floral bracts, less wrinkled fruit, and no more than a
single fertile flower, in which last characteristic it differs from
all its congeners hitherto known.

Battarrea Muelleri. Kalchbr. (M.S.); F. v. M., loc. cit., p. 106.
(Fungi).

Whitish; inner peridium campanulo-mitrate; stalk solid,
very long, chuffy, and scaly, thickened by degrees above; the
chaft-like scales linear lanceolate directed downwards, almost
imbricate ; spores globose, warty, of a rusty colour, with short
filaments, almost spiral, placed between the spores.

In the neighbourhood of Spencer’s Gulf—O. Tepper.

A noteworthy species of a remarkable genus.

Stem nine or ten times longer than the breadth of the cap.
External peridium hitherto unknown. Spores ‘004mm. across.

140

ON THE AUSTRALIAN TERTIARY
PALLIOBRANCHS.

By Proressor Rate Tare, F.G.S., &., President.

Plates VII.—XI.
[Read October 5th, 1880.]

Bibliography.—Among the fossils collected by Captain Sturt
during his journey down the River Murray, and figured in his
work ‘“ Two Expeditions into the Interior of South Australia,”
1834, is one terebratulid. The shell has been described and
variously named by subsequent authors, and is referred to in
this paper as Waldheimia Garibaldiana, Davidson. Mr. G. B.
Sowerby, in Count Strzelecki’s “ Physical Description of New
South Wales and Van Diemen’s Land,” 1845, describes and
figures a second palliobranch as Zerebratula compta, which 1
have removed to the genus Magasella. In 1862 Mr. Davidson
described Sturt’s terebratulid in the ‘“ Geologist,” vol. v., under
the name of Waldheimia Garibaldiana, at that time believing it
to be from the Tertiary beds of Malta. In the same year
appeared the Rey. J. HE. Tenison Woods’ “Geological Obser-
vations in South Australia,” in which Sturt’s terebratula is
confounded with Z. compta, Sow.; but in the “Trans. Phil. Soe.,
Adelaide,” for 1865, he figures and describes it as a new species
under the name of Waldheimia imbricata. In the same paper
Mr. Woods describes Waldheimia gigas, W. Crouchti, and shows
that Terebratula compta belongs to Lerebratella, in which genus
he describes a second species as 7. Tenisont. Additional species
are made known by Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., in a paper entitled

‘On some Species of Terebratulina, Waldheimia, and Terebra-

tella from Mount Gambier and the Murray River Cliffs.”
(Annals and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 1876). Of the five species
herein deseribed and figured :— Waldheimia Gambierensis, which
is identical with W. grandis, Woods, and W. Garibaldiana,
were previously known: a Terebratella is erroneously referred
to T. compta, it is a species closely allied to the recent
Magasella Cumingiana, | have named it MZ. Woodsiana. The
remaining two species, Waldheimia Taylort and Terebratulina
Davidsoni, are decidedly new.

The Rey. J. E. Tenison Woods describes and figures (Trans.
Roy. Soe., N.S.W., 1878) some palliobranchs from the Miocene

141

beds at Table Cape, Tasmania, collected by Mr. R. M. Johnston.
Unfortunately the species are very inadequately illustrated ;
and also because of the very brief characters given, it is almost
impossible to understand the species. However, I have been
favoured by Mr. Johnston with the loan of the very excellent
drawings of the original specimens, and of some specimens
named from the types. The species represented are, so far ag
I can judge, Waldheimia Garibaldiana, and the previously
undescribed Terebratula vitreoides, Waldheimia Tateana, and a
species erroneously referred to W. Corioensis, McCoy. The
last may be a Zerebratella; it is unknown to me. An
undescribed Rhynchonella is also referred to in the text.
Professor McCoy, in the “ Fifth Decade of the Paleontology
of Victoria,” 1877, figures and describes a new and remarkable
Waldheimia as W. Corioensis,and adult forms of W. Garibaldiana
_ under the name of W. macropora.

From these sources nine species have been well established,
and the existence of three or four others are indicated. Adding
to these the species now described for the first time, the total
number of palliobranchs from the Australian Tertiaries is 33,
generically distributed as follows:—Terebratula, 4; Wald-
heimia, 15; Terebratulina, 4; Terebratella, 4; Magasella, 4;
Thecidium, 1 ; and Rhynchonella, 1.

Localities and Horizons —The surpassing richness in pallio-
branchs of most fossiliferous localities in South Australia is
imperfectly indicated by the fact that all the above species,
excepting Terebratella Woodsii and Thecidium australe, have
been collected within the province. My experience as a
collector beyond the limits of the colony is limited to the
Muddy Creek beds, near Hamilton, Victoria. In many of the
sections the profusion of palliobranchs and echinoderms
recalls a feature of the Jurassic formations. Their generally
good state of preservation, and the comparative facility with
. which the interiors can be dissected out, have enabled me to
discriminate species with a much greater degree of confidence
than is usually possible. Indeed, no criterion as to generic
position can be drawn from the external characters alone.
Thus, without a knowledge of the interior of Zerebratula
Aldinge, that shell might very well have been referred to
Waldheimia, if not indeed associated with W. insolita. Again,
the external characters by which Terebratella furculifera is
separable from W. insolita are so trivial in themselves, though
nevertheless practical tests, that one might well hesitate to
regard them of specific value. In consequence of a mimetic
resemblance among some species in different genera, I have
hesitated to assign to its genus any species whose interior
characters have not been ascertained. In such cases of

142

uncertainty the generic name employed has a note of interro-
gation affixed.

The uppermost set of marine fossiliferous beds of the South
Australian Tertiaries is almost devoid of palliobranchs; and
only in one locality—near Morgan, on the River Murray—have
specimens been gathered in a sufficiently good state of preser-
vation for accurate determination. The superior beds of the.
River Murray cliffs, or Upper Murravian, I have elsewhere
endeavoured to prove are contemporaneous with the celebrated
fossiliferous strata of Muddy Creek, in Victoria. In both of
of them the palliobranchs are all of small size, and are for the
most part dwarfed examples of species which have passed up
from lower horizons. The species in common are Waldheimia
Garibaldiana, W. Tateana, and Terebratulina Scoulari, all rare
and small. The Muddy Creek beds have yielded in addition—
Terebratulina Davidson, very rare and small ; Magasella Wood-
siana, small form, though not rare; Rhynchonella squamosa,
very rare ; Thecidiwn australe and Waldheimia Corioensis, rare.
In the basal beds of the Upper Murrayian, about Blanchetown,
a large Waldheimia (W. MacLeani) is profusely abundant.

The Middle Murravian beds contain Terebratulina Scoulari,
Waldheimia gigas, and W. Garibaldiana in great abundance.

The Lower Murravian beds of the northern section of the
Lower Murray cliffs have not yielded any examples of the
class, except Magasella Woodsiana, at one locality only
(Moorundi, near Blanchetown), where it occurs in great plenty
and of large size. But in the cliffs about Mannum and on the
River Bremer palliobranchs occur in great variety and abun-
dance. The commoner forms are Terebratulina Davidsont,
Magasella compta, M. Woodsiana, and Waldheimia (?) divaricata.

In correlated beds we have in the white limestone at Mount
Gambier Magasella Woodsiana and Terebratulina Davidsoni in
abundance ; and in the yellow Polyzoal calcareous sands of
Aldinga Bay Magasella Woodsiana, var., and Waldheimia furcata -
of infrequent occurrence. The Table Cape beds, Tasmania, are
probably not older than the above series; and though the class
is represented in them by seven species, yet individuals seem
to be rare.

Descending in the scale of our Tertiary deposits we encounter’
in the glauconitic limestones of the cliffs in Aldinga Bay, and
in their probable representatives on the opposite shore of St.
Vincent’s Gulf, and in the chalk of the Bunda Cliffs in the
Great Australian Bight, a palliobranch fauna.with a facies very
distinct from that of higher horizons. The total number of
species collected from them is twenty-one, or seven-elevenths
of the known Australian Tertiary species. Of these fifteen do
not pass to higher stages of the formation. Many of the

143

species occur in abundance, such as Waldheimia pectoralis, W.
suffiata, Terebratulina lenticularis, and Terebratula subcarnea;
Waldheimia Tateana, which is protusedly abundant, Terebratula
vitreoides, Terebratulina Scoulari, and T. Davidsoni occur here of a
much larger size than in the higher beds to which they pass up.

In an appended table I have set forth the stratigraphical
and geographical distribution of the species.

Alliances —The facies of our Tertiary palliobranch fauna 1s,
so far as regards genera, most decidedly modern; but the
specific points of contact are few. They are notably Tere-
bratula vitreoides, Waldheimia Garibaldiana, Terebratulina
Scoulari, Magasella Woodsiana, Thecidium australe, and Rhyn-
chonella squamosa. Nevertheless, not one of the fossil forms is
actually known to be represented in living creation. Of the
above Z. vitreoides and Th. australe are related to living
Mediterranean species, whilst the others have near recent allies
in the Australasian region. On the other hand, the great
richness in species of Waldheimia, more than half of which
are of exceedingly large size, gives to the faunula a character
peculiarly its own. The presence, moreover, of several bipli-
cated species of that genus is another fact which increases the
contrast between our Tertiary and living palliobranch faunas.

A general resemblance seems to subsist between our Tertiary
species and those of the European Miocene ; but if the Tere-
bratule of the latter are correctly so assigned, then the
resemblance is in part at least mimetic rather than actual.
Thus Waldheimia grandis approaches Terebratula Pedemontane ;
W. insolita to Terebratula Hilarionis ; and other similitudes
might be pointed out.

The absence of the genera Megerlia, Platidia, and Argiope
from our Tertiary fauna, also the paucity of Rhynchonella, and
the presence of MMagasella, offer great difficulties to the
establishment of any well-defined relationship between the
European and Australian Tertiarv palliobranch faunas. If we
select Terebratula subcarnea and the Terebratulinas (excepting
T. Scoulari), we might, as equally well, claim for the Australian
Tertiary palliobranch fauna a Cretaceous facies.

Viewed in its entirety our Tertiary palliobranch fauna
has as much a character of its own, as it has affinity with
that of the European Caniozoic or to that of recent Australia.
But viewed in its duality, then the older is seen to be far
removed from recent types, whilst the newer is seen to possess
more pronounced affinities with members of the class inhabiting
the seas around and adjacent to this continent. In respect to
the older fauna, it may be well to recall the fact that two at
least of its species (Waldheimia insolita and Rhynchonella
sguamosa) are constituents of the fauna of the Upper Eocene

144

of New Zealand; and I have reason for the opinion that when
a careful comparison shall have been instituted between the
fossils of the Eocene of New Zealand and those from the
- Aldinga beds great specific identity will be found to obtain.

DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES.
Terebratula vitreoides, T. Woods. Plate viii., fig. 5@ 5b. Plate x.,
figs. 7Ta—7b.

Ref—Trans. Roy. Soc. New South Wales, 1878, p. 78,
figs. 4a—d.

“A small, smooth, orbicular species, with very conspicuous
concentric lines of growth. Foramen small. Of this fossil
Mr. Davidson says—‘ This is another of those undecided forms
that resemble many things described as distinct species. It
has some resemblance to Z. vitrea or to 7. orbicularis, Sequenza,
I would not like to assign it positively to any species, although
I would not assign to it any very distinguishable features.’ ”’—
T. Woods.

The specimen which I have figured Plate viii., fig. 5. under
the above name is one of a small series from the lower beds at
Aldinga, agreeing very well with Woods’ description and
figures, except that the foramen is usually larger. Of the
Aldinga examples I have not been able to dissect out the
interior ; but somewhat similar shells from the River Murray
cliffs prove to have the loop of a Zerebratula, see plate x.,
fig. 7. Of the latter I have only been successful in collecting
three examples, all of which are smaller than the Aldinga
specimens, and differ in being more gibbous with depressed
sides, and in having a smaller foramen, characters which
approximate it more to Z. vitrea, Born., whilst the Aldinga
specimens make an approach to 7. elliptica, Sequenza. The
differences, which may be due to age, are too slight to justify
the specific separation of the two forms.

The loop of 2. vitreoides differs from that of T. vitrea in being
relatively shorter and stouter, the breadth of the curved front
portion is much greater, and the crural processes are incon-
spicuously developed.

Dimensions.—A. large specimen from Aldinga has the follow-
ing measures :—Length, 1°45; breadth, 1:05; thickness, °7 inch.
One from the Murray cliffs:—Length, 1:0; breadth, ‘8;
thickness, ‘5 inch.

Locality and Horizon—Lower Aldinga—glauconitic lime-
stones, Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay; and Middle Murrayian,
calcareous sands at Blanchetown. (Tate).

Table Cape, Tasmania. (R. M. Johnston).

Terebratula Aldings, spec. nov. Plate x., figs. 2a—2b.
Shell obtusely five-sided ; a little longer than wide; broadest

145

about the anterior third ; straight or slightly indented in front.
Valves moderately convex, the brachial valve more depressed.
Surface marked with inequidistant concentric imbricate
lamelle of growth. Punctations of test not visible under a
pocket lens, except in thin sections when viewed by trans-
mitted light; punctations minute, widely separated. Beak
small incurved and obliquely truncated by a small oval
foramen, separated from the umbo of the brachial valve by a
small triangular deeply impressed deltidial plate (elements
not distinguishable). Interior without a medial septum; of
the loop the part posterior to the crura only known. These
portions are longer, more slender, and less divergent than in
T. vitreoides.

Dimensions.—Length, ‘9; breadth, °75 ; thickness, ‘45 inch.

Obs.—Young examples of this terebratulatid and Terebra-
tella furculifera closely resemble each other, but the latter is
at once known by its densely punctated shell structure and
foramen. From Zerebratula vitreoides it differs especially in
its nearly flat brachial valve and pentagonal shape.

Locality and Horizon —In the glauconitic limestones, north
side of Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay. (Twelve examples).

Terebratula (?) subcarnea, spec. nov. Plate ix., figs. la—1b.

The interior of this species is not known, and the external
characters which belong to Waldheimia are not presented by it.
It so closely resembles 7%. carnea of the European Cretaceous
rocks, that it is only after very careful comparison with many
specimens of that species that differences are found to exist.
T. subcarnea has a larger, though small, foramen; the brachial
valve is not so gibbous; and its greatest breadth is nearly
medial. These characters partly serve to separate it from
T. carneoides,* Guppy, of the Antillian Miocene, to which must
be added that the front margin of our shell is either straight
or slightly depressed.

Dimensions of a large specimen :—Length, 1? inches nearly ;
breadth, 13 inches; thickness, 1 inch nearly.

Locality and Horizon.—In the top-bed of chalk, Bunda Cliffs,
Great Australian Bight. (For the geology of, see vol. 11. p.
104, of this Society’s Transactions).

Terebratula (?) bulbosa, spec. nov. Plate vii., figs. 5a—b.

Shell ovate, longer than wide, rounded laterally and
attenuated towards the narrow, nearly straight, slightly
crenulated front.

Brachial valve very convex, slightly depressed near the

* Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., London, vol. xxi., t. 19, fig. 3, p. 296, 1866;
and Davidson, Geol. Mag., 1874, t. 8, fig. 11, p. 158.

146

front ; interior unknown. Peduncular valve as deep as the
opposite valve ; beak large, incurved, and obliquely truncated
by a large obovate foramen.

Surface smooth, marked by moderate lines and strie of
growth.

Dimensions.—Length, 1°8; breadth, 1°35; thickness, 1:3 inch.

Locality and Horizon—In the coarse limestones forming the
low sea-cliff on the south side of the jetty at Hdithburgh,
Yorke’s Peninsula. (One example).

Waldheimia Garibaldiana, Davidson. Plate xi., figs. la—lc.

Ref—Geologist, vol. v., p. 446, t. 24, £. 9, 1862.

Id. R. Etheridge, jun., Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., vol.
17, p./7, tol, £2, 1876.

Syn.—tTerebratula sp., Sturt. Two Expeds. in 8. Aust.,
vol. 11., t: 3, £. 15, 1834.

Terebratula compta, Woods. Geol. Obs. in 8. Aust., p. 74,
wdct., 1862 (non Sow).

Waldheimia imbricata, Woods. Proc. Phil. Soc., Adelaide,
fig. 3, 1865; and Trans. Roy. Soc. of N.S.W., p. 79, £. 1, 1878.

Waldheimia macropora, McCoy. Prod. Pal. of Victoria,
decade v., pl. 43, figs. 4 and 6, 1877.

W. imbricata, W. Garibaldiana, and W. macropora,
Htheridge. Cat. Aust. Fossils, 1878.

W. Garibaldiana is the commonest palliobranch in the middle
beds of the River Murray cliffs, and exhibits some slight
variation of form and ornament, more particularly in respect
to age. The example figured by Etheridge is exceptionally
large, and is more angular in outline and more deeply sulcated
than the majority of adult specimens which I have seen. In
its adolescent stage of growth, which is represented by Sturt’s
figure, the outline of shell is more or less circular, with
slightly convex valves, which are fimbriated; but the front is
not depressed, nor is there an appearance of biplication.

The form varies from nearly circular to ovate; and the
pentagonal outline, though never obscure in the adult, varies
in its angularity, and in the depth of the sulci exhibits much
variation, as also the height and number of ribs. The medial
depression is occupied with from three to six longitudinal ribs,
and the lateral portions of the valves have usually about ten
curved ribs on each side.

The loop is that of a Waldheimia reaching nearly to the
front in a gentle curve, the reflected portion approximating to
the long slender erect crure, which are rather distant from the
hinge plate.

The shell structure is conspicuously punctate as viewed with
a pocket lens. The pores are large circular, but not so

147

peers as in W. flavescens in the proportion of about five to
eight.

Dimensions—A. senile example: length, 1:'75 inch; breadth,
1:5 inch; depth, 1 inch.

The specimen figured by Mr. Etheridge, another aged form:
—Length, 1:5; breadth, 1:25; depth, ‘8 inch.

A rather large example, in which the diverging ribs of the
pedunecular valve and the arched front have not acquired
prominence, has length, 1:2, breadth 1:0, depth 0°75 inch.

Alliance—W. Garibaldiana bears some resemblance to W.
Jflavescens, now living off the eastern and southern coasts of
Australia ; but as pointed out by Mr. Davidson, is less ovate,
the beak is less elongated, and it has a smaller foramen; and
to which differences has been added by Prof. McCoy that of
the very much larger pores of the test of the fossil species. In
its adult state W. flavescens never acquires that remarkable
development of the frontal sinus and longitudinal ridges
observable in all aged examples of W. Garibaldiana.

Observations —Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., is evidently wrong in
referring Sturt’s terebratulid to Terebratella compta, as Sturt’s
figure represents a fimbriated shell, and in other respects is
totally unlike 7. compta. The error is traceable perhaps to
Mr. Woods, who reproduced Sturt’s figure, and appled to it
the name of JZ. compta; a rectification was, however, made by
him a few years later, when he described it as a new species
under the name of Waldheimia imbricata. Though he does not
refer to the figure in his “ Geological Observations,” nor to
Sturt’s, yet as the drawing which accompanied his paper in the
Transactions of the Philosophical Society of Adelaide seems to
be a reproduction of one or the other, there cannot be a doubt
that Sturt’s terebratula and Woods’ Waldheimia imbricata
belong to the one species.

That W. imbricata, Woods, is a young example of W. Gari-
baldiana, Etheridge, is an opinion formed after the examination
of many score of specimens of the species, ranging from less
than one-third inch in diameter to more than one and a half
inches in diameter. W. macropora, McCoy, is a somewhat
intermediate form.

I have selected from a large series collected from the same
stratum at Blanchetown three specimens (pl. x1., figs. la—Ile),
which illustrate as many stages of growth, and to which the
names of W. imbricata, W. macropora, and W. Garibaldiana
have been respectively applied.

The shell, which Mr. Woods has figured (Trans. Roy. Soc.,
N.S.W., p. 79, fig. 2) as the young of this species, differs not:
only in its well-developed longitudinal ribs from juvenile
examples of W. Garibaldiana, but seems rather to have the

148

characters belonging to a Terabratulina. It bears some resem-
blance to my J. triangularis.

Mr. Etheridge, 1. cit., January, 1876, writes :—“‘ When

originally described, W. Garibaldiana was supposed to have
come from the Tertiary beds of Malta; but Mr. Davidson
afterwards satisfied himself that it in reality came from Mount
Gambier. The nature of the matrix filling the valves bears
out this view, for it agrees exactly in lithological character
with that adhering to authenticated specimens from the same
locality.” One would think from this that all doubt as to the
habitat of the species was setatrest. Butnotso Mr. Davidson
supphes a note to Mr. Woods (Trans. Roy. Soc., N.S.W.,
p- 78, 1878), to the effect that the Tasmanian shell referred
to under the name of W. imbricata, nobis, W. macropora,
McCoy, MLS., “‘is a new but allied species, and has also a little
resemblance to my W. Garibaldiana, although I think not the
same species.”” Prof. McCoy says of it, however :—“I do not
know how it can be separated from Davidson’s W. Garibal-
diana.” Nevertheless, Prof. McCoy remarks in an appendix to
his description of W. macropora:—‘I should have thought
Mr. Davidson’s W. Garibaldiana identical with this species,
but in a letter I have seen from him to the Rey. Mr. Tenison
Woods— [referred to above|—he thinks differently.” I
think it not improbable that Prof. McCoy has misinterpreted
Mr. Davidson’s remarks, which bear solely upon the possible
separation of the Tasmanian shell from W. Garibaldiana, and
do not necessarily imply that the type of the species is not
Australian. As Mr. Davidson observes, “ the subpentahedral
elongated shape—[of the Tasmanian shell|—is remarkable ;”
but it can be matched with examples from the River Murray
cliffs, and is nothing more than one of the forms of this
variable species.

The publication of Davidson’s name has priority over that of
W. imbricata, whilst the latter antedates that of W. micropora
by several years. '

Locality and Horizon—Upper Murravian, near Morgan, and
Muddy Creek, Hamilton; rare and of stunted growth. (Tate.)

Middle Murravian, River Murray cliffs, North-west Bend,
Blanchetown, &c. (Sturt, Tate, &c.)

Lower Murravian, River Murray cliffs at Mannum; on the
River Bremer, three miles south from Callington ; rare. (Tate.)

Mount Gambier (Woods) ; between Mount Eliza and Mount
Martha (McCoy) ; Table Cape, Tasmania (R. M. Johnston.)

Waldheimia furcata, spec. nov. Plate vii., figs. 2a—2b.

Shell obscurely pentagonal, inflated ; valves about equally
convex, ornamented with sub-acute ribs, which commence from

149

the umbonal region and increase in number by bifurcation to-
wards the front, and numerous and close-set transverse lamelle.
The line of contact of the two valves is in one plane, and is
only slightly indented by ridges and sulci.

Beak produced, sub-erect to slightly incurved, truncated by
a small foramen, and separated from the hinge line by a delti-
dium. Pores of the test circular few and large, as in W.
Garibaldiana, but not so numerous in the proportion of four to
five. Reflected portion of loop unknown ; septum very promi-
nent, extending for about half the length of the valve. Crurz
very short ; loop towards its origin, rather broadly compressed,
and falcately excavated on the upper side.

Dimensions —Length, ‘8 inch; breadth, ‘6 inch; depth, ‘5
inch.

Observations —In its sub-pentagonal form and small foramen
it closely resembles W. Garibaldiana, from which it is separable
by its inflated form, straight front margin, and by the bifurea-
tion of its strongly fimbriated ribs, and in certain details of
the loop. It comes nearer to W. flavescens than W. Garibal-
diana does, but, as with that shell, it has a much smaller
foramen and fewer and larger pores.

- Locality and Horizon—Rather rare in the Polyzoal ealci-
ferous sands forming the lower part of the sea-cliffs immediately
to the south of Port Willunga jetty, Aldinga Bay, and at Sea-
ford, near mouth of the River Onkaparinga, St. Vincent’s Gulf ;
at Surveyor’s Point, Yorke’s Peninsula.

Waldheimia (?) divaricata, spec. nov.. Plate viii., figs. 8Sa—8d.

This species has some resemblance to W. Garibaldiana, but
is a narrower shell. The brachial valve is less inflated and
much depressed in front, and the convexity of this valve is more
or less interrupted by a median longitudinal depression, corres-
ponding to which in the other valve is a strong truncated keel.
The beak is more depressed, the deltidial area broader, and the
beak ridges more conspicuous.

The ribs are en chevroa, rarely inconspicuous. It also
presents in form some agreement with Magasella Woodsiana, but
in that shell the valves are regularly convex, and the front
margin is not angulated.

The loop is unknown, but there is a well-developed septum,
which extends for about half the length of the valve. There
are no signs of transverse attachments.

Dimensions—Length, 1 inch; breadth, -75 inch; depth, ‘5
inch.

Locality and Horizon—In the red raggy limestones of the
River Murray cliffs at Mannum (many examples).

150

Waldheimia Tateana, Woods. Plate vii., figs. 6a—6b; plate viii., figs.
6a—6c ; plate ix., fig. 2.
Ref—Terebratula Tateana, Tenison Woods.
Trans. Roy. Soc., N.S.W., p. 79, £. 5, 1878.

Shell longitudinally oval, narrow, widest about the middle ;
sides slightly rounded, nearly straight in front. Valves
moderately convex; surface smooth, marked with a few con-
centric strie of growth. Beak long, narrow, sub-ereect, trun-
eated by a small circular foramen.

Shell structure conspicuously punctate under a lens; pores
oval, large, crowded, rather larger than in W. Garibaldiana,
but about equal in number.

The loop offers no particular character; in a specimen of
a total length of ‘8 inch the loop reaches within 1} lines of the
front.

Dimensions of a median-sized example.—Length, ‘8 ; breadth,
°55; thickness, 35 inch.

Observation—The species exhibits considerable variation ;
typical specimens are insensibly connected with an ovate form,
with rounded sides and front. Another phase of its variability
is exhibited by the development of a biplicated front, which
gives to the shell a subpentagonal outline. In this latter
variety the peduncular valve has a broad shallow depression in
the middle line bounded by obtuse folds, corresponding with
which, in the brachial valve, is a broad median ridge, bounded
by two short almost marginal sulci. There are imperceptible
gradations connecting the oval, ovate, and subpentagonal
shapes ; the sulcations are always shallow and limited.

The specimens upon which the species was founded prove
on actual examination to be immature examples, though they
present the leading characteristics of the adults which I have
selected as typical of the species.

Locality and Horizon.—Upper Murravian, near Morgan, R.
Murray ; Muddy Creek, Hamilton (Tate) ; Table Cape, Tas-
mania (Woods). Abundant in the glauconitie limestone to
the north of Blanche Point, Aldinga (Tate); Muloowortie
clays, Yorke’s Peninsula (Tepper).

Waldheimia (?) fimbriata, spec. nov. Plate viii., figs. 2a—2b.

Shell longitudinally ovate, sides and front rounded. Valves
moderately convex, the peduncular much the deeper. Surface
marked by rounded radial ribs, which extend to about one-
third ; about five ribs occupy the front, and a like number on
each side; the rest of the surface is smooth, with a few con-
centric strie of growth. Shell structure conspicuously punc-
tate under a lens.

151

Beak largish, suberect, and truncated by a large foramen.

Loop unknown.

This species has much affinity with W. Tateana, particularly
with the biplicated variety of it, but the more pronounced
costations and the larger foramen separate it,
Dimensions.—Length, ‘9 inch; breadth, °7 inch; depth, °55
inch.

Locality and Horizon.—Glauconitic limestones, Blanche
Point, Aldinga Bay (a few examples).

Waldheimia (?) Johnstoniana, spec. nov. Plate viii., figs. 9a—9b.

Shell elongate, oval, subpentagonal ; much longer than wide,
with nearly parallel sides, attenuating somewhat rapidly to the
beak, but truncated in front. Front margin binsinuate, the
sulci shallow and very short, flanked on each side by faint

lice.

i Valves about equally and regularly convex, not inflated.
Surface smooth, with afew inequidistant concentric lines of
growth. Test minutely and densely punctate, visible under a
pocket lens.

Beak short and stout, erect, transversely truncated by a
rather large circular foramen; deltidial pieces small, fused
together ; beak ridges inconspicuous.

Loop unknown, but the brachial valve shows a strongly
impressed medial line.

Dimensions—Length, 1:2; breath, ‘7; thickness, ‘6 inch.

Observations.—It is allied to W. Tuteana, through the bipli-
cated variety of. that species, but is relatively longer and
narrower, and its foramen is much larger, and the beak shorter
and stouter.

Locality and Horizon.—Glauconitic limestone, north side of
Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay (nine examples).

The species is named after Mr. R. M. Johnston, F.L.S., to
whom Australian geologists are indebted for much of their

knowledge on the Miocene fauna and geology of Table Cape,
Tasmania.

Waldheimia (?) insolita, spec. nov. Plate ix., figs. 6a—6b.

Shell oval, nearly as long as wide; sides and front margins
eurved ; valves moderately convex; surface smooth, with a few
concentric lines of growth.

Beak small, erect, depressed, with strong beak ridges,
obliquely truncated by a rather small circular foramen.
Deltidial pieces well-developed. :

Loop that of Waldheimia, septum about one-third the length
of the brachial valve. Punctations of test visible under a
pocket lens.

152

Specimens collected from a marly band in Blanche Point
Cliff, Aldinga, exhibit radial flashes of colour.

Dimensions.—Length, 1:1; breadth, ‘9; thickness, 45 inch.

Observations—This species has some external resemblance to
Terebratula Aldinge, but differs in its rounded outline, in the
shape of its beak, and in its smaller foramen. It varies in the
degree of convexity of the valves, the more depressed forms re-
calling the inflated variety of the Liassic W. nwmismalis, but
without its circular shape and minute foramen. It also bears
a striking likeness to Terebratula Hilarionis, Meneghini, from
the Eocene of Italy (vide Geol. Mag., 1870, p. 401, t. 17, £. 4, 5).

Locality and Horizon —Glauconitic limestones, Aldinga Bay ;
upper part of chalk rock, Bunda Cliffs, Great Australian Bight
(R. T.); Upper Eocene, New Zealand, the identification
based on specimens kindly forwarded by Dr. Hector.

Waldheimia grandis, T. Woods. PI. xi., figs. 3 and 4.

Ref—tTrans. Adelaide Phil. Soc., 1865, t. 2, fig. 1.

Syn—W. Gambierensis, Etheridge, jun., Annals and Mag.
Nat. Hist., vol. 17, p. 19, t. 2, fig. 4 (1876).

“Shell smooth, very thick, elongated, convex; ventral valve
subearinated, margin with two obscure plaits in the older
specimens ; beak short, obtuse, obliquely truncated, with a
large circular cup-shaped thickened foramen. Loop two-thirds
as long as the dorsal valve; lamelle slender, straight, reflec-
tion unknown ; septum, as long as loop, gradually tapering ;
erure thick, semicircular. Length 2:2 inches, breadth 1:4
inches. It is a very variable shell.”—T.. Woods.

Etheridge’s figure represents the adult form of the species,
though its dimensions are below the average of fully developed
examples. The Rey. J. H. Tenison Woods’ illustrations of this
species are of a large but somewhat immature specimen, in
which the biplicated front, characteristically shown in Mr.
Etheridge’s drawings, is only commencing to beformed. There
cannot be a doubt of the relationship existing between the
two shells; they, moreover, came from the same locality.

Etheridge referred his species to Waldheimia, solely because
a mesial septum was indicated by an impressed line on the
brachial valve. Tenison Woods, however, proceeds with more
caution, and states that he is not certain if it be probably
referred to that genus, though the unreflected portion of the
loop was alone unknown to him. Having been fortunate in
obtaining a full display of the interior, uncertainty as to the
generic position of the species is entirely removed. The loop
presents no character worthy of note.

Mr. T. Davidson says:—‘It approaches to the Italian

1538

Tertiary 2. Pedemontana, but still distinct, being more
regularly oval.”

My notes referring to W. Tateana and reproduced by Mr.
Woods, Trans. Roy. Soc., N.S.W., have been by mistake trans-
ferred by him to W. Gambierensis.

Dimensions of a large example :—Length, 2°4; breadth, 1°5;
thickness, 1°3 inches.

Locality and Horizon—Very abundant in the calciferous
sands occupying the middle portion of the River Murray cliffs.
about Blanchetown and Morgan; rare in the red yellow calci-
ferous sandstone forming the upper part of the Mannum cliffs
on the River Murray ; River Bremer, four miles south from
Callington (Tate). Rather rare in the coralline limestone of
Mount Gambier (Woods). Table Cape, Tasmania (R. M.
Johnston).

Waldheimia (?) Crouchii, T. Woods. Plate xi., fig. 8.

Ref—tTrans. Phil. Soc., Adelaide, 1865, t. 2, fig. 2.

This species is founded on a brachial valve of nearly circular
outline, and with seven large angular plaits on the anterior
margin.

Dimensions.—Length, 2°3 inches; breadth, 2°2 inches.

Locality—Mount Gambier (Woods).

Observations—This appears to be very distinct from its
congeners, but I suspect it to be closely related to W. grandis.

Waldheimia MacLeani, spec. nov. Plate vii., figs. la—Ic.

Shell large, a little longer than wide, with a sub-pentagonal
outline, convex; greatest width about the anterior third of the
whole length, rapidly attenuating posteriorily and gradually
narrowing anteriorily to the truncated front margin. Lateral
margins narrowly plicate, front margin sinuous, Brachial
valve regularly convex and deep, ornamented by a few curved
cost, which are limited to near the margin, with an ill-defined
medial longitudinal fold bounded by two short depressions.
Peduncular valve convex deep, the marginal plications more
pronounced and longer than in the brachial valve; a shallow
depression extends from about the middle of the front, where
it is bounded by two rounded plaits each equal in width to the
depression. Beak moderately produced, sub-erect, truncated by
a large circular foramen. Swzface of both valves with concentric
lines of growth.

Young shell ovate, without plice, the line of junction of the
valves is in one plane.

Dimensions in inches :—

Length. Width. Depth.
ey ATS 13 “45
cab) heal Sy 14 5
M

154 |

Observations.—The general shape of W. MacLeani is that of
W. Garibaldiana, but its outline is not so angular, it is more
convex, the plications shorter and stouter, and it wants the
angular folds of the peduncular valve and the depressed
_ angular front; the foramen is, moreover, very much larger,
and the beak more voluminous. Young shells of these two
species are very distinct from one another.

The alliance of W. MacLeani is rather with W. grandis,
though strikingly different in shape. Young shells of these
species at the same stage of growth show the following distine-
tive characters :—

W. MacLean1. W. GRANDIS.
Rounded front Narrowed front
no fold _ mesial folds
margin in one plane margin flexuous
larger foramen. smaller foramen.

The species is named after my friend D. MacLean, Esq., J.P.,
who has rendered great service in the cause of South Australian
paleontology, particularly by the bringing to light under
great difficulties the cranium of a balezenoid whale imbedded in
the River Murray Cliffs at Murbko, fifteen miles north of
Blanchetown.

- Locality and Horizon—W. MacLeani is profusely abundant
in a chalky limestone, which commences the limestone and
shell beds forming the Upper Murravian series at Blanchetown
and northward for about 18 miles. Many of the fossils in this
stratum, at a point about three-quarters of a mile south from
Mr. MacLean’s residence, Glenforslan, are pseudomorphs after
selenite, but in the case of the Waldheimias their tests are of
the original substance, though their interiors are for the most
filled with gypsum. By breaking the shell away there may be
obtained most beautiful casts enclosing the loop, the opacity
of which makes it a well-defined object as seen through the
transparent gypsum.

Waldheimia Vincentiana, spec. nov. Plate x., figs. 1 and 8.

Shell elongated, oval, much longer than wide, greatest
breadth in the middle, whence the shell tapers gradually to-
wards the front and beak ; marked with inequidistant concen-
tric lines of growth. Test thick, densely punctated.

Valves nearly equally convex ; the brachial valve most convex
in the umbonal region. Lateral margin of the valves nearly
straight, front margin slightly bisinuated.

Beak short, prolonged, and transversely truncated by a
circular foramen of large dimensions. Deltidial pieces dis-
tinct, rather small and narrow, beaks moderately well defined.

155

An impressed line on the surface of .the brachial valve,
extending for about one-third its length, indicates the existence
of a mesial septum. Interior unknown.

A small shell, bearing an external resemblance rather to W.
Vincentians than to any other known species, possesses internal
characters totally different from those of any Waldheimia.
The septum is remarkably long, extending through a distance
of ‘65 inch of a total curvilinear length of the brachial valve of
‘85. The loop is broadly compressed, the forward limb is con-
duplicate, and is excessively expanded anteriorly and confluent
with the returning portion of the loop ; at this point the depth
is 4th of an inch.

Dimensions—Length, 2} inches; breath, 1,% inch; depth,
1,3, inch.

Observation—The only species from the Australian Tertiaries
that bears any resemblance to W. Vincentiana is W. gigas (1.
Woods), which has, however, a more elongated shape, and 1s
more attenuated and conspicuously biplicated at the front.

Locality and Horizon—In the raggy lmestones about one
mile south from Port Vincent (or Surveyor’s Point), west coast
of St. Vincent’s Gulf (two examples).

Waldheimia Taylori, Etheridge. Plate xi., fig. 2.

Ref—Annals and Mag. of Nat. Hist., vol. xvii, p. 18, t. 1,
Eno. F876.

“ Shell elongato-ovate, longer than wide; greatest width near
the middle. Peduncular valve exceedingly convex, with two
slightly diverging obtusely-rounded ridges proceeding from
the beak towards the front, where they become lost, and en-
closing between them a narrow space which in its upper part
is rounded, and becomes flattened or a little coneave towards
the front of the shell; the iateral portions of the valve are
also flattened, but not concave; beak produced, incurved, and
truncated by an oblique circular foramen contiguous to the
umbo of the brachial valve, but separated from it by a small
deltidium. Brachial valve, slightly convex in the umbonal
region, becoming almost flat towards the front, but presenting
in its longitudinal outline a gentle continuous convexity.
Lateral margins a little flexuous; surface marked by a few
_ concentric lines of growth; shell distinctly punctate.

Length, 2 inches 3} lines; width, 1 mech 10 lines; depth, 1
inch 5 lines.

Locality and Horizon—Coralline limestone of the Murray
River clitts, near the Great Bend, S. Aust. Jus. Prac. Geology,
London.” Etheridge.

- This shell is unknown to me, unless I have mistaken for it
a narrow form of W. Corioensis, which occurs at Mannum. It

156

1s, however, distinguishable from the Mannum fossil by its
broad front and the tripartite division of the peduncular
valve. W. Taylori, W. Corioensis, and W. sufflata, which are of
about equal size, are among the largest species of the genus.

Waldheimia Corioensis, McCoy. Plate ix., figs 4 and 7; plate x., fig. 4.

Ref-—Paleontology of Victoria, Decade v., tab. 48, figs. 1—3,
1877.

Shell sub-ovate, greatest width about the middle, margin of
sides convex in the middle. Pedunculated valve very convex
or very obtusely cariated along the middle, sides flattened,
very slightly convex, becoming slightly concave near the
lateral margins ; in profile it is much arched near the large
ineurved beak, becoming tangentially straight towards the
front, which is elevated at the margin into a deep sinus
(bismuate when old). Brachial valve flattened in the
umbonal half, with lateral margins abruptly deflected at right
angles towards the other valve, becoming gradually depressed
in the middle towards the narrowed front; in old specimens
the mesial depression is divided by a wide slight convexity.

Foramen moderate, deltidium tripartite, the narrow middle
portion convex ; beak ridges moderate, angulated.

Surface smooth, with moderate lines of growth. Mesial
septum about one-half the length of the shell. Length, 22
inches. (Abridged from the original diagnosis.)

A few large terebratulids obtained at Mannum seem to agree
generally with the example of W. Corioensis, represented by
the woodeut on p. 11. The least imperfect of them is shown
by fig. 4, pl. x.

A fragment of the umbonal half of a large brachial valve
shows some peculiarities of the rostral boss. The hinge plate
is broad and deeply concave, the cardinal process is deeply
tripartite , the central lobe erect, thick, and compressed, the
laterals are divaricate, lamellar, and confluent with the crure.
(Pl sar, fig, 7.)

A single specimen of another large terebratulid (fig. 4, pl.
ix.), though differing greatly in its wide and deep mesial
depression, is provisionally referred to this species.

Locality and Horizon.—Lower Murravian, rare in raggy lime-
stones at Mannum (Tate).

Miocene Tertiary, Corio Bay, Geelong ; Jan Juc (abundant),
more rare at Muddy Creek (McCoy).

Dimensions of the specimen, fig. 4, pl. x:—Length, 2°65
inches; breadth, 1'8 inch; thickness, 1°6 inch. Of the variety,
fig. 4, p. ix) :—Length, 2:2; breadth, 2 ; thickness, 1:2 inches.

157

Waldheimia pectoralis, spec. nov. PI. yii., figs. la—d.

Shell elongate to elongate-ovate, longer than wide ; greatest
width near the middle; valves very unequal, lateral margins
strongly curved, deflected. Brachial valve strongly convex
longitudinally ; at the anterior third flattened; with a shallow
suleus proceeding from the beak and widening out to the front
margin, which is sinuated or slightly plicate. Peduncular valve
very convex and deep, with a flattish triangular area corres-
ponding with the sulcus of the other valve.

Loop reaching to near the front margin; lamelle slender,
with a slight curve towards the central line ; reflected portion
opening out to three times the width of the other ; septum high,
extending for three-sevenths of the length of the brachial
valve.

Beak produced sub-erect, truncated by a very small foramen,
and separated by a large crescentric deltidium of one piece,
which is corrugated transversely to its length. Surface of the
shell with concentric lamelle of growth; densely and minutely
punctated. Immature shell with a shallow sulcus extending to
the front margin, which is depressed and sinuous.

Dimensions—Length, 2°25 inches; breadth, 1:8; thickness,
1-1 inch.

Locality and Horizon—Not uncommon in the glauconitic
limestone, which forms the base of Blanche Point Cliff,
Aldinga.

Waldheimia (?) sufflata, spec. nov. Plate vii., fig. 3; plate viii., fig. 4.
Shell subovate, greatest width about the middle; lateral
margins convex in the middle, becoming straight or slightly
bisinuated (rarely biplicate) towards the narrow rounded front.
Test thick, surface smooth, with numerous moderately strong
lines of growth. Shell structure minutely and closely punctate,
as viewed under a lens. Peduncular valve very convex in a
longitudinal direction, and regularly convex transversely.
Beak strongly incurved, slender, foramen minute. Deltidium
of one piece, broadly triangular and deeply concave. Brachial
valve very convex, faintly impressed or flattened medially,
becoming gradually depressed in the middle towards the some-
what narrowed front.
Septum a little less than half the length of the valve. Loop
unknown.
Dimensions.—Length of a large specimen, 2°65 inches ; width,
1:8; depth, 1°6.
_ Observations —This species has the minute foramen and
slender beak of W. pectoralis, but in other respects the
differences are very great. Some examples partake of the
shape of certain varieties of W. Corioensis, but despite this

158

general resemblance, W. sufflata is at once known by its
incurved, minutely perforated beak.
Locality and Horizon.—Rare in the yellow Polyzoal calciferous
sands, forming the base of the sea cliffs, south side of Willunga
_ Jetty, Aldinga Bay ; and rough shelly limestones at Surveyor's
Point and Stansbur y, Yorke’s Peninsula. Many examples.

Terebratulina Scoulari, spec. nov. Plate viii., figs. 3a—3d.

Shell pentagonal, about half as long again as wide, broadest
about the middle, tapering gradually towards the truncated
front; sides and front slightly curved. Peduncular valve
uniformly convex, with a slight median depression in the
anterior half of the valve. Brachial valve moderately convex..
Surface ornamented with very numerous radiating rounded
ribs, which are repeatedly bifurcated; the interspaces rather
narrower than the breadth of the ribs; the entire surface
crossed by close-set concentric lines of growth; the ribs about
the margins of the umbonal regions with imbricating scales.

Hinge line narrow, arched; beak moderate ; foramen, in the
adult, complete, circular, moderate, laterally margined by
small deltidial plates.

Loop that of Terebratulina.

Dimensions —Length, 1:2 inch ; breadth, °75; thickness, ‘5.

Observations —T. Scoulari belongs to the group typified by
T. caput-serpentis, from which it differs in being more depressed
and attenuated towards the front, and in having the ribs and
concentric lines more numerous and finer; the form of the loop
is also different. In shape it closely agrees with Z. Japonica,
as also to the recent Australian species 7. cancellata. From
the latter it differs in its more pentagonal outline, less inflated
valves, and coarser ribbing ; characters which are very pro-
nounced in the young. The annulus of the loop of Z. Scoularz
is rather subcircular ; it is smaller and more contracted than
that of either of the above.

The specific name is in compliment to Mr. Gavin Scoular,
who has so ably worked out the geology of Munno Para.

Locality and Habitat—Rare in the ‘Upper 1 Murravian, near
Morgan, and at Muddy Creek, Victoria (Zate). Common in
the Middle Murravian white calciferous sand rock. Not un-
common in the glauconitic limestones of Aldinga Bay (ate).
Rare in the Muloowurtie clays, Yorke’s Peninsula (Zepper).

Terebratulina Davidsoni, Etheridge. Pl. xi., figs. 6a—6d.
Ref—Y. (?) Davidsoni, Annals and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 1876,
t.1, £.1, p. 16.
‘* Shell small, oval, flattened, tapering towards the beak,
rounded towards the front; lateral margins in one plane, not

159

sinuous. Peduncular valve slightly convex, with the beak but
little produced, truncated by a slightly oblique foramen more
or less below the apex of the beak, excavated out of its sub-
stance, and completed by the two small deltidial plates and the
umbo of the brachial valve. Brachial valve almost flat, with
the slightest indication of a mesial sinus in the front; hinge-
line a little arched. Surface of both valves ornamented with a
large number of fine radiating ribs, occasionally bifurcating,
and a few concentric lines of growth; margins crenulate.”—
Etheridge.

The founder of this species, being unacquainted with its
internal portions, placed it with a doubt in the genus
Terebratulina, but having seen the loop, which offers no special
character, I can confidently refer it to that genus.

The shell is conspicuous from its almost hemispherical shape ;
the peduncular valve being strongly convex and the brachial
valve flat, or with a slight medial depression. The ribs, which
are usually somewhat thick and crowded, are crenulated and
nodulated towards the front by strong lines of growth. The
edge of the valves is conspicuously crenulate.

Dimensions of a large and narrow specimen—Length, “46
width, 35. One of the ordinary size gives—Length, °35 ; width
3; depth, -28 inch.

Locality and Horizon.—This is one of the most widely diffused
of our palliobranchs, though not generally abundant. More
commonly the valves are widely gaping.

In the Upper Murravian beds near Morgan on the River
Murray and cotemporaneous beds of Muddy Creek, near
Hamilton, Victoria (Tate).

In the Lower Murravian at Mannum (Tate), and in the
coralline limestone at Mount Gambier (Woods and Tate).

In the glauconitic lmestones, Aldinga Bay, and corres-
ponding beds at Surveyor’s Point and Stansbury, Yorke’s
Peninsula (Tate).

Terebratulina lenticularis, spec. nov. Plate vii., figs. 4a—c.

Shell small, broadly oval, a very little longer than wide.
Brachial valve regularly convex deeper than the peduncular
valve, which is moderately convex and slightly impressed in
the middle line towards the front. Surface ornamented with
numerous rounded, bifurecating radial ribs, crowded towards
the front, and with imbricating concentric lines of growth
towards the same region. Beak stout, obtuse; hinge line
narrow, slightly arched ; fissure large, deltidial pieces incon-
spicuous.

Dimensions—Length, °35; breadth, 3; depth, 15 of an
inch.

160

Observations.—This species is with some difficulty to be dis-
tinguished from Z Seebachi, Schloenbach, from the Upper
Chalk of Hanover and Oligocene of Saxony, as it resembles it
in shape and ormentation. . lenticularis differs, however, in

its arched hinge line, smaller and obtuse beak, and in the
limited development of the deltidium.

Locality and Horizon—Abundant in the glauconitic lime-
stones, north of Blanche Point, Aldinga Cliffs (Tate), and in
the yellow clays at Muloowurtie, Yorke’s Peninsula (Tepper).

Terebratulina triangularis, spec. nov. Plate viii., figs. 7a—7d.

Shell triangularly ovate, a little longer than wide; widest
at about the anterior—third ; front and sides rounded. Sur-
face ornamented with acute ribs, bifurcating; interspaces
linear, fimbriated by imbricating lines of growth. Brachial
valve flattish, shghtly convex in the posterior part, with a faint
median depression towards the anterior, which produces a
faintly sinuous front margin. Peduncular valve regularly
convex. Beak prominent, acute; hinge line narrow and
straight ; foramen longitudinal, large, and triangular.

Dimensions.—Length, 35 inch ; breadth, °3 inch; depth, +15
inch.

Locality and Horizon——In the marls at Blanche Point,
Aldinga Cliffs, and in the chalky limestone, Bunda Cliffs, Great
Australian Bight.

Terebratella Tepperi, spec. nov. Plate ix., figs. 8a—8c.

Rounded, moderately inflated, smooth, with concentric lines
of growth. Front margin plane.

Brachial valve regularly and moderately convex to nearly
flat. Peduncular valve inflated and medially subangulated.
Beak broad, blunt, foramen large, deltidia small, separate.

Loop imperfectly known; but so much as remains in the
sole specimen which has been found to afford internal charac-
ters is clearly that of Terebratella. The medial septum is
remarkably short, being less than one-third the length of the
valve.

This species belongs to the group typified by the recent New
Zealand 7. rubicunda, Solander, for which it cannot be mis-
taken.

Dimensions.—Length, 85 ; breadth, ‘8; thickness, -45 of an
inch.

Locality and Horizon —“ Muloowurtie Clays,” near Ardros-
san, Yorke’s Peninsula (five examples). Collected by Mr.
Tepper, to whom the species is dedicated. For an account of
the geology of the Muloowurtie Cliffs see his paper Trans. of
this Society, vol. i1., p. 74.

161

Terebratella (?) pentagonalis, spec. nov. Plate ix., figs. 5a—5b.

Shell small, obtusely pentagonal, longer than wide, broadest
about the middle. Valves moderately convex, flattened along
the middle; surface marked with imbricating lamelle concen-
tric with the lines of growth.

Beak large, rather produced, obtuse ; foramen large, oblong,
incomplete ; deltidial pieces small. Interior unknown, but the
shell is placed in the genus Zerebratella, because of its incom-
plete foramen, and general resemblance to 7. rubscunda and its
allies.

Dimensions—Length, ‘65 ; breadth, ‘5; thickness, 85 of an
inch.

Locality and Horizon.—Glauconitic limestone, north side of
Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay. Two examples.

Terebratella furculifera, spec. nov. Plate xi., figs. 7a—Tc.

Shell orbicular-oval, a little longer than wide; side and
front margins in one plane. Valves moderately convex, the
peduncular valve a little the deeper, obtusely carinated in the
rostral half. Surface smooth, with a few concentric lines of
growth; conspicuously punctate under a lens.

Beak small, erect, depressed with strong ridges; truncated
by asmall triangular foramen ; deltidial pieces rather large, dis-
united.

Septum less than half the length of the valve. Loop doubly
attached, first to the diverging portions by transverse processes
from the end of the septum, and secondly by a forked process
which unites the abruptly truncated terminal bend of the loop
to the summit of the extremity of the septum. I have no less
than five specimens showing this peculiar conformation of the

oop.

Dimensions —Length, 65; breadth, 55; depth, °3 of an inch.

Observations.—Externally the species resembles Terebratula
Aldinge and Waldheimia insolita, but may be recognised by the
form of its incomplete foramen.

Locality and Horizon.—In the glauconitic limestones, Blanche,

Point, Aldinga Bay. Six examples.

Terebratella (?) Woodsii, spec. nov. PI. ix., figs. 10a—10c.

Ref-—W aldheimia Corioensis, Trans. Royal Society, N.S.W. ;
p- 79, fig. 83a—8c, 1878.

The Rev. Mr. Woods referred a small shell with a deep
‘depression on the smaller valve from Table Cape to W.
Corioensis, McCoy. But until young shells of that species are
known, it would be well to regard the identification as bad.
The only palliobranch from our Tertiaries, which possess a
mesial depression and somewhat similar shape to itis the young

162

shell of Magasella compta, but the beak and foramen of the
latter are very small. The excellent figures of the species,
drawn by Mr. R. M. Johnston, which I have had reproduced,
show a large incomplete foramen, and may therefore indicate
.a young Terebratula or allied form. If the shell be an adult,
then it probably belongs to Terebratella, where I have ventured
to place it.

Locality and Horizon —Miocene strata, Table Cape, Tasmania
(Johnston).

GENUS MAGASELLA, Dat.

The four following species are referred to Magasella, because
of the strong resemblance they bear to Terebratella (?) Cuming-
tana, now transferred by Mr. Davidson to Dall’s genus, whose
description has not yet reached me. They agree externally in
having a prominent beak with a small foramen and the
deltidium blended with the shell; the loop presents the
characters of Terebratella, whilst in others it seems to be
related to that of Magas.

Magasella compta, Sowerby. Pl. x., figs. 6a—6e.

Ref—Terebretella compta, Sow., in Strezlecki’s Phy. Desc. of
N.S.W., &ce., 1845, p. 297, t. 19, f. 4 (Won Woods’ Geol. Obs.
S. Aust., p. 74, 1862). ;

Terebratella compta, Woods, Trans. Phil. Soc., Adelaide,
f. 4a—b (? non 4c—e), 1865. (Non Etheridge, jun., Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist. t. 2, f. 5, p. 19, 1876.)

“Shell smooth, thin trapezitorm ; lateral margins sub-
incurved, anterior margin small obtuse. Hinge area large, with
a longitudinal depressed line at either side. Brachial valve
triangular, rounded slightly, truncated in front with a small
median sinus; peduncular valve faintly keeled. Foramen
terminal, small, and round.”—Sowerby. To which description
Mr. Woods has added brachial valve sub-cordiform, flat, and
both valves marked with concentric lines of growth.

The young is nearly circular in outline, with a marginal
median sinus in the brachial valve; beak and foramen small,
with little or no deltidial area.

The loop is only known by one example (fig. 6e) ; compared
with that of MU. Cumingiana, the following differences are
observable :—In MM. Cumingiana the erect and thick projection
of the septum has, in reality, two distinct slender loops
attached to it. But in the example before us the loop at its
reflection is broadly expanded, and embraces the elevated part
of the septum ; it then extends into an almost complete circle.
It thus has considerable analogy with that of Magas (sensu
strictu). The different dispositions of the loop in J.

168

Cumingiana and M. compta arise from the relative massiveness
of the septum and loop ; in the former the slender loop is lost
in the excessively stout septum along which it may be
considered to be decurrent, till it becomes again free, and
forms the second annulus; whereas in JZ. compta the septum
is lost as it were in the much: greater mass of the broad
lamelle of the loop, and the loop seems to be only once
attached to the septum.

Dimensions of a larger specimen :—Length, ‘9; breadth, ‘7 ;,
depth, ‘5 of an inch.

Observations —M. compta being the oldest described among
the related forms need not here be compared with them ; its
salient characters may, however, be pointed out. Trapezitorm,
contracted, depressed and biangulated in front; hinge line
straight, very broad; beak suberect; deltidial area very large.
The species has hitherto been almost unknown except by
Sowerby’s figures and descriptions, as the common shell which
is commonly referred to it, is a distinct though allied species.
Figs. 4a and 46 of Mr. Woods’ paper, op. cit., doubtlessly
represent Sowerby’s shell; but his fig. 4¢ agrees well with
M. Woodsiana, mihi, and I strongly suspect that the interiors
shown by figs. 4d and 4e belong to the same. A comparison of
the original figures of ZT compta, and those of JZ. compta,
Etheridge, op. czt., cannot fail to convince one that two species
are represented by them.

Locality and Horizon—Not rare in the Lower Murravian
beds at Mannum on the R. Murray, and near Callington, on
the R. Bremer. Rare at Stansbury, Surveyor’s Point (Zute),
at Muloowurtie, Yorke’s Peninsula (Zepper) ; Mount Gambier,
South Australia, and Portland, Victoria (Woods).

The types were obtained “from a raised beach at Point
Fairy,” on the Cape Otway coast, Victoria; but as in other
instances, Strezlecki mistook our Older Tertiary deposits for
_ Post Tertiary beaches.

Magasella Woodsiana, spec. nov. Plate x., figs. 3a—3d.

Syn.—Terebratella compta (pars), Woods, loc. cit., fig. 4e—4e
(1865).

id., Etheridge, loc. cit., 1876.

Shell pyriformly ovate, longer than wide, margins flexuous.
Valves unequally convex, peduncular valve much the deeper,
which is longitudinally and obtusely carinate. Brachial
valve regularly convex in the umbonal half, medial depressed
towards the front.

Beak broad and stout, slightly incurved and truncated by a
nearly transverse circular foramen of moderate dimensions.
Hinge line much arched, beak ridges sharply defined, enclosing

164

a large triangular area, somewhat concave except where inter-
rupted by a broad medial longitudinal ridge.

Surface with concentric strie and a few ridges of growth;

test thin, conspicuously punctate.
_ A portion of the loop has been illustrated by Mr Etheridge,
and very little more of the interior of the adult shell than is
there shown is known to me, though a great number of speci-
mens have been sacrificed.

In the adult the medial septum is continued to near the
front of the valve, and at about half its length it gives off on
each side a flatly expanded process by which it is connected
with the diverging portions of the loop. The septum does not
appear to have been elevated, as in J. Cumingiana. If the
specimen to which the following description refers belongs to
M. Woodsiana, then little remains to complete our knowledge
of the interior of the species. Mr. Woods writes :—“ Septum
round and solid, lamelle of loop widening to the point of
attachment, becoming again contracted at the reflection, and
then extending into an almost complete circle with a slight
projection towards the hinge.”

In young specimens the septum assumes different forms, as
I have proved by the examination of more than a dozen speci-
mens from the River Murray cliffs and Muddy Creek. In one
from near Morgan the septum is actually adherent to the
opposite valve, and the loop shows the same disposition as in
IM. compta (pl. x., fig. 6e). Between this form of septum and
that of the adult every possible gradation is exhibited.

Dimensions—Length, ‘75 ; breadth, 55; depth, ‘4 of an inch.

Observations. — Magasella Woodsiana bears a considerable
external resembance to the recent MW. Cumingiana, but differs
in its less trapezoidal shape, and in the greater breadth and
height of the deltidial area. Internally the characters are
widely different in detail, and the thick mesial ridge in the
interior of the peduncular valve of AL. Cumingiana is peculiar
to that shell. The Port Jackson specimens of Magasella pre-
sented by the Rev. Mr. Woods, who directed my attention to
the similarity between it and the Mount Gambier fossil, seems
to me to agree better with Reeve’s Bouchardia fibula than with
Terebratella Cumingiana, but which Mr. T. Davidson believes to
be only a varietal form of the latter.

Locality and Horizon—Upper Murravian, near Morgan, and
at Muddy Creek (Tate) ; Lower Murravian, at Morrundi, on
the River Murray, near Blanchetown; Mannum; and near
Callington (Tate). Mount Gambier (Woods & Tate). Yellow
ealciferous sands, Aldinga Bay ; and at Stansbury (Tate).

165

Magasella Tenisoni, Woods. Plate xi., fig. 5a—bc.

Reference.—Terebratella Tenisoni, Trans. Phil.|Soc., Adel-
aide, 1865, t. i1., figs. 5a, 5b, and 6.

“Shell elongated, usually convex. Peduncular valve, trapezi-
form, keeled deeply, and terminating in a notch at the anterior
margin. Brachial valve orbicular and tapering to a point
which fits into the notch on the other valve. Beak obtuse,
deltidium striated, foramen oblong.

“Septum thickened, curved, and produced so as to touch the
opposite valve; attachments of the loops at the centre, and
nearer to the shell than to the edge of the septum. Muscular
impressions deep. Hinge and crura sloping away from the
septum, with a deep sinus in the centre.

“« Size, variable, but adult specimens 0:7, breadth 04 of an
inch.

‘““This curious species has strong points of resemblance to.
T. Evansii, but whose individual characters are very distinct.
In both the septum is produced so as to touch the opposite
valve.” — Woods.

Locality—Mount Gambier and Portland (Woods).

Magasella deformis, spec. nov. Plate x., figs. 5a—5c.

Shell oblong-ovate, margins of sides convex in the middle.
Peduneular valve very convex, obtusely carinated along the
middle, sides convex becoming flat or slightly concave near the
lateral margins. Brachial valve regularly convex in the
umbonal half, with lateral margins abruptly reflected, becoming:
abruptly and considerably depressed towards the narrowed
front.

Beak depressed, truncated by a minute foramen ; deltidial
area broad and concave ; beak ridges well defined.

Surface with a few lines of growth; malleated punctate:
under a lens.

Mesial septum thick, about half the length of the valve,
abruptly produced so as to touch the opposite valve ; diverging:
lamelle of loop nearly parallel, connected by short transverse
processes to the point of origin of the septal projection ;
thence continued beyond for about half as far again,
widening at the inflection, and apparently becoming attached.
near the apex of the septal projection.

Dimensions.—Length, ‘45 ; breadth, ‘3 ; depth, 27 of an inch.

Observations.—The reflection of the lateral margins of the
valves is a character belonging to the adult shell. In its.
young state it resembles JZ. compta, and somewhat MZ. Woodsiana
at the same stage of growth, but is at once distinguished by ite
beak and its malleated test.

166

Locality and Horizon.—In the glauconitie limestones Blanche
Point, Aldinga Bay. Nine examples.

Thecidium australe, spec. nov. Plate ix., figs. 3a—3c.

Shell minute, one-eighth of an inch in diameter, triangular-
ovate, inequilateral, attached by the umbonal surface of the
peduncular valve. Surface smooth, conspicuously punctate,
and ornamented by a few thick folds of growth.

Brachial valve flattish ; hinge line straight, but interrupted
in the middle by a small subquadrate cardinal process ; interior
unknown.

Peduncular valve, inflated and produced at the umbo, which
is obliquely truncated by the surface of attachment ; interior
with coarse radial strie, which crenulate the thin margin.
Hinge teeth prominent. Within the umbonal cavity is a cup-
shaped cavity for the attachment of the adductor muscles,
divided longitudinally by a septum, which is continued half as
far again beyond it.

This notice is, I believe, the first record of the occurrence of
the genus, either recent or fossil in the southern hemisphere.

Locality and Horizon—I\n the Miocene strata at Muddy
Creek, from which I obtained one perfect shell and four
peduneular valves. |

Rhynchonella squamosa, Hutton. Pl. ix., figs. 9a2—9D.

Ref:—Cat. Tertiary Mollusca of New Zealand, p. 37, 1873.

Syn.—Rhynchonella ceelata (McCoy, MS.), Woods, Trans.
Roy. Soc., N.S.W., p. 77, 1878.

Rhynchonella lucida, McCoy, M.S. (on Gould, 1860).

‘*Shell irregular, more or less orbicular ; valves inequal, the
ventral flatter with a deep groove; dorsal valve very convex ;
both with fine radiating scaly strie. Length, ‘7; breadth, -75 ;
height, ‘5. Easily distinguished from &. nigricans by its more
numerous striz.”—Hutton.

Remarks.—The task of establishing a correct synonym of
manuscript names is one that is very properly unattempted by
monographers; but in this instance the manuscript names of
McCoy have a fictitious value from the fact that they have been
published with such remarks as may lead up to their identifica-
tion. The Rhynchonella found at Table Cape, Tasmania, was
pronounced by Tenison Woods (Trans. Roy. Soc. Tasm., p. 15,
1874) to be identical with R. lucida of McCoy, common in the
Geelong Miocene beds ; subsequently we find the same author
(Trans. Roy. Soc., N.S.W., 1878) referring to itas &. celata,
McCoy. Doubtless the two names have been given to the same
shell; and it is probable that the change of denomination was

167

necessitated by the knowledge of the prior occupation of the
cognomen lucida by a recent shell described by Gould in
1860.*

The identity of 2. celata with R. squamosa, Hutton, rests
upon the characters given to it by Mr. Woods, and upon the
observations of Mr. Davidson published therewith (op. cit. p. 77).

“Rounded trigonal, with a strong mesial fold, with many
fine imbricating ribs.”—T. Woods.

“A most beautiful species, very closely related ‘to 2.
nigricans, from New Zealand. Some examples in external
shape cannot be distinguished, but I have not observed on any
recent &. nigricans such prominent and strongly marked
imbricated striwe. The fold and sinus seem more strongly
marked on the fossil form. The ribs also seem smaller or more
delicate than on real nigricans.”’—T. Davidson.

It will be observed that Mr. Davidson uses the same
characters to distinguish the fossil from the recent 2. nigricans
as Prof. Hutton had previously employed in founding the
species R. sguamosa.

Locality and Horizon—In the glauconitic limestone, north of
Blanche Point, Aldinga Cliffs (Zute) ; yellow clays of Muloo-
wurtie (Zepper), and at Stansbury (Zute), Yorke’s Peninsula ;
on the R. Bremer, at Salem, near Callington (Tate).

Muddy Creek, Hamilton (Zofe), and from several Miocene
beds in Victoria (McCoy) ; Table Cape, Tasmania (7. Woods) ;
Oamaru Formation (Eocene) Broken River, New Zealand
(Hutton).

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Prate VII.

Fig. 1. Waldheimia pectoralis, natural sizes. Aldinga. a and 6,
two views of an adult shell; ¢ and d, id of a young shell.

Fig. 2a-b. Waldheimia furcata, natural size. Aldinga.

Fig. 3. Waldhemia suffiata, natural size. Surveyor’s Point.

Big. 4. Lerebratulina lenticularis, much enlarged. Aldinga.
a, brachial valve ; 6, lateral view of both valves; c, front
view.

Fig. 5. Terebratula bulbosa, a-b, two views, natural size.
Edithburgh.

Fig. 6. Waldheimia Tateana, a-b, two views of the same
specimen, natural size. Aldinga.

* This species is described as ‘‘sub-circular—under the lens radiately
striated,” and has no analogy with our fossil.

Fig.

168
Prate VIII.

. 1. Waldheimia Macleani. Blanchetown. a-b, two views of

the same specimen, natural size; c, brachial valve of a
young shell, natural size.

ig. 2. Waldheimia jfimbriata. Aldinga. a-b, two views of the

same specimen, natural size.

ig. 3. Terebratulina Scoulari. Blanchetown; a, brachial valve

natural size; b, enlarged view of portion of the same;
e, slightly enlarged view of the loop of another specimen ;
d, a young shell, slightly enlarged.

ig. 4. Waldheimia sufflata ; lateral view of specimen, natural

size, plate vil., fig. 3.

. 5. Terebratula vitreoides ; a-b, two views of the same speci-

men, natural size. Aldinga.

.6. Waldheimia Tateana ; a-c, three views of a biplicated

example, natural size. Aldinga.

ig. 7. Terebratulina triangularis, slightly enlarged ; a-c, three

views of a specimen from Aldinga; d, brachial valve from

Bunda Cliffs.

ig. 8. Waldheimia divaricata; a-b, two views of the same

specimen, natural size. Mannum.

.9. Waldheimia Johnstoniana; a-b, two views, natural size.
Aldinga.
Prate IX.
ig. 1. Lerebratula subcarnea; a-b, two views of the same speci-

men, natural size. Bunda Cliffs.

.2. Waldheimia Tateana, natural size. Stansbury.
. 3. Thecidium australe. enlarged views. Muddy Creek.

a, brachial valve; b, interior of peduncular valve, a portion
of the hinge area has been removed to show the adductor
impressions ; ¢, lateral view of the specimen, fig. 3a.

4. Waldheimia Corioensis, McCoy (?) ; natural size. Man-
num (?)

Fig 5. Terebratella pentagonalis ; a-b, two views, natural size.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Aldinga.

6. Waldheimia insolita, natural sizes; a, from Bunda
Cliffs ; 6, from Aldinga.

7. Waldheimia Corioensis; interior view of the umbonal
part of a brachial valve, natural size. Mannum.

8. Terebratella Tepperi. Muloowurtie ; a-b, two views of
the same shell, natural size ; c, interior of brachial valve
of another specimen, natural size.

Fig 9. Rhynchonella squamosa, natural sizes; a, fragment of a

peduncular valve, R. Bremer; 6, perfect shell from
Aldinga.

Lo
\
}
As
re
‘ 5
; te
& A
me
. !
(!
‘ oY G
ny ‘
: 2
Fo ae
4
‘
q I e
e ;
i
§

ent ie

NOS gt

mene”

r \ = » = ee t
5 eet = o
~s = =
“ ¥ b.
;
:

$< Toucava

|B SERVATORY

Comettl 1880.

+6 CoLuman

+a Doraous + yDonavus S Erwan

+ 47 Exwan

wpe Lawns
46 LrvaAn

DAN!
s En +8 Enwans

XL RIAN
x plan q

ha 4Lnan
oR?

ie Aenennan
4 5 “Puan sci's

$3 Praners pate

AG Francis

Ba Pine mie 1s

PW SENT cS

8 Puen sos’ i
A

fet

10.

48 Soin ee
bo 5 ap Se
"Feat 9.

“feat 8

ave. pus =
“feat 7
(feat 6.
AA
E q : 3 Fomatnaur
Feat 3. = Feat 5.
a Piscia| Ausrancis

ea Fornacis

AK Fornacis

av fornacis
AT? FoRNACIS

i Feat /7.

A 77 Scureroms
‘ feat /6.

AT Scurrroris

Feat /5.

A
Feat /5.

ad Scurproas

feat 12.
a7 Scuceronrs

H-

ULPTOR!

RIS.
AdScurronrs

SURVEYOR GENERAUS OFTICE. ADELAIDE. Frazer \S. Creorford;, Photo-lithegrapher.

LYS AEE,
[=

g

Ss
TU,
SIS

Vy
le

Vig
Sb;

HY

WA.

2

i ce al Sa az Dig apnea
Supposed
Tertiartes

LAL

a

R
MOIAG UO
Sp
\t eS
£8
in 4
= romnsiiruas \ \\ ,
_ e2epgy yung so pray ” Ga. G b -

= 3.

dito

PLATE V

GEOLOGICAL MAP or MUNNO PARA RAST

Gara Scolar
OT PAARL

i

y f st ee
AWARE linn; tg
Au aT
WIA hetNe AT Win f
Walle aU AIL] BI} 4 y
| | li 0 HO } ait if A 0
~ Nt
| Th | , the i
TTL} | TTT THT eal fers
| Mt
Beogl
HH
t a

43 43 45 \ae

|| it

Bie |e | HA
+ }

i]
4
san A
HT 4 Reba te
my

© Springs

ALLuylu, oo DRIFT MIOCENE

SURVEYOR, OFFICEADELAIDE Fraser § Croxtint
Genegats OF nS. Crain PhaleLthorra
tier

PLATE VI

enaasees

~

REFERENCE
IES: NG — SSNS
.
RS SS — RSS NS
Quartile Clay Slate Miocene -Marble Ma State

J .WILLIAMS, LIZ, ADELAIDE.

Dett.

C. H. StROTHER,

APF Peet eee Ate NR See he,

ot

See PL a ro

Ween rath a Dae

ALD ve ANTIWAR UES Suey AEA PASE

Sra hehe aes Na RA ONT aOR EOIN

J WILLIAMS, LI72- ADELAIDE.

©. H. StrotHer, Devt.

J WILLIAMS, ZI72, ADELATDE.

C. H. Strother, Dett.

|
1
' |
H |
{ |
H id

J .WILLIAMS, L777 ADELATDE.
6. H. Strotuer, Dext.

Scie nme

.,
Me GAP

if
s

a

et
ee)

j
{
t

J-WILLIAMS, T777, ADELATDE.

C. H. SrROTHER, Devt.

en
oy

169

Fig. 10. Zerebratella Woodsii. Table Cape ; three views, natural
size (copied from drawings of the original by Mr. R. M.
Johnston).

Pravre X.

Fig. 1. Waldheimia Vincentiana, natural size; Surveyor’s
Point ; a, brachial valve; , lateral view of both valves.

Fig. 2. Lerebratula Aldinge, natural size; Aldinga; a, brachial
valve; 6, lateral view of both valves.

Fig. 3. Magasella Woodsiana. R. Murray cliffs; a, brachial
valve ; 6, lateral view, natural size; c, interior of brachial
valve of another specimen, natural size ; d, lateral view of
loop and septum of another specimen, somewhat enlarged.

Fig. 4. Waldheimia Corioensis, natural size. Mannum.

Fig. 5. Magasella deformis. Aldinga; a-b, different views of
the one specimen; c¢, interior view of another. All
slightly enlarged.

Fig. 6. Magasella compta. Mannum; a-b, two views of the
same shell; ¢, brachial valve of another specimen ; d, of a
third—all natural sizes ; ¢, interior view of a young shell,
enlarged.

Fig. 7. Lerebratula vitreoides, natural size. Blanchetown. a,
brachial valve ; 6, interior view of the same.

Fig. 8. Waldheimia Vincentiana, natural size. Surveyor’s
Point. Portion of brachial valve removed to show reflected
lamelle of loop.

Prate XI.

Fig. 1. Waldheimia Garibaldiana ; a-c, similar views of three
examples; natural sizes. Blanchetown.

Fig. 2. Waldheimia Taylori, natural size (copied).

Fig. 3. Waldheimia grandis, natural size. Blanchetown.

Fig. 4. id, young example.

Fig. 5. Magasella Tenisoni; a-c, natural sizes (copied).

Fig. 6. Terebratulina Davidsoni ; a-c, three views of the same
shell, enlarged; Mannum; d, brachial valve of a very
large example, natural size (the loop is preserved in this
specimen) ; Aldinga.

Fig. 7. Lerebratella furculifera. Aldinga, a, brachial valve; 8,
side view of the same shell—natural sizes; c, interior of
the brachial valve of another specimen.

Fig. 8. Waldheimia Crouchii, slightly reduced (copied).

170

TABLE SHOWING THE GEOGRAPHICAL AND STRATIGRAPHICAL D1sTRIBUTION

OF THE SPECIES.

SPECIFIC NAMES,

Terebratula vitreoides ........
Aldinge ....... S52
subcarnea ........
bulbosa ...... sieare

Waldheimia Garibaldiana......
furcata, 6620 6e.
divaricata ........
Tateana....wsese ‘
fimbriata ........
Johnstoniana
insolita ...... Seles
grandis ..........
Crouchii..........
McLeani..........
Vincentiana ......
AVLOVIM ee ovcrerelcrersis
Corioensis ........
pectoralis ........
sufflata ..........

lenticularis ....

triangularis
Terebratella Tepperi ...... eral
pentagonalis ......
furculifera ........
Woodsii ..........
Magasella compta .......... ae
Woodsiana ........
Tenisoni ......... 6
deformis ..........
Thecidium australe ..........
Rhynchonella squamosa ......

TOTALS): 40,6 ele snes

AUTHORS.

Etheridge
McCoy
Tate

Tate

Tate
Etheridge
Tate

Tate

Tate

Tate

Tate

Tate
Sowerby
Tate
Woods
Tate

Tate
Hutton

1/2/3/4/5/6}7/8/9 |10

LOCALITIES AND HORIZONS.

*% & *

i i i i iS

16

InpEx to LocauirtiEs.

Inferior Beds.—1. Glauconitic limestones at Aldinga.
2. Muloowurtie clays and other lower beds.
3. Chalk rock, Bunda Cliffs.
Middle Beds.—4. Calciferous sands, Aldinga.
5. Lower Murravian.
6. Middle Murravian.
7. Mount Gambier, white limestone.

8. Table Cape.

9. Geelong, &c.

Superior Beds.—10. Muddy Creek.
11. Upper Murravian.

*

*

10

*
*

* * | *
* *
* * *

* 9

*

* * *
* | * * *
*

*
* * *

11

b

171

MISCELLANEOUS CONTRIBUTIONS

TO THE

NATURAL HISTORY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA,

ZOOLOGY.

Unto Srurti, Adams and Angas, “immense quantities of
which are found in the rainwater holes at Umbum, 40 miles
south from Peake; natives eat them, but they are anything
but palatable.” (J. Chandler.) The species was described
from specimens collected at Newcastle Waters by the Stuart
Trans-continental party.

PHysa TExTURATA, Reeve; 20 miles from Peake, towards
Lake Eyre. (J. Chandler.) (R. Tate.)

Cyrruna Anaasi, Prince; as large as those obtained from the
-Reedbeds, exhibited before the Society January 7, 1879.
Puysa Anica, Reeve, and Unto virrarus, in the River Onka-

paringa, at Noarlunga (Master Molineux). (R. Tate.)
BOTANY.
Prants collected by Mrs. Richards, Corr. Memb., at
Fowler’s Bay :—

PLAGIANTHUS GLOMERATUS, Benth. ; previously known locali-
ties are “ south coast” and near Lake Eyre.

ACACIA HOMALOPHYLLA, dA. Cunn. Reported widely dit-
fused about Fowler’s Bay. The ripe pods which accompany
the specimens contain seeds attached by a very long and bright
red funiculus. The funiculus is doubly folded on the sides of
the seed, and is detached with it; and from its brilliant colour
is supposed. to serve as an attraction to birds, and so assist in
the dissemination of the species. The seeds are largely fed
upon by Cacatua Leadbeater’. The species extends to the oasis
of the Bunda Plateau, and northward to the Musgrave Ranges.

Sonanum uysrrix, R. Br. Baron F. von Mueller writes :—
“T never saw this rare plant before, as 1t was only once found,
z.e., in 1802, at Petrel Bay, by R. Brown.” Some of the par-
ticulars he asks for I have supplied from personal observation
made during my exploration around the Great Australian
Bight. It is confined to the sandy ridges covered with mallee

172

which alternate with the loamy and grassed flats between the
head of the Bight and Colona, near Fowler’s Bay. I first saw
it in flower on January 27, 1879, its large pale blue corolla
being in strong contrast with the yellowish green of its foliage ;
no fruits were then noticed.

Eremorurna crasstronia, & MZ. This is another plant
peculiar to South Australia, hitherto known from Mount
Greenly, Dombey and Venus Bays, Eyre’s Peninsula. The
Fowler’s Bay specimens represent a small leaved variety.

Tuysanvotus Bavrrt, &. Br., previously known from the
Adelaide district. (R. Tate.)

Baron F. von Mueller reports the following plants collected
by Mrs. Richards at Fowler’s Bay and vicinity :—Sisymbriun
trisectum, Capsella cochlearina, Geococcus pusillus, Pimelea
serpyllifolia, Pomax umbellata, Aster calcareus, A. magniflorus,
Echinospermum concavum, Hypoxis glabella, Arthropodiun mmus,
Poa lepida, and P. nodosa.

“ Among a few plants collected by Mr. Tietkins, at Pedinga,
in the same district, is Limosella Curdieana, F.M. Iam not
sure whether it has been noted as 8. Australian. At all events
we did not get it from a place so far west. Also Kochia
Jimbriolata, Lavatera, Helichrysum Lawrencella, Brodiophyllun,
and Bulbine semibarbata.” (F.v. M.)

The following places quoted under South Australia in the
Flora Australiensis should be transferred to Victoria :—
Skipton, Forest Creek, Buffalo Range, Plenty Creek, Fifteen-
Mile Creek, Loddon River, and Mount Disappointment.

List or Prants collected by Mr. Chandler at Barrow’s and
Tennant’s Creeks.

A collection of about 90 species of flowering plants, collected
by Mr. Chandler while acting as Telegraph Master at the above-
named stations, has been submitted to Baron von Mueller,
whose determinations here follow. The collection was not
made in the interest of botanical science, and in consequence
is for a large part not ina good state for specific determination.
However, it is of value, as coming from a district which was
hitherto unknown botanically, and enables me to enlarge the
geographical range of several species. Barrow’s Creek is
situated within the tropics, lat. 21° 30’, and Tennent’s Creek is
147 miles further north.

Of the 49 determined species, 22 are not catalogued for
Tropical South Australia by Dr. Schomburgk in his “ Flora of

173

South Australia. They are all the Malvacew, Kochia villosa,
Petalostylis labicheoides, Psoralea patens, Glycine elongata,
Scevola depauperata, Tecoma australis, Eremophila Mac Donelli,
Cyperus squarrosus, C. decompositus, Chloris scariosa, Ib. leusine
eruciata, Trivaphis mollis, Andropogon laniger, Lappago ruce-
mosa, Perotis rara, Pappophor um commune, and Hriachne obtusa.
Twelve of the above are recorded by Dr. Schomburgk as oceur-
ring m the extratropical parts of the province, but the
remaining ten have no place in his lists; they are—/ibiscus
Sturtit, Goss, ypium australe, Tecoma australis, Cyperus squar-
rosus, Hriachne obtusa, and Andropogon laniger, which are now
known to extend into extratropical South Australia; and
Glycine elongata, Cyperus decompositus, Chloris seariosa, and
Perotis rara, which are restricted in Australia to tropical
regions. (R. Tate.)

In the following list the letters B., vr. prefixed to the specific
names refer to the localities Barrow’ s Creek and Tennant’s
Creek respectively :—

PILIACED.
vr. Corchorus sidoides, #. AL.
MALVACER.

B. Malvastrum spicatum, 4. Gray; xB. Sida corrugata,
Lindley; B.v. Abutilon Fraseri, J. Hooker; 1. Hubisene
Sturtu, J. Hooker ; B.v. Gossypium australe, /. AZ.

EUPHORBIACE®.
B.v. Euphorbia Drummondu, Boiss.
AMARANTHACE 2.

Ptilotus obovatus, #. 22. ; B. P. incanus, Pow. ; B. Achy-
ranthes aspera, Linné.

CHENOPODIACE®.
pz. Kochia villosa, Lindley, var.
FICOTDE 2.
B. Trianthema pilosa, # JV.
LEGUMINOS ®.

B. Crotalaria dissitiflora, Bentham; 3B. Psoralea patens,
Lindley ; 3. Indigofera hirsuta, Linné ; B. Glycine elongata,
hy MN) Bs Erythrina vespertilio, Sw.; B. Petalostylis Tabi-
cheoides, R. Br.

PROTEACE &.
Grevillea Wickhami, Metssn. Forster’s Range.
CUCURBITACED.
B. Cucumis acidus, Jacg.; B. Mukia scabrella, Arnott.

174

LORANTHACER.
B. Loranthus pendulus, Sveb., var. cana (L. Quandang,
Lindl.).
COMPOSIT &.
zp. Pterocaulon sphacelatus, Benth. ; %. Helichrysum apicu-
latum, De Cand.
GOODENOVIE.
. Sexvola depauperata, &. Br.

es)

ASCLEPIAD®.
g. Cynanchum floribundum, 2. Br.
CONVOLYULACER.
B. Ipomeea eriocarpa, R. Br.
p.t. Kvolvulus linifolius, ZLenneé.
BIGNONIACE 2.
B. Tecoma australis, R. Br.
MYOPORINCED.
B. Eremophila Latrobei, # J2.; MacDonnell, & JL, var;
longifolia, AM.
ACANTHACER.
B. Justicia procumbens, Linne.
COMMELINACEA.
B. Commelina ensifolia, R. Br.
CYPERACES.
B. Cyperus decompositus (?) #. JZ; C. squarrosus, Linné.
GRAMINER.

rt. Panicum decompositum, #&. Br.; 2B. Setaria glauca,
Beauvoir ; Lappago racemosa, Willd. ; Andropogon laniger,
Desf. ; Aristida stipoides, R. Br.; Anthistiria ciliata, Linné ;
Perotis rara, R. Br. ; Pappophorum commune, F. JZ. ; Triraphis
mollis, R. Br.; Chloris scariosa, #. M.; Hleusine cruciata,
Lamarck ; Eriachne obtusa, R. Br.

FILICES.
B.t. Cheilanthus tenuifolia, Sw.

PropaBLteE Curative Properties oF MEnALEUCA UNCINATA.

Somewhat more than a week ago Mr. Earle, of Pine Point,
Muloowurtie, mentioned in conversation to me that he had
found accidentally great relief and speedy cure, when suffering
from violent catarrh, by crushing between the teeth, and

175

swallowing the juice of the green leaves of a certain plant
occasionally occurring in patches near his residence. He had
advised some of his men to try the same remedy and they had
experienced the same salutary result. Pointing the plant out
to me, I found it to be Melaleuca uncinata, R. Br. It is a
shrub with a woody stem one to two inches in diameter and
from three to eight feet in height. The branches grow straight,
upright, and are rather slender; the leaves cylindrical, about
one inch long, and pointed ; the flowers occur in small brush-
like groups around the young twigs, and are whitish;
the fruits form closely packed, short cylinders, around
the branches; the popular name applied here to this
shrub is “broom,” and it is quite characteristic of granitic
soil. Having made a mental note of the information
I resolved to try it myself should occasion arise. The latter
days of last week I was much troubled with a violent catarrh,
stiff neck, cough, and a difficulty in swallowing. Obtaining a
small sprig, I chewed a few leaves (two or three) at irregular
intervals. In two days the latter symptoms had altogether
disappeared and the catarrh so much abated that it no longer
incommoded me. No other remedies were used. In case some
of the learned members of the Society would feel inclined to
examine the plant chemically in order to determine its probable
medicinal character, some specimens accompany this note.
The taste shows the existence of a not disagreeable aromatic
oil.
J. G. Orro Tepper, Corr. Mem.
Ardrossan, 26th March, 1880.

APPENDIX TO THE List oF PLANTS aBouT ARDROSSAN,
By Mr. Orro Trrrer, F.L.S., Corr. Mem.

The species have all been determined by Baron F. von
Mueller.
CRUCIFERS.

Alyssum minimum, Pallas. T.
Cardamine laciniata, # J. C.
Geococcus pusillus, Drummond and Harvey. C.

POLYGALEM.
Comesperma calymega, Labillardiere. (?) C.
CARYOPHYLL&E.
Drymaria filiformis, Bentham. T.
PORTULACER.

Claytonia pusilla, F. JZ. Muloowurtie, C.
Claytonia pygmea, # M. Muloowurtie, P.

176

FICOIDE®.
Trianthema humillima, #7. 1. Maitland road, P.

SALSOLACER.

Atriplex Muelleri, Bentham. C.

_Atriplex microcarpum, Bentham. OC.

Sueda maritima, Dumortier. Saltmarshes, C.
Kochia humillima, Ff. 1. C.

MALVACER.
Plagianthus glomeratus, Benth. T. and P.

STERCULIACE®.
Thomasia petalocalyx, # JZ Maitland sandhills, T.

SAPINDACER.
Dodonea Tepperi, #. 1. T, rare.

LEGUMINOS2.
Goodia medicaginea, # WZ. Kailkerran.
Acacia acinacea, Lindley. Black Point, Muloowurtie, C.
HALORAGINER.
Loudonia Behrii, Schlechtendal. Muloowurtie and Maitland
sandhills, T. (?).
MYRTACER.

Leptospermum levigatum, # MW. Muloowurtie sandhills
and coast, and Black Point, G.
Eucalyptus dumosa, A. Cunn. T. and P.

UMBELLIFER®.
Hydrocotyle rugulosa, Turezaninow. Maitland sandhills, T.
Didiscus pusillus, # 1. Muloowurtie, P.
COMPOSIT®.
' Podolepis Siemssenia, &. J. Muloowurtie, P.
Helichrysum obtusifolium, Sond. P.
Centipeda Cunninghami, # MZ. T. and P.
STYDIDIED.
Styldium calearatum, R. Br. Maitland sandhills.
GOODENOVIER.
Scevola linearis, R. Br. Maitland, T. and P.

EPACRIDER.
Styphela Richei, Zabill. Black Point, C.
LOGANIACER.
Mitrasacme paradoxa, R. Br. Muloowurtie, P.

aa”

177

MYOPORINE®.
Eremophila viridiflora, F. I. P.
ORCHIDED.
Thelymitra carnea, R. Br. Yorke Valley, T., rare.
Lyperanthus nigricans, R. Br. Maitland sandhills,
Acianthus exsertus, R. Br. P.
Caladenia carnea, R. Br. T. and P.

LILTACE®.
Chamescilla corymbosa, F. 1. Yorke Valley, T., rare.

RESTIACE_D.

Centrolepis aristata, Roem. and Schult. Maitland sandhills, T.

Centrolepis aristata, var. pygmea. Muloowurtie, P.
CYPERACE®.

Lepidosperma viscidum, R. Br., C.

Schenus Brownii, J. Hooker. Maitland sandhills, T.

Schenus Tepperi, - JL G.

GRAMINE®.

Sporabolus Virginicus, Awnth. Winulta, P.
Danthonia nervosa, J. Hooker. Yorke Valley, T.

FILICES.
Cheilanthes distans, R. Brown.

Geococcus pusillus is remarkable for being strongly suspected
of having two widely different forms. The principal one pushes
its fruit below the soil while perfecting and ripening ; the other,
generally a weaker plant, has an upright stalk, and resembles
very much a Cardamine. It is not very common, and occurs
generally where an accumulation of decayed animal matter has
enriched the soil, as in the camping place of cattle.

Comesperma calymega is not yet fully identified, as a doubt
exists whether it may not prove to be C. defoliatum, F. M. It
srows among the grass near the coast, near Rogue’s Point,
Muloowurtie.

Drymaria filiformis is quite new to the province, having hitherto
only been known from the Irwin River, W. Australia. It is an
elegant little plant, resembling a Claytonia, and was found
flowering in the latter part of September, in the mallee scrub,
near the Kalkabury road, five miles from Ardrossan.

Of similar interest is Zrianthema humillima, which, as Baron
F. v. Mueller informs me, had formerly only been known from
one locality, between the Rivers Darling and Lachlan. It
occurs here on low ground on the Maitland road near the
boundary of the Hundred of Cunningham, and is most probably

178

the smallest of all phanerogamic plants of the world; the
tallest specimen scarcely exceeds one-eighth of an inch. It has
not been seen, though looked for, at any other locality.

Kochia humillima is also new to the province, its proper
habitat being Victoria. It is a small plant, and is becoming

very rare through the cropping of the sheep.

Plagianthus glomeratus occurs only in the northern part of
the Hundred and beyond, but occasionally a stray specimen is
seen near Ardrossan. It is a much smaller plant than its
congener, P. spicatus. The latter only flourishes once, and
once only, on newly-burnt soil, the seed then becoming latent,
till another fire starts it into growth. Acres of dead stalks,
five to seven feet high, may be seen in fertile parts of the
scrub, and not a single young plant comes up for years.

Dodonea Tepperi, F. v. M., is a new species, distinguished by
its dense low growth, very small leaves, and a quadrilateral
speckled fruit. Only one plant has as yet been found ona
stony hillside, near Ardrossan.

Goodia medicaginea is new for the locality, and was obtained
from Kilkerran by Dr. Engelhardt, of Maitland.

Acacia acinacea has only been seen here on the low plain at
Black Point, but was formerly observed in great plenty near
Monarto and at Truro on stony hills. It has a silvery grey
leaf.

Hydrocotyle rugulosa had not before been known out of W.
Australia, but Baron F. v. Mueller remarks, has perhaps been
overlooked and taken for H. capillaris. It occurs sparingly in
the mallee scrub of Muloowurtie and the sandhills near
Maitland.

Helichrysum obtusifolium has been only obtained in one
specimen near Ardrossan. Its leaves appear to die off when in
full bloom.

Stylidiwn calearatwm is new for the locality. It is a very
small plant, scarcely a quarter of an inch long, but the stalk is
about one and a half inches, and the flower very large for its
bearer. It was profusely abundant for the space of a few
square yards near the sandhills N. of Maitland, while round
about not any could be discerned.

Thelymitra carnea is one of the rarest of our orchids, and
also new for the locality, it having before only been found
about Mount Lofty. The specimen was found growing under
the protection of an old brush fence in Yorke Valley. Under
similar circumstances Chamescilla corymbosa was found.

Lyperanthus nigricans has nowhere else been observed by me
than among the sandhills near Maitland. It is a beautiful
orchid, that obtained its specific name from drying perfectly
black. Acianthus easertus and Caladenia carnea occur often in

179

society, but the former only and exclusively on granite soil
under Melaleuca uncinata.

Schanus Tepperi, ¥. v. M., is a new species, occupying rocky
dry hillsides and summits, chiefly in the neighbourhood of
granite, where it flourishes best.

Cheilanthes distans, R. Br., has only been found in one spot
of a few yards square growing on a metamorphosed hornblendic
schist, altered by contact with granite into a jaspery, green
and white banded stone.

GEOLOGY.

Rock formations and minerals in the vicinity of Peake, C.A.,
being a report by Professor R. Tate on specimens for-
warded by Mr. J. Chandler.

PrE-Siturtan.—The hill country is constituted principally
of micaceous and hornblendic slates, but talcose slate also occurs,
and diorite is abundant. The quartz veins in these metamorphic
rocks yield an abundance of micaceous iron-ore, and specimens
of calcite with copper pyrites and purple copper and green
carbonate of copper have been obtained from them.

Jurassic.—A dense gray earthy fossiliferous limestone from
Peake contains the following species of fossils, but in a bad
state of preservation :—WMonotis Barkyli, Moore; Cytherea
Clarkei, Moore; Pleuromya sp.; Lingula sp.

A similar fossiliferous rock is reported by Mr. Chandler, on
the information of Mr. Cameron, the manager on Mr. A. B.
Murray’s run at Cootanoorina, 30 or 40 miles west from
Peake, to have been discovered in that place in a well 30 feet
deep on the banks of the Peake Creek. ‘“ The rock is a mass
of fossilised mussel shells, which are about the size of a man’s
hands closed and pressed together.’”—J.C. The fossils here
referred to are casts of Cytherea Clarkei. Mr. R. Beetson
communicates fossils obtained by him at the foot of Mount
Margaret. They are Belemnites sp., Dentaluim sp., Chione sp.,
and a small compressed, sub-equilateral Plewromya. He assures
me that the Jurassic rocks occupy the low country, and that
the “ spring-mounds”’ are based upon them.

Desert Sanpstone.—Among the specimens probably derived
from beds of this age are :—

_ Brown hydrous oxide of iron-boxes, “found on the stony
ridges eight miles north of Peake, under Mount Kingston
Range ; no springs in immediate vicinity.” Natural marbles or
stone bullets, which are terms that may appropriately be applied
to spherical masses of quartzose sand cemented by brown

180

hydrous oxide of iron, “found in great plenty on the rises on
which the previously-mentioned specimens were taken.” The
marbles are solid throughout, and do not exhibit any signs
of having acquired their spherical shape by rolling, particularly
as several examples present prominently projecting fragments
of quartz.

From the table-lands specimens of chalcedonie quartz and
jasper stones “are found scattered about amongst the loose
surtace quartz on the flats four miles west of this.”

Recent.—Deposits from the springs at Peake. “ The surface
covering of the flat around the spring”’ is a fine sand cemented
by calcareous matter; exterior surface of specimen botryoidal.
A dense calcareous tuff “from spring flats at Peake.” A red
ochre with gypsum “found near the springs.” A cellular
calcareous tuff forms “the top crust of the mound-springs.”
An opalescent quartz is ‘‘a common specimen taken from the
springs.”

The above specimens prove most conclusively that the
mounds are composed of mineral matter deposited from the
water of the springs, and do not owe their form to volcanic
action, as is popularly supposed, and has been insisted upon by
some observers (see Trans. of this Society, 1879, p. 7.)

Tourmaline—A large prismatic piece, about 13 inches
diameter, from Mount Boothby, 90 miles north of Alice Springs,
where it is said to be abundant. “If I am not mistaken, I
have seen plenty of it, only in smaller pieces, running in veins
through quartz near the Barrow’s Creek Telegraph Station.”
J.C

Mica, in large transparent plates. ‘In large quantities
in the MacDonnell Ranges.” J.C.

Magnetic tron ore, “locality uncertain, but suspected to
have been found in this neighbourhood.” J.C.

Hard kaolin clay, “obtained from a high table land hill
eight miles south-west from Charlotte Waters. <A quarry of
this was opened there, and the station was built of it; it also
makes excellent tobacco pipes.” J. C.

Grapuic GRanire.—Mr. Otto Tepper forwards a specimen
of graphic granite consisting of red felspar and translucent
quartz arranged prismatically, so that in a cross section the
felspar appears to be interspersed with graphic lines of quartz.
He writes:—‘It was discovered on the north side of the
Maitland-road, on the eastern incline of Yorke Valley ridge,
Yorke’s Peninsula, forming a dyke of a few yards in width
between the gneissic rock. The strike of the dyke is indistinct,

181

but appears to be S.E. and N.W. The serub, composed of
Melaleuca uncinata, is very dense there, hindering a 1 obser-
vations.”

Sections of strata traversed by wells made for and communi-
cated by Mr. W. Fowler, at Yarrow, in the Hundred of
Clinton, on the west side of head of St. Vincent's
Gulf :—

No. 1. Section 315, Hundred of Clinton, in creek. Height
of surface, 78 feet above high-water, determined by spirit level.

Feet. Remarks.
1. Red loam and gravel ... 78 Brackish water
2. Rock, an impure mixture Contains roots of trees, evi-
of sandand lime ... 6 dently of mangroves
Total . 84

“This well is nearly one mile from the sea, but the water found
on it is at exactly the same level as the sea at present. It also
shows that the sea must have been at the same level as now
when the mangrove roots, now fossil, were growing.” W.
Fowler.

No. 2. Section 318, half-a-mile north-west of No: 1. Surface
186 feet above high-water by spirit level.

Feet. Remarks.
1. Red clay Bs aco BO)
2. Soft Seeidetone ...100 Water found at 130 feet

_ 3. Very fine running sand 15 Sinking stopped by inflow of
water, not fresh, but good
Total ... .. 145 enough for sheep

No. 8. Section 275, in creek, one and a-half miles north of
No. 2. Surface 165 feet above high water. Very brackish
water was reached at 165 feet from surface. The nature of
strata exactly as in No. 2 well.

Well section, at about ten to eleven miles west from Lake
Torrens, near Whittata, communicated by Mr. H.

Lattorff :-—
Feet.
1. Bright red sandy soil ... bse othe a3
2. Soft red clay .. nc we aval
3. Darker red sandy clay .. a oe ee heh
4. Fine yellow reddish sand els
5. Whitish sandy clay with ironstone boulders ee 4
6. Bright yellow, white, blue, and then red clay-slate 58

Rotallyees na be 228

182

Below 128 feet, at which saltwater was met with, there occurs
a hard red slate containing mica.

Mr. Lattorff writes, July 24, 1880, that the rainfall during
the four seasons he has been at Whittata has fallen between
four and seven inches per annum; that the rain does penetrate
the soil for more than four feet on the average, except in
favoured places, where we have found damp ground to seven
feet, or when saltwater lies near the surface. This is the
result arrived at from observations made in the course of trial
sinkings and excavating dams to the number of about forty.

183

A Scheme for the Organization and Direction

OF THE

EFFORTS OF AMATEUR COLLECTORS.

. —————————E
EDITED BY THE PRESIDENT AND HON. TREASURER.

—_—____e—______

Extracts from Regulations of the Society.

1. The Royal Society of South Australia, being desirous of
encouraging the study of Natural Science, is prepared to direct
the efforts of amateur collectors, and to receive from them ob-
servations and specimens—undertaking to record original ob-
servations, and when practicable to identify specimens. Those
willing to engage in a systematic correspondence are requested
to communicate with the Hon. Secretary, Adelaide.

2. Persons co-operating with the Society in recording
Natural Science phenomena in this province be entitled “ Local
Correspondents.”

3. A list of local correspondents be appended to the ‘ List
of Members of the Society,” published in its Transactions.

4. Approved communications from local correspondents and
members, and records of new facts, not being of the nature of
a formal paper, be published in the Transactions of the Society
under the title of ‘Miscellaneous Contributions to the
Natural Science of South Australia,” and that a reprint of the
same be transmitted to each local correspondent.

Nore.—Eminent Australian naturalists have consented to
act as referees in their respective departments.

184.

INST RUC TVO Me

1. Not fewer than two specimens of each kind of plant
. should be forwarded ; also of other objects, particularly shells,
insects, crabs, polyzoa, and fish, when not too bulky. In the
case of those plants and animals in which the sexes are in
different individuals, one example at least of each sex should
be sent.

2. Each specimen, or each set of specimens should be dis-
tinctively numbered; and the duplicate specimens retained by
correspondent should be numbered correspondingly.

3. Notes on the habits, habitat, station, food, native and
colonial names, and other particulars should be recorded at
the time of observation. The memorandum referring to any
specimen should be docketted with a number corresponding
with that affixed to the specimen.

The life history of nearly all Australian animals is meagre, and there is
little fear that the information which you can afford is of ‘‘ no use,”
because ‘‘too little,” or is, apparently, ‘‘ what every one knows.” .
Plants from districts far inland, or recently settled, are very desir-
able. Do not exclude from your local collection any object merely
because it occurs frequently or appears insignificant.

4. Parcels not exceeding one pound in weight, nor of
greater dimensions than two feet by one foot, may be forwarded
by post (suitably protected against breakage or crushing), if

directed as follows :—
Natural History Specimens, without Letter.
From —(add name and address)

To the
Director of the Natural Science Section,
Royal Society, Adelaide.

The rate of postage 1s one penny for each two owneces.

5. If a parcel be too large for transmission by post, describe
contents and suggest mode of transit to the Director, whose
advice should be awaited, so that unnecessary expense may be
avoided.

6. As it is very desirable that correspondents should get
beyond mere collecting, the Society will endeavour to obtain
information touching works suitable for study or reference,
and in other respects will help them in completing and per-
fecting the scientific results of their observations.

7. Applications for a money grant should state the amount
required and the mode and object of the proposed outlay.

SHORT DIRECTIONS

FOR

COLLECTING AND PRESERVING.

Mammats.—Skins may be dressed with arsenical soap or
alum and salt (see Appendix). Skeletons (the skulls are most
important) may be cleaned by the agency of ants. For this
purpose the skeletons, coarsely divested of their flesh, are
placed in a box and set over an ant’s nest, holes in the box
being made for the passage of the insects. Skulls may be
prepared by cautious boiling and subsequent removal of the
flesh. Bodies of smaller kinds may be preserved in spirit or
other preserving fluid after removal of intestines.

Brrps. —Skins and skeletons as in the case of mammals. Pre-
serve skulls, breastbones, feet, and eggs.

ReptTiEs, as in the case of mammals; they may be killed by
being violently thrown on soft ground, or by a knife stab at
the junction of the head and neck.

Fiso.—Smaller kinds may be preserved in spirit. Larger
reptiles and fish may be cut through lengthways, and the half
skin glued or sewn on pasteboard.

Note the contents of the stomach or crop of the foregoing
to determine the food.

Insects may be sought for under the bark of living trees,
under stones, about and in the carcases of decaying animals,
on the leaves and flowers of herbs, shrubs, and trees, and in
pools and streams. Some must be sought for at night by the
aid of a lantern. Most may be captured by hand. Small
forceps are useful to pick up insects, especially the noxious
ones; but some others, as butterflies, may be caught by a
muslin bag-net, and the aquatic species may be taken by the
same means.

Delicate specimens may be temporarily pinned to a layer of
cork or agave stem, in the crown of a tall hat. A captured
insect, not being a butterfly or moth, should be killed by

90

°

186

placing it in a wide-mouthed bottle of a size convenient for the
pocket, in the bottom of which has previously been placed
some pieces of cyanide of potassium (highly poisonous), covered
by a layer of blotting-paper or fine sawdust. The bottle
must be securely corked or stoppered. In the absence of
cyanide of potassium, the insects may be killed by immersion
in spirit, and beetles by dipping them into hot water. Small
beetles, ants, &c., must be gummed on card circles. A great
many insects, particularly beetles, may, after careful drying,
be packed in layers with fine sawdust in a tin box; the lid of
the box should be made secure against the ingress of those
small insects which are so destructive to entomological
specimens.

Butterflies and moths may be killed by a pinch between the
fingers just beneath the insertion of the wings. The insect
its wings having been carefully brought together, is to be
placed in an envelope of paper (of the stiffness of stout writing
paper) of the form here described :—Take a square piece of
paper, fold it diagonally, but so as to make the upper
triangular piece a little smaller than the lower; place the
butterfly between the folds, and now turn over and press down
the overlapping margins of the lower triangle. The size
of the original square must be determined by the size of the
insect, so as to make the envelope just large enough to prevent
the insect shifting. When dry the envelopes may be packed
in layers in a tin box.

SprpErs and the like.—Preserve in spirit, glycerine, or
preservative fluid. Note habits, kind of web, nests. The
colours should be described in life; the special points for
description are the number and position of the eyes, jaws,
relative length of legs, shape of breast-plate, male palps, and
epigyne of female.

Crass, crayfish, shrimps, and the like; and Srarrisn, and
sea-urchins should be immersed in spirit for a minute, or
just long enough to destroy life, and afterwards dried rapidly
by artificial heat, below that of the boiling point of water. In
the case of the salt water forms it would be well to wash them
in fresh water before treating them with spirit. Small
Specimens may be kept in the spirit or preservative fluid.

Marine Suetis.—Endeavour to procure them with their
animals. Some cling to rocks, others beneath loose stones, or
burrow in sand or mud between tide marks. Extreme low
tides should be availed of to secure those which habitually
inhabit the region just beyond low tide mark; those still
further out can only be procured by dredging, but are
occasionally cast up on the beach during storms. Dead shells

187

accumulate towards high water mark. Particular circumscribed
areas, at certain times, may be seen on close examination to be
strewn with small shells, some microscopic; this shell sand is
in great request, and should be gathered by lightly scraping it
together by a lath or knife-blade; transfer to a bag. The
coarser material may be removed by sifting. On sprinkling
the shell sand on the palm of the hand, there should appear
few grains of sand, the bulk should be small entire shells.
Snail shells, not having a natural polish, may be cleaned as
follows:—Place in cold water, boil, drain off water, add cold
water, and remove animal by a bent pin or cobbler’s awl.
Take care to return to the interior of the shell the horny or
stony lid which closes the aperture of the shell when the
animal is withdrawn within it ; plug in the operculum, as this is
called, with cotton wool. Shells having a natural polish should
not be boiled, but may be buried in sand, and after the animal

. has rotted away, washed with cold water.

The animals of mussel and cockle shells may be killed by
immersion in boiling water. Taken from the water, the valves
gape widely; dry inside and outside, close the valves by the
pressure of the thumb and fingers of one hand, and wind
a moistened thread or tape two or three times around the
shell and tie. Small examples of snails and other shells may
be dried in sand. A few living specimens of each kind should
be preserved in spirit. Homceopathic bottles are useful to keep
small specimens distinct.

Lanp Swarts abound most among craggy rocks of the hill
country, and may be found among the crevices of rocks or
under large stones, or collections of damp leaves.

FRESHWATER SNAILS and mussels occur in most waters, some
living on the aquatic plants, others buried in the bottom mud.
They may be collected by hand, but more conveniently by
means of a perforated tin-pannikin fixed to the end of a stick.
After scraping over the bottom with this dredge, wash by
shaking in water, examine residue, and transfer shells to box
or bottle.

The after treatment for the land snails, freshwater snails,
and mussels is the same as for sea snails and cockles.

Ponyzoa are thrown up on sea beaches, especially from deep
water ; some have the aspect of delicate seaweeds, others of
corals. The horny flexible kinds are generally grey or light-
brown, reddish if alive, curl inwards on drying. Individual
cells require hand magnifier to bring out details. Many of this
class of animals are parasitic on seaweeds (especially on root-
like bases), and encrust shells and stones. Information as to
the live animals much needed.

188

Parasites may be found on the fur or feathers of live mam-
mals and birds, or attached to reptiles and fish. Internal para-
sites (particularly desired) live in the liver, stomach, intestines,
or other organs of animals.

Puants are best preserved by drying. The apparatus for
drying flowering plants, ferns, and mosses consists of a few
smoothly-planed boards, newspapers, and coarse, stout, unsized
paper, or blotting-paper. Upon one of the boards place a few
folds of newspaper, a sheet of drying paper, on which the
plants are to be carefully laid out, then another sheet of
drying paper, and again more folds of paper, and so on. The
number of sheets of paper to be placed between each sheet of
plants will depend on the one hand, on the thickness and
humidity of the specimens; on the other hand, on the quantity
and quality of the paper one has at command. On the top
sheet place a board, and upon that stones, bricks, or other
weights, from 20 lbs. upwards, according to the consistency of
the specimens. It is useful, also, to have extra boards or paste-
boards the size of the paper, to separate thick plants from thin
ones, wet ones from those nearly dry, &c. Another day’s col-
lection may be arranged in the same way on the top board, and
another board used and the weights replaced. After a few
days the specimens should be shifted into fresh sheets, and
pressure continued until all their moisture is dissipated Care
must be taken that the paper used is well dried. In dry
weather, and by the use of coarse, stout paper, the majority of
plants require only one shifting. Succulent plants may be
dipped in boiling water all but the flowers, preparatory to
drying. Heaths and other plants which are apt to shed their
leaves during drying may be treated in the same manner.
Thick stems should be pared down.

Plants for preservation should be carefully selected, so as to
show the various parts proper to them, not only in flower, but
in fruit (both young and mature). Small plants should be
gathered with their roots; the root-leaves of larger herbs
should be secured, and others may be cut or folded into
requisite lengths. Plants may be gathered into a tin box; but
better suited for this climate is a portable collecting and drying
apparatus, which consists of sheets of stiff paper, 14 inches by
9 inches, or more, separately folded between boards, or open
wooden frames, with crossbars, connected by straps towards
the ends, and having a third passing lengthwise around. The
portfolio is a little bulkier and heavier to carry than the col-
lecting-box, but its advantages are much greater, and its
employment is imperative in the case of plants whose flowers
close or wither soon after gathering ; and though it is advisable
to transfer the plants from it to the ordinary drying press on

189

reaching home, yet neglect to do so is not attended with such
disastrous results as with the collecting-box.

A slip of writing-paper, on whien the date, place, and situa-
tion in which the specimen was gathered should be attached,
and note should be taken of the stature, habit, colour of the
flowers, or of any other particulars which the specimen itself
cannot supply, or which may be lost in the process of drying.
A ready mode of attaching a label to a plant its making a loop
in the middle part of the paper by two longitudinal cuts,
through which the stalk or other part of the plant is passed.

The perfectly dried plants may be packed up in bundles,
with a single sheet of paper between each layer. They may
be placed very closely on the sheets, but not in more than one
layer on each sheet, and care must be taken to protect the
bundles by sufficient covering from the effects of, external
moisture or the attacks of insects.

The Society being desirous of collecting material for a report
on the introduced plants, seeks information in reference to
each plant as follows :—

Whether a weed of cultivated or pasture ground.
Whether an escape from cultivation.

Date of its appearance.

The extent of its spread.

Whether on the increase or decrease.

The conditions most favourable for its propagation.
Its utility or inutility.

Duration of flowering.

Its common name.

SraweEDS should be searched for among the rock-pools
between tide-marks. Deep water alge are occasionally cast
up after storms, but they should be rejected if not fresh ; they
may be gathered into a linen bag. Empty collecting-bag into
a basin of sea-water ; select the best and cleanest plants and
rewash. To Mount.—Float the seaweed in water and slip
under it a piece of smooth drawing or fine white cartridge
paper, arrange the specimen on the paper, and carefully remove
from the water, press and dry between blotting paper. Thin
plates of perforated zinc to support the mounting paper when
in water, and to facilitate its removal therefrom, will prove
useful. Most seaweeds will adhere to the mounting paper,
but if it be wished to have them loose use calico instead of paper.

Gzotoey.—Rock specimens should be broken off from rocks
in situ, and not from rolled stones or boulders, though much
useful information may be gained by proving them to belong to
some distant locality. Take from interior parts unaffected by
weather.

190

Fossil bones when friable may have something of their
original condition restored to them by repeated soakings in a
weak solution of glue.

Fossils in the form of casts or moulds are for the most part
valueless.

The most useful form of hammer is one of solid steel, short
and squared at the head, and the other side drawn to a point;
the handle should have inches marked on it. A chisel is indis-
pensable for cutting out fossils from rock surfaces. Old files
make excellent chisels.

Specimens of rocks, minerals, and fossils should be separately
wrapped in paper. Delicate fossils should be packed in saw-
dust or bran.

Natural or artificial exposures of rocks should be measured
in detail, the magnetic direction of the face of the section,
and the amount of inclination of the beds to be noted. Take
an example of each bed, numbering it correspondingly with
the defining number in your description. Examine weathered
surface for fossils, and state from what stratum of the section
they have been obtained, and the frequency of their occurrence.

The following particulars relating to well sinking or borings
are much desired by the Society. “ Forms,” to be filled up,
will be supplied on application :—

SITE OF BORING OR WELL.
(To be described as accurately as possible.

HEIGHT OF SURFACE of ground above the sea at low water
(stating whether found by spirit level, or barometer, or estimated.)

SIZE OF HOLE
and how sunk.

Depth in feet below

the Surface. Nature of Strata. *Remarks.

From To

— | —___——_

* In remarks column refer to numbered specimens of strata and fossils
found therein, which may accompany this statement. Also give depth at
which water was found, stating whether fresh, salt, brackish, or mineral,
and give any other information which may be of scientific or economic value.

Signature of Observer—
Date—

N.B.—The full equipment of a naturalist comprises a
great variety of articles; but, under any circumstances, he
considers the following indispensable:—Pencil, note-book,
knife, string, pins, paper for wrapping, and match-box.

191
AEP EN:

Rectrees ror Dressina SKINS.
(1).—Arsenical soap.

Arsenious acid ee she Bp «6 4 028.
Soap ... pas Ma oe “ot ... 4028.
Carbonate of potash ap ae ... 4 drams.
Camphor oh ice ee voy LOZ,
Water ab we (O OZB;

Cost of ingredients about 2s, 6d.

Mix under a gentle heat. When used form a lather with
any spirituous liquor and apply with a brush.

(2).—A substitute for the above-—Alum 3 parts, common salt
1 part, pure water 24 parts, by weight.

ReEcirPES roR PRESERVATIVE Furs.
(3). Methylated spirit, at 50 deg. over proof; price in
Adelaide 7s. per gallon ; may be diluted with an equal quantity
of water.

(4). —Wickersheimer’s preservative fluid—

PAUIREINS 550) a) ee 10 drams

Common salt... ... 2% drams | Dissolve in 300
Saltpetre ae .. 1:2 drams drams of boiling
Carbonate of potash... 6 drams water.
Arsenious acid i soe igealizsnan

After cooling and filtering, add to every ten pints of this
solution four pints of glycerine and one pint of methylated
spirit. Cost of ingredients about 5s. per gallon.

Specimens that have been immersed for some days or weeks, according
to their size, will keep out of the solution, and will remain plastic.

(5).—Goadby’s solution, a substitute for spirit, may be em-
ployed for soft-bodied animals, without shells or bones—

Cera. E eit “Se ssmkny been ALOzS: Add boiling water
Alum ... se eee OZ two quarts, well
Corrosive sublimate ... 4 grains pa and

(6).—Glycerine—The disadvantageous property of corru-
gating and decolorising animal structures possessed by spirit is
obviated by the use of glycerine. Retail price, 4s. 6d. per Ib.

(7).— An aqueous solution of alum, in the proportion of alum
1 part, pure water 16 parts, preserves animal substances very
well for a short time; all the parts retaining their natural
conditions to some extent, except the bones and shells, which
are acted on by its acidity. Retail price, 9d. per lb.

(8).—Strong salt and water may be used in the absence of any
of the above, for quite temporary purposes.

ERRATA ET CORRIGENDA.

Vou. I.

Transpose 4 and 6 on Plate 1.

Page

Vou. II.
1, line 11, dele australis, Phillips.

“ Ixyii., line 11, for Pleocine read Pliocene.

67, line 19 from bottom, for our read one.
109, line 2, for insoluta read insolita.
125, line 9 from bottom, for Stignoderma read Stigmodera.
134, Bulimus sinistrorsus is changed to B. Myoporine.
(See vol. iii., p. 104). )

Voz. III.

35, line 12, for Phytolacces read Phytolaccacee. Trans-
pose line 40 to the bottom.

44, line 3, for diotia read dioica.

54, line 21, for trachspermus read trachyspermus ; line
25, for Sand. read Gaud.

66, line 17, dele comma after Mukia.

69, line 10, for 529 read 429. |

71, line 10, for 540 read 549 ; line 20, for 860 read 560.

80, line 9, for 200 read 209.

86, line 2 from bottom, and page 87, line 1, for Aristidia
read Aristida.

88, line 28, for 688 read 663.

180, line 4 from bottom, for vicosa read viscosa.

WEBB, VARDON, AND PRITCHARD, PRINTERS, GRESHAM-STREET, ADELAIDE,

TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND ‘

REP ORT

OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(LATE ADELAIDE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY).

VE, @ ere eae

(FOR 1879-80.)

Bore ee cS se Se ee, ee IN GS:

Adelaide :

G. ROBERTSON, 103, KING WILLIAM STREET.

1880.
Seats . ae op i g
P —_—— >
WEBB, VARDON, AND PRITCHARD, PRINTERS, GRESHAM-STREET, ADELAIDE, N

Tone =e

‘

-

C
‘=

$
bs
¥
7
j
{
{

“BI TelTsny
"Sav hie ber

dicot

10017